imm. GIFT OF JANE KoSATHER \ Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from Microsoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/appliedlatincourOOfreerich APPLIED LATIN A COURSE FOR BEGINNERS W. H. FREEMAN, Ph.D. (Harvard) HEAD OF THE LATIN DEPARTMENT, HIGH SCHOOL, TRENTON, N. J. i PUBLISHED BY WEIDENHAMER AND COMPANY MILTON • PENNA. COPYRIGHT, 1916, BY WEIDENHAMER & COMPANY ALL BIGHTS RESERVED WM.F. FELL CO 'PRINTERS PHILADELPHIA 7£6 PREFACE After an experience of several years teaching in College and High School, the author has become convinced that the present First Year books do not satisfy modern needs in the teaching of Latin nor do they handle the subject in a manner that produces "the greatest good for the greatest number" of students. I. The Beginners' books in present use have been written too much for the small number of students who intend to go to College, and too little for the great number who study Latin only during two or three years of High School work. Within the last few years the makers of High School curricula have been forced to pay more attention to the demands of the great mass of students who go no further than the High School. Courses more nearly related to their needs in later life as citizens and workers have been adopted. Traditional courses which gained reputations as valuable only for College students have been disregarded by the authorities and neglected by the students. Latin, especially, has been attacked as an educational luxury, be- cause laymen have thought that the net results of the study do not justify the outlay of so much valuable time. Too often no definite advance could be pointed out as the result of the first year's study even by the teachers. The prospect of beginning the study of Latin earlier than in the first year of the High School, a prospect which bids fair to be realized in the new Junior High Schools, has pre- sented an opportunity for a rearrangement of Beginners' Latin so that not only the great mass of non-college students PREFACE may be benefited in ways not possible before, but those students also who are preparing for College may acquire a yet broader range of scholarship. Applied Latin, by its new treatment of the language and its correlation of Latin to the study of English, history, mathematics, and the commercial branches, aims to increase the powers of the ordinary High School pupil and to prove that Latin is an educational necessity. II. Present-day Latin books prevent the enthusiastic teacher from making adequate use of broad training in the class-room. Beginners' books are today so crammed with material, the direct object of which is to prepare the student for the reading of Caesar in the second year, that the teacher is reduced to desperation in attempting to cover merely the minimum requirements of first year work. No time is al- lowed for the correlation of Latin with other subjects, for digressions upon the life and manners of the ancient nations, for the drawing of conclusions from the study of an older civilization which can be applied to the questions of modern times. This is partly because there is so much Latin to cover, and partly because no inspirational material is in- cluded in the books used. Many a teacher does not feel at liberty to add life to Latin because the arrangement of his text-book seems to forbid any innovations. Excellent teachers are for this reason really prevented from making any personal impression on their classes. Applied Latin aims to give the broad-gauge teacher a chance to inspire his students. The subject matter is arranged partly with a view to the acquisition of a sound foundation in Latin; partly to the correlation of Latin with things modern and vital. PREFACE III. The important aid which Latin can give to the other subjects included in the High School curriculum is hardly touched upon in the present introductory Latin books. For many years it has been recognized that those who have studied Latin enter upon life better equipped in many ways than those who have never studied the subject. Experiments carried on at various points have uniformly indicated that in the matter of enlarged vocabulary, correct spelling, and facility in the use of English words non-Latin students are at a distinct disadvantage. Applied Latin, by its constant drills in English derivatives, aims to enrich the student's vocabulary. The Latin words selected for memorizing, while none that are frequent in Caesar have been omitted, have been chosen especially because of their importance as root words in English. The problem of teaching formal English grammar has always given educators much trouble. Teachers are in agree- ment that hardly any progress is made in this difficult sub- ject until the student takes up the study of a foreign language, preferably one that is highly inflected. In Ap- plied Latin careful attention is given to the connection of Latin with formal English grammar. The parts of speech, types of sentences, use of cases, and conjugation of verbs are consistently developed with reference to English. The inability on the part of students to make use of the information gained in one subject in the work of another subject is almost too common a phenomenon to be men- tioned. It is the usual experience of teachers to find the facts of literature, history, biology, etc., pigeon-holed, so to speak, in the student's brain and impossible of use except in the individual course in which the information was ob- tained. Applied Latin, with its inter chapters on ancient 5 PREFACE geography, ancient history, ancient customs and modes of life, seeks to connect these subjects with modern geography, history, and life, and in this way to train the student to make effective use of his information, not in some particular class-room, but in all his class-rooms and especially in the problems of after-life. Teachers who make use of this book should keep in mind the following facts: i. Applied Latin is intended to give the student of Latin a sound foundation in the forms and constructions of the Latin language. 2. Applied Latin aims also to increase the student's English vocabulary, to train him in the uses of words, and to make perfectly clear the close relation of Latin to the other subjects of the curriculum.. The translation of Latin to English and of English to Latin is to be a secondary matter compared with awakening a realization of the im- portance of a knowledge of Latin as an aid to the study of English. 3. Applied Latin is so arranged that the broad-gauge teacher may feel justified in supplementing his teaching with the results of wide study in Latin and English, without a lurking suspicion that he is neglecting the subject of Latin in so doing. The division by topics and not by lessons leaves the rate of progress of the class entirely under the control of the teacher. 4. The material in Applied Latin is entirely new, and the treatment is different from that found in the ordinary Beginners' Book. The text has been tried out at various times in Latin classes, and many suggestions from Latin teachers enter into the composition of the book. In the arrangement of the book the author has been assisted by 6 PREFACE the teachers of Latin in the Trenton High School, in the correlation of Latin with English by J. Milnor Dorey, Head of the English Department of the same school, and in the reading and correction of proof by Howard L. Packard, Head of the Latin Department, State Normal School, Trenton, New Jersey. ! CONTENTS TOPIC PAGE Introduction n I. The Noun. First Declension 15 Rome and the Basin of the Mediterranean Sea 24 II. The Preposition 25 III. The Noun. Second Declension 28 Rome and the Eastern Nations 35 IV. The Adjective. First and Second Declensions 36 V. The Verb. First Conjugation: Active Voice; In- dicative Mood 41 The Nations of the Ancient World 52 VI. The Verb. Second Conjugation: Active Voice; In- dicative Mood 54 The Peninsula of Italy 62 VII. The Noun. Third Declension 63 Latium, the Home of the Latins 77 VIII. The Adjective. Third Declension 78 IX. The Verb. Third Conjugation: Active Voice; In- dicative Mood 84 The Cities of Italy 92 X. The Adjective. Comparison 93 XI. The Verb. Third Conjugation in -io: Active Voice; Indicative Mood 97 XII. The Noun. Fourth Declension 100 XIII. The Noun. Fifth Declension 102 The City of Rome 104 XIV. The Verb. Fourth Conjugation: Active Voice; In- dicative Mood 105 XV. The Sentence. Interrogative in XVI. The Verb Sum: Indicative Mood 112 XVII. The Adverb 114 XVIII. The Sentence. Compound. The Conjunction 116 XIX. The Pronoun 118 The Story of Early Rome 1 20 XX. The Verb. First Conjugation: Passive Voice; In- dicative Mood 121 XXI. The Pronoun. Personal 124 XXII. The Verb. First and Second Conjugations: Passive Voice; Indicative Mood 126 XXIII. The Pronoun. Reflexive 130 8 CONTENTS TOPIC PAGE XXIV. The Verb. Second and Third Conjugations: Passive Voice; Indicative Mood 132 XXV. The Pronoun. Demonstrative 135 XXVI. .The Verb. Third Conjugation: Passive Voice; In- dicative Mood 137 The Story of Later Rome 138 XXVII. The Pronoun. Demonstrative 140 XXVIII. The Verb. Third Conjugation in -io: Passive Voice; Indicative Mood 142 XXIX. The Adjective and Pronoun. Interrogative 144 XXX. The Verb. Fourth Conjugation: Passive Voice; In- dicative Mood 146 XXXI. The Pronoun. Demonstrative 148 XXXII. The Verb. Fourth Conjugation: Passive Voice; In- dicative Mood 150 The Heart of Rome 151 XXXIII. The Sentence. Complex 155 XXXIV. The Verb. Subjunctive Mood: Clauses of Purpose and Result. Sequence of Tenses 160 The Roman Forum 171 XXXV. The Verb. Subjunctive Mood: Clauses of Time. Compound Verbs of the First Conjugation 173 The Principal Buildings in the Roman Forum 185 XXXVI. The Verb. Subjunctive of Sum. Clauses of Condi- tion and Cause. Compound Verbs of the Second Conjugation 186 The Uses of the Buildings in the Forum 197 XXXVII. The Sentence. Complex. Clauses of Concession. Relative Clauses. Compound Verbs of the Third Conjugation • 198 The Religion of Rome 210 XXXVIII. The Verb. Subjunctive in Exhortations and Wishes. Imperative. Commands and Prohibitions 211 The Roman House 221 XXXIX. The Verb. Participle. Ablative Absolute. Infin- itive. Complementary Infinitive : . . 223 Modern Conveniences in the Roman House 234 XL. The Verb. Gerund and Gerundive. Periphrastic Conjugations. Supine 236 The Occupations of the Romans 249 XLI. The Pronoun and Adjective. Indefinite 250 XLII. The Interjection. Numerals 252 Some Tools Used by the Romans 258 XLIII. The Verb. Deponents. Semi-Deponents. Compound Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation ■ . . 259 Skilled Workmen among the Romans 266 9 CONTENTS TOPIC PAGE XLIV. The Verb. Irregular Verbs, Volo, Nolo, Maid, E6, Fero, Fio. Compounds of Sum 267 XLV. Exercises in Derivatives. Suffixes 275 XLVI. The Subject. Constructions that Replace a Noun as Subject. Infinitive. Noun Clauses ....'. 278 Translation. The Creation of the World 281 XL VII. The Object in English Expressed by the Genitive in Latin 281 Translation. Joseph and His Brethren 283 XLVIII. The Object in English Expressed by the Dative in Latin 284 Translation. Joseph Sold into Egypt 285 XLIX. The Object in English Expressed by Two Accusatives in Latin 286 Translation. The Birth of Moses 288 L. The Object in English Expressed by the Ablative in Latin 289 Translation. Crossing the Red Sea 290 LI. The Object. Noun Clauses 291 A. Clauses of Purpose. The Birth of Samson 293 B. Clauses of Fearing. David and Goliath 295 C. Indirect Questions. David and Absalom 298 D. Indirect Statements. The Judgment of Solomon . 302 E. Dependent Clauses in Indirect Statements. 307 Translation. Joshua Stops the Sun 309 LII. Caesar. Gallic War. Book I, Chapters 1-8 310 LIII. Latin Derivatives Used in Modern Studies and Busi- ness 315 LIV. Synopsis of Forms 320 LV. General Vocabulary i-xxxix Index xli-xliii 10 APPLIED LATIN INTRODUCTION In Europe, many centuries before the birth of Christ, there existed a language which was spoken by a nation, or better, by a group of tribes, to which belonged the ancestors of those men who later spoke the Latin and Greek languages. At that very early time those ancient peoples were like young children who can speak a language, but who have still to learn how to write and to read it; for the art of writing had not been invented. If men wished to communi- cate with distant kinsmen, they made use of pictures such as were once used by the American Indians. Now, later, when the Greeks and Latins wandered from Europe down into the lands of Greece and Italy, they had not yet learned to write. The Egyptians who dwelt along the Nile in northern Africa were probably the first to make use of letters to express sounds. From Egypt the use of letters, carried probably by mer- chants, spread north first to Greece and then to Italy. The Greeks made use of the alphabet for the first time about the year 800 B. C. The Greek alphabet, strange as it looks, represents one stage of the development of letters. After 800 B. C. we may say that the human race began its rapid development. History was written, dates began to be kept, and mankind began to make permanent records of progress. n APPLIED LATIN Not long after 800 B. C. the alphabet was introduced into Italy by way of the city of Cumae, a Greek colony. From this city it made its way to Rome, where a standard al- phabet was developed for use in writing Latin. Today, many centuries later, in the writing of English we use the Latin alphabet, and our letters are called Latin letters. Consequently, as speakers and writers of English, we should feel a great interest in the Latin alphabet. THE LATIN ALPHABET Except for the letters j and w, the Latins had all the letters we use. The alphabet consisted of vowels, diphthongs (pairs of vowels), and consonants. THE VOWELS, DIPHTHONGS, AND CONSONANTS The vowels were a, e, i, 0, u, y; the diphthongs ae, au, oe, ei, eu, ui. The consonants comprised all the other letters. The vowels were either long (prolonged) or short (quick) in pronunciation. Letters marked thus a are long. a equalled a in father; a equalled a in aha. e equalled e in prey; e equalled e in get. i equalled i in machine; i equalled i in hit. 6 equalled in gold; o equalled o in obey. u equalled u in crude; u equalled u in full. ae equalled ai in aisle; au equalled ou in mouse. ei equalled ei in eight; eu equalled eu in feud. oe equalled oi in soil; ui almost the sound of we. Of the consonants, c and g were always hard, as in case and gone. S was always as 5 in yes, never like z. 12 INTRODUCTION I, when a consonant (before a vowel in the same syllable), was like y in yet; T was like / in ten, not like t in nation; V was like w in went. Ch had the sound of k. . THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN WORDS For accuracy in pronunciation, it is necessary to divide a Latin word into its syllables. There are as many syllables in a Latin word as there are vowels or diphthongs. WHAT CONSTITUTES A SYLLABLE IN LATIN A single consonant before a vowel is combined with the vowel to compose a syllable. If two or more consonants precede a vowel, the last consonant usually begins the sylla- ble: hos-tis, enemy. A syllable may begin with two con- sonants if the second of the two is either / or r: pu-bli-cus, public. At the beginning of a word (scribo) even three consonants may be included in a single syllable. THE ACCENT OF LATIN WORDS In accenting a Latin word, remember that the accent never falls on the last syllable, unless the word is composed of but one syllable. In words of two syllables the accent falls on the first syllable. In words of more than two syl- lables the accent falls on the next to the last syllable, if that syllable is long, otherwise on the second syllable from the last. THE LENGTH OF SYLLABLES Syllables are considered long if they contain a long vowel or a diphthong, or a short vowel followed by two consonants. 13 APPLIED LATIN A short syllable followed by the double consonants x ( = ks) or z ( = ds) is also considered long. PARTS OF SPEECH The words of all languages are classified as follows : nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, con- junctions, and interjections. A single noun, verb, etc., is called a part of speech. The parts of speech will be taken up consecutively in this book. SENTENCES A sentence is a group of words (parts of speech) expressing a complete thought. It is composed of a subject (a noun with its modifiers) and a predicate (a verb and its modifiers) . The subject represents that about which something is asserted. The predicate asserts something about that which the sub- ject represents. Sentences are classified as declarative, in- terrogative, and imperative. A declarative sentence is one that declares something as a fact. "We love the balmy days of spring." An interrogative sentence is one that asks a ques- tion. "Who knows the name of the city?" An imperative sentence is one that states a command. "Look at the bright moon !" Sentences are further classified as simple, compound, and complex. Simple sentences contain but one subject and one predicate. Compound sentences consist of two (or more) sentences connected by a conjunction. Complex sentences consist of one principal statement and one or more dependent statements. In the first part of this book the sentences are either simple or compound. 14 THE NOUN I. THE NOUN. FIRST DECLENSION 1 . causa, a cause, reason. silva, a forest. filia, a daughter. via, a street, road. hora, an hour. gloria, glory. littera, letter (of the alphabet). fama, fame, report. memoria, memory, tradition. vita, life. 2. These Latin words are naming words, or nouns. In English, nouns are classified as proper, common, ab- stract, and collective. Proper nouns are names of particular persons or places; John, Baltimore; Common, of ordinary persons, places, or things; book, pen; Abstract, of conditions or qualities; heat, gratitude; Collective, of collections of persons or places; crowd, multitude. In Latin there are the same classes. In the following sentences repeat the Latin word when- ever you see its English meaning: i. My daughter walked through the forest. 2. The road takes an hour. 3. We all hope for an hour of glory. 4. A cause for fame may come to you during your life. 5. The letter M begins the word memory. 6. Where is the road to fame ? 3. Word Study. — A very large number of words in Eng- lish with which you are now familiar, or will some day meet in your reading, are made from words of the Latin language. In the following examples try to find the Latin words from which each English word is derived, and learn to spell the English word correctly. 15 APPLIED LATIN because (causa), on account of. hour (hdra), a period of time, via (via), by way of. filial (f ilia) , belonging to a child, famous (fama), well spoken of. letter (littera), part of the alphabet, vital (vita), pertaining to life, sylvan (silva), wooded, glorious (gloria), full of glory, memorial (memoria), that which refreshes the memory. 4. Examples of the Proper Use of These Words. — i. The monument was a memorial to a famous man. 2. We love sylvan scenery. 3. Let us go via Washington Street. 4. Heroic deeds are often glorious because of their vital impor- tance in warding off disaster. 5. Filial love is a child's affec- tion for its parents. Form some other words, using the same Latin roots; as, viaduct, infamous, immemorial, literature. If unfamiliar, look up their meanings and talk them over in class. Note. — As there is no word in Latin for a or the, causa may mean a cause or the cause. Quiz. — Of what part of speech are the Latin words given above? How is English closely connected with Latin? 5. amicitia, friendship. gratia, favor, gratitude. copia, plenty, abundance. iniuria, an injury, injustice. fortuna, fortune. inopia, lack, scarcity. fossa, a ditch, trench. natura, nature, character. fuga, a flight, retreat. poena, a penalty. These nouns are like those of Paragraph 1. Have you noticed that these nouns all end in the letter a? In the following sentences repeat the Latin word whenever you see its English meaning: 1. True friendship does not permit the injury of a friend. 2. Give thanks for good 16 THE NOUN fortune. 3. Fortune is naturally fickle and uncertain. 4. Abundance and need are opposites. 5. Severe is the penalty following flight from battle. 6. Word Study. — natural (natura), according to nature, injurious (iniiiria), causing some damage, gratitude (gratia), the feeling of thankfulness for help, unfortunate (fortuna), not accompanied by good fortune, copious (copia), full, abundant, fugitive (fuga), one who flees. cornucopia (copia), a horn of plenty used at Christmas, fossil (fossa), an animal or plant of the past found imbedded in a cave or trench. 7. Examples of the Proper Use of These Words. — 1. Unfortunate are the people whose hearts are never filled with gratitude. 2. Let us penalize those who break the laws. 3. It is natural for copious rain to follow heavy clouds. 4. At Christmas we hang cornucopias full of candy on the tree. 5. Miners sometimes find fossil flowers in beds of coal. 6. The fugitive citizens fled before the approach of the enemy. Quiz. — How are the words of Paragraph 5 related to those of Paragraph 1? What other English derivatives can you add to those given above? Porta, a gate, feminine gender Cases Singular Number Plural Number 8. Nominative porta, a gate portae, gates Genitive portae, of a gate portarum, of gates Dative portae, to or for a gate portis, to or for gates Accusative portam, a gate portas, gates Vocative porta, (0) gate portae, (0) gates Ablative porta, with, from, in, portis, with, from, in by a gate gates 2 17 by APPLIED LATIN Meaning of the terms used with nouns: 9. Declension. — The forms of a noun grouped according to cases. The cases of a Latin noun are indicated by the changes in the spelling of the final syllable. Porta, then, having many cases, has many different spellings, all of which are correct. An English noun rarely changes in spelling, for English no longer has an elaborate system of declensions. The addition of s to show (i) possession; as, the cat's; (2) a plural number; as, the cats, is the only common change in spelling of a noun permitted in English. The beginning of the Latin word should bring the English meaning at once to your mind. Having mastered the meaning once for all, then devote yourself to the final syllables. In the reading of English, your eye passes over final syllables without special attention; in Latin, these syllables are the most important part of the word. In the declension above, the final syllables or endings are printed in black type. First declension nouns are declined like porta, and regu- larly end in a in the nominative singular. Learn to decline porta. 10. Number. — Latin words have two numbers (singular and plural). The forms in the first column above compose the singular number, and are to be used when only one per- son, place, or thing is spoken of. The forms in the second column compose the plural number, and are to be used only when two or more persons, etc., are spoken of. 11. Gender. — The sex of a person, place, or thing is called gender. There are three genders in Latin: masculine, m., 18 THE NOUN applied to nouns that designate males, rivers, winds, and months; feminine, f., applied to nouns that designate fe- males, countries, trees, and towns; neuter, n., applied to nouns that are neither masculine nor feminine in gender. In English gender presents little difficulty, for nouns de- noting males are masculine ; females, feminine; things, neuter. 12. Nouns of the first declension are regularly feminine in gender. Three masculine exceptions : agricola, -ae, a farmer; nauta, -ae, a sailor; poeta, -ae, a poet. Quiz. — What is the importance of the first part of a Latin word? Why is the final syllable difficult for us to master? What is number? Gender? Do you know any English words which are peculiar in gender? Is ship masculine, feminine, or neuter in English? Can you name some English words that are both masculine and feminine in gender? 13. audacia, -ae, boldness, f. cura, -ae, care, f. ancora, -ae, an anchor, f. diligentia, -ae, diligence, f. aqua, -ae, water, f. familia, -ae, family, retinue, f . corona, -ae, a crown, f. disciplina, -ae, training, f. custodia, -ae, custody, f. femina, -ae, a woman, f. 14. The Names and Uses of the Cases. — The Nomi- native is the case of the subject (person, place, or thing about which we, as speakers or writers, make some assertion). The Genitive case usually indicates possession. The Dative is the case of the indirect object of the verb. The Accusative is the case of the direct object of the verb (the person, place, or thing directly affected by the action of the verb) . The Voca- i9 APPLIED LATIN tive is the case of direct address (0 John! O Mary!). The Ablative case has several uses. It may mean the person with whom or the thing with which something is done ; the place in which something is situated or fromwhich something is taken. In English, there are but three cases: nominative, objective, and possessive. The latest English grammars now use the Latin names for these cases. 15. Examples or the Use of Cases. — i. I have Henry's {genitive, possessive) book, John {vocative). 2. Sarah {nom- inative) gave the doll {accusative, objective) to Mary {dative). 3. From the window {ablative) in the parlor {ablative) we saw Mabel {accusative, objective) walking with Jane {abla- tive). 4. James struck the dog {accusative, objective) with a stick {ablative). 16. Name all possible cases and give accurate translations of these forms : 1. Natura, gratias, vita. 2. Filiam, inopia, famam. 3. Porta, ancorae, iniurias. 4. Silvas, memoriae, feminas. 5. Fortunae, horarum, littera. 6. Coronis, fossae, causarum, viis, aquae. 17. Word Study. — Corona gives us the words crown, coronet, cornice; ctistodia, custody, custodian; aqua, aquatic, aqueous, aqua-pura; cura, care, accurate, curative, curator; femina, feminine, effeminate, feminism; ancora, anchor; familia, familiar; disciplina, discipline ; audacia, audacious. Note. — The plural of copia means troops or forces. The dative and ablative plural of filia is flliabus. Quiz. — How many cases are there in Latin? In English? What are their uses? Explain the words in Paragraph 17. 20 THE NOUN 18. forma, -ae,form, f. scientia, -ae, science, knowledge, f. lingua, -ae, the tongue, f. sagitta, -ae, an arrow, f. fabula, -ae, a story, f . tabula, -ae, a flat surface, tablet, f . terra, -ae, land or earth, f. provincia, -ae, a district, province, f. turba, -ae, a crowd, f . pugna, -ae, a fight, battle, f . Learn these nouns. 19. In the declension of nouns certain cases are spelled with the same letters; take, for instance, the genitive and dative of porta. If taken by itself, there is no means of determining whether portae is genitive or dative, singular, or nominative, plural. Keep this fact in mind and always try to recall all possible cases. In translation, above all, be flexible. Do not confine yourself invariably to a single case or a single trans- lation. Try all possible cases until you have the one that fits the construction of the sentence. 20. Name all possible cases and give accurate translations of these forms: i. Forma, fossas, silvae. 2. Feminam, tab- ulis, vltam. 3. Discipllnarum, fabulae, causarum. 4. Turbas, poetae, memoriam. 5. Scientiae, audaciam, horls. 6. Corona, copiam, poenas. 7. Ancorae, inopia, pugna. 8. Diligentiam, fama, naturam. 9. Familia, provinces, for- marum. 10. Custodiae, fabulls, sagittis. 11. Linguas, gloria, iniuria. 12. Terrae, turbarum, scientia. 21. Word Study. — Explain the meaning of these sen- tences, using the Latin nouns of this lesson: 1. George Ade wrote fables in slang. 2. Sagittarius is a figure of the Zodiac. 3. Linguistics is the study of words. 4. There are subter- ranean chambers in the Mammoth Cave. 5. Empires are 21 APPLIED LATIN composed of provinces. 6. A poet sometimes uses provincial language for effect. 7. Let us tabulate all the forms and leave them undisturbed. 8. Pugilists are noted for their pugnacity. Are these words familiar: formation, poesy, turbulent, tablet, impugn, fabulous, language, terrain, prescient, in- form, terrestrial? Use these new words in sentences of your own composition. Quiz. — Why must the student of Latin be flexible in the translation of cases? REVIEW 22. Give the Latin for the following English words, pass- ing around in columns in different directions: Singular Norn . a poet, boldness, memory, tablet, anchor. Gen. of a life, daughter, crown, forest, penalty. Dat. j to or I for a cause, earth, custody, gate, glory. Ace. a ditch, water, hour, street, battle. Voc. (0) fortune, tongue, letter, training, care. Abl. S with, t etc. fame, plenty, lack, flight, favor. Plural Nom crowns, provinces, arrows, injuries, sailors. Gen. of gates, battles, favors, daughters, cares. Dat. \ to or (for lands, farmers, sciences, anchors, streets. Ace. lives, families, women, poets, penalties, Voc. (0) forms, ditches, tongues, natures, glories. Abl. { with, (etc. cares, tablets, flights, hours, stories. 22 APPLIED LATIN 23. Review of English Derivatives. — Because, via, fa- mous, vital, glorious, hour, filial, letter, sylvan, memorial, viaduct, infamous, immemorial, literature. Natural, injur- ious, gratitude, unfortunate, copious, fugitive, cornucopia, fossil. Crown, coronet, cornice; custody, custodian. Aqua- tic, aqueous, aqua-pura, care, accurate. Curative, curator, feminine, effeminate, feminism. Anchor, familiar, discipline, audacious. Fable, Sagittarius, linguistics, subterranean, provincial. Language, tabulate, undisturbed, pugnacity. Formation, poesy, turbulent, tablet, impugn, language, terrain, prescient, inform, terrestrial. Make a list of the other derivatives which you have dis- cussed in class. Rome and the Basin of the Mediterranean Sea The map on page 23 presents to you all of Europe, a portion of Africa, and a small part of Asia. These lands comprise the basin of the Mediterranean Sea, in which all that was important in ancient civilization reached the highest point of development. In this area two nations were rivals for supremacy. The Greeks and the Romans came down from the interior of Europe, found homes in the Italian and Greek peninsulas, and became the leading nations of the East and West respectively. The Greeks, first by colon- ization, then by conquest under the leadership of Alexander the Great, gained possession of the East. Then Greek merchants carried the language and ideals of the Greeks all over the Mediterranean basin. While the Romans were still 24 THE PREPOSITION a small nation centred at Rome (Roma) , and the Latin lan- guage was confined to very narrow limits, Greek was the common language of the ancient world. If you will examine the map carefully, you will see that the city of Rome is at the centre of the ancient world. This position was of immense importance to the Romans, for it enabled them to extend their dominion from a com- mon center, marching in one direction after another. The history of Rome is the story of the constant and irrepressible growth of a war-like people. At first the Romans had to overcome the hostile tribes that surrounded Rome; next, they came into conflict with the Etruscans who dwelt in the northern part of Italy (Italia). Then came the vital struggle with the great naval empire of Carthage (Carthago), which controlled the coast of Africa, the island of Sicily (Sicilia), and a part of Spain (Hispania). By constant suc- cesses in these wars the Romans gained control of the West- ern half of the ancient world. II. THE PREPOSITION 24. The young Romans were confronted by much the same problems in the study of Latin as we are today in the study of English. They did not speak Latin without careful training, nor read it without finding many difficulties. For instance, in reading, the cases spelled with exactly the same letters were very hard for the ordinary Roman boy to translate. Some cases, like the ablative, had more than one possible translation. To smooth out these difficulties, the 25 APPLIED LATIN Romans made use of a number of small words called prepo- sitions. For example, the form gloria, by itself, might be nominative or ablative, but if the word ab stood before it, the case was surely ablative, for this preposition was never used with any other case. Thus, the prepositions made reading very accurate, and much easier. Think for a moment of the four translations of the ablative, and you will realize what a help these words were. 25. Prepositions used only with the accusative: Ad, to; ante, before; apud, at or near; circum, around; contra, against; extra, outside; inter, between or among; ob, on account of; per, through; post, after; praeter, except or beyond; propter, because of; trans, across. 26. Prepositions used only with the ablative: Ab (a), away from, or by; cum, with; de, concerning, or down from; ex (e), out of or from; pro, in front of, or before; sine, without. 27. Prepositions used with the accusative, sometimes with the ablative: In, in, or into; sub, under; super, above. Let these prepositions identify the cases for you. 28. In English we use prepositions with very great fre- quency, for our words are no longer declined, and we have no other means of determining the cases. The meanings of the Latin prepositions will furnish you with the most common prepositions in English. Learn them carefully and try to recognize them in English sentences. Note. — Use a and e before words beginning with a con- sonant. Quiz. — What are prepositions? Their uses? Are there 26 THE PREPOSITION prepositions in English? Were English words ever declined? Why are prepositions important in English? 29. insula, -ae, island, f. flamma, -die, flame, f. pecunia, -ae, money, f. victoria, -ae, victory, f. praeda, -ae, booty, f. vigilia, -ae, watch (during night) , f. invidiaf-ae, envy, jealousy, f. Ira, -ae, anger, rage, f. anima, -ae, the breath, soul, f . rosa, -ae, a rose, f . 30. Translate these sentences, noting the use of the pre- positions and the cases which follow them: i. We advanced ad fossam. 2. They left ante fugam. 3. He lived apud Galbam (Latin proper name, Galba). 4. They ran circum filiam. 5. We stood extra pugnam. 6. She sat inter rosas. 7. Did you travel per provinciam? 8. We had no weapons praeter sagittas. 9. They left us propter iram. 10. Throw the stone trans viam. 11. He started a porta. 12. We leaped de insula into the sea. 13. They rose ex aqua. 14. The messenger stood pro porta. 15. He came sine pe- cunia. 16. Let us march in provinciam. 17. We dwell in insula. 18. The booty lay sub porta. 19. The clouds hang super terrain. 20. They left us ob invidiam. 31. Word Study. — peninsula (Insula), land which is almost an island. pecuniary (pecunia), relating to money. predatory (praeda), devoted to the pursuit of booty. envy (invidia), a feeling of dislike or hatred. animal (anima), something possessing the breath of life. inflame (flamma), cause to break into flame. vigilant (vigilia), watchful. irate (Ira), angry. rosy (rosa), having the color of roses. 32. Examples of the Use of These Words. — 1. A peninsula is land partly surrounded by water. 2. Thieves 27 APPLIED LATIN are said to follow a predatory business. 3. Great success often inspires envy among men. 4. Man is the highest of the animals. 5. Let not wrath inflame you. 6. Be vigilant, and success is inevitable. 7. The sky is rosy just at sunrise. Can you guess the Latin words from which come : anima- tion, isle, impecunious, flagrant, victorious, vigil, rosary, insulate, conflagration? Learn to spell these words and to use them in sentences. III. THE NOUN. SECOND DECLENSION 33. amicus, a friend, m. nuntius, a messenger, m. captivus, a captive, m. populus, a people, m. equus, a horse, m. socius, an ally, m. legatus, an envoy, lieutenant, m. vicus, a village, m. murus, a wall, m. servus, a slave, servant, m. numerus, a number, m. campus, afield, m. filius, a son, m. ventus, a wind, m. 34. These nouns are unlike those you have already learned in that they end not in -a but in -us. Such nouns belong to the second declension, and are regularly masculine in gender. Learn these words by replacing the English words by the Latin equivalent in these sentences: 1. The caplive had a son. 2. A friend of the people. 3. The wind swept across the field. 4. The messenger was a lieutenant. 5. The slave saw a number of horses. 6. Our allies dwell here. 35. Word Study. — What do these words mean: capture, enumerate, servile, popular, mural, equestrian, announce, sociable, vent, campus, numerical, ventilator, captivity, inimical, legation, depopulate, servitude? 28 THE NOUN 36. The Meaning of Compound English Words, — Many compound words arc formed by placing a preposition before one of the parts of speech (verbs, adjectives, etc.)- The prefix ab (a) means away (abstain). Ab often appears as a-, abs-, as-. Ad means to (admit). Ad often appears as ac-, ag-, al-, ap-, ar-, as-, at-. Ante means before (anteroom). Circum means around (circumstance) . Cum means together (confer). Cum often appears as com-, co-, col-, cor-. 37. Examples of Such Compounds. — Accurate, aggres- sive, allude, appear, arrest, assume, competence, cooperate, correct, colloquial. Pick out similar compound words in any English book you are using. You must be sharp in separating the preposi- tion from the word, so that you may pick out the Latin root words. This simple scheme will save you from a constant use of the English dictionary. Quiz. — What declension is given above? How is it recog- nized? How are masculines of this declension determined? If a number of English words were handed to you with the request that you explain them, in what way could you do so without looking for them in the English dictionary? What new power, then, will the study of Latin give you? 38. aedificium, a building, n. oppidum, a walled tower, n. auxilium, aid, help, n. periculum, danger, n. bellum, war, n. praesidium, a garrison, n. frumentum, grain, n. proelium, a battle, n. impedimentum, a hindrance, n. regnum, a kingdom, n. imperium, supreme command, n. signum, a sign, standard, n. initium, a beginning, n. spatium, a space, distance, n. 29 APPLIED LATIN Nouns ending in -um belong to the second declension and are regularly neuter in gender. Their gender is easily determined by the final syllable, in -um. 39. Word Study. — Pick out the Latin derivatives in these sentences: i. The massive edifice burned during the night. 2. The militia should furnish auxiliaries in time of war. 3. When are nations belligerent? 4. Let no one im- pede our progress. 5. A huge flag fluttered above the im- perial tent. 6. What are your initials? 7. An interregnum followed the death of the king. 8. The space of one hour intervened. 40. In compound English words De means down or thor- oughly (despise, destroy). Ex (e) means out (evade). Ex often appears as ef-. In means in, on, against (invade). In often appears as irn-, ir-, il-. Inter means between, in pieces (interest, interrupt). Ob means toward, to meet (offer). Ob often appears as oc-, of-, op-, obs-, 0-. Sub means under (sub- way) . Sub often appears as sue-, suf-, sug-, sup-, sur-. Super means upon, over, above (supersede) . 41. Examples of Compounds. — Deter, determine, event, effort, immense, irreverent, illusion, occur, offering, opposite, obsolete, omit, submarine, superintendent, success, suffer, suggest, suppose, surreptitious. Pick out similar compound words in your English reader. Quiz. — What new nouns are considered above? How can you tell the gender of these nouns? How do preposi- tions help you to reach the meaning of English words? 30 THE NOUN Annus, a year, m. Cases Singular Plural 42. Nom. annus, a year anni, years Gen. anni, of a year annorum, of years Dat. anno, to or for a year annis, to or for years Ace. annum, a year annos, years Voc. anne, (O) year anni, (0) years AM. anno, with, from, in, by a annis, with, from, in, or by year years Donum, a gift, n. Cases Singular Plural Nom. donum, a gift dona, gifts Gen. doni, of a gift dondrum, of gifts Dat. dond, to or for a gift donis, to or for gifts Ace. donum, a gift dona, gifts Voc. donum, (O) gift dona, (O) gifts A bl. dono, with, from, in, or by a donis, with, from, in, or by gift gifts 43. Learn these standard nouns. For practice decline the words given in Paragraphs 33 and 38. By comparison note in just what cases the masculine and neuter nouns differ. Remember that in all neuter words the nominative, accusa- tive, and vocative cases are alike in each number respectively. 44. The vocative case in this declension is important. In masculine nouns of the second declension the vocative singular ends in -e. In all other declensions the vocative is the same in form as the nominative in both singular and plural numbers. 45. Translate the following forms, giving all possible cases : 1. Amlcl, oppida, ad oppida. 2. Camporum, slgnl, ventis, in ventls. 3. Captlvum, initils, extra muros. 4. Legatorum, servl, auxilia. 5. Frumento, spatiis, praesidio, sine praesidio. 6. Proelium, propter proelium, equo, cum equo. 7. Sociorum, 31 APPLIED LATIN inter socios, sine socils. 8. Numero, cum nuntio, bella. 9. Post aedificium, contra imperium, inter perlcula. 10. Extra regnum, vlcorum, ex populo, f ilium, impedimenta. 46. Three irregular nouns of the second declension. Singular Nom. puer, a boy, m. vir, a man, m. ager, afield, m. Gen. pueri viri agri Dat. puero viro agro Ace. puerum virum agrum Voc. ' puer vir ager Abl. puero viro Plural agro Nom. pueri, boys viri, men agri, fields Gen. puerdrum virorum agrorum Dat. pueris viris agris Ace. pueros viros agros Voc. pueri viri agri Abl. pueris viris agris Only the nominative singular cases of these nouns are irregular. The original endings in -us (as puer-us) were dropped. Quiz. — What special rule applies to all neuter words? What is to be remembered about the Vocative case? 47. Like annus and donum decline : animus, -i, spirit, courage, m. gladius, -i, a sword, m. (1) somnus, -i, sleep, m. modus, -i, a measure, limit, way, method, m. scutum, -i, a shield, n. supplicium, -i, punishment, n. (2) fatum, -i, fate, n. telum, -I, a weapon, spear, n. vinum, -i, wine, n. vallum, -I, a wall. n. castra, -drum, a military camp, n., ingenium, -i, ability, talent, n. used only in the plural. 32 remus, -i, an oar, m. locus, -i, a place, m. (3) deus, -i, a god, m. (4) ludus, a game, m. templum, -i, a temple, n. astrum, -i, a star, n. THE NOUN Notes. — i. Nouns ending in -ius form the genitive and vocative singular in -I instead of -il and -ie respectively. 2. Nouns in -ium form the genitive singular in -1 as well as -ii (suppli'ci). 3. Locus may be masculine or neuter (loci, loca) in the plural. Loca means places, loci, topics in books. 4. The vocative singular of deus is like the nominative. The nominative plural is also written di; the dative and ablative plural, dis. 48. Word Study. — Learn the meaning and correct spell- ing of these derivatives. From animus, animosity, animus; locus, locate, local, locality, location, locomotive; somnus, insomnia, somnambulism; remus, trireme; modus, mode, model, moderate, modest; gladius, gladiolus, gladiator; castra, Chester, Winchester; ludus, delude, allude, illusion, ludicrous; vallum, circum vallate ; ingenium, ingenious, genius; templum, templar, temple; astrum, astrology, aster; fatum, fate, fatal; vinum, wine, vintage, vineyard, vinegar. 49. Examples of the Use of These Words. — 1. Be- tween the two Senators there was a feeling of animosity. 2. A victim of somnambulism died of exposure to the cold. 3. Strong coffee may produce insomnia. 4. The Greeks used triremes in war. 5. Stylish clothes are said to be in the mode. 6. The gladiolus is an old-fashioned flower. 7. Names of cities in England that end in Chester mark the sites of Roman castra. 8. The town was circumvallated by a wall. 9. Of all inventors Edison is perhaps the most ingenious. 10. The most famous vintages come from the vineyards of France. 3 . 33 APPLIED LATIN REVIEW 50. Give the Latin for the following English words, pass- ing around in columns in different directions: Singular Number Nom. a friend, gift, danger, command, help. Gen. of a captive, ally, grain, building, punish- ment. Dat. to or boy garrison, horse, sleep, servant. for a Ace. a battle, wind, breath, people, year. Voc. (0) field, kingdom, place, sword, wall. AM. with a, etc. number, man, standard , messenger, weapon. Plural Number Nom. years, sons, measures i, spaces, shields. Gen. of wines, gifts, messen- games, begin- gers, nings. Dat. to or walled talents, envoys, horses, weapons. for towns, Ace. fields, buildings, kingdoms, men, allies. Voc. (0) villages, hin- walls, drances, stars, dangers. Abl. with, etc. wars, servants, temples, commands, fates. 51. Review the English derivatives of second declension nouns. 52. Translate the following: Latin to English English to 1 Latin i. Pueri. Ad agrum. 1. Methods. 2. Cum animo. Pro castrls. 2. On account of fate. 3. Sine remls. Ab oppido. 3. Of swords 4. Ante ludum. Post bellum. 4. In the fields. 5. Scutorum. Extra pugnam. 5. Around the men. 6. Ingenl. Contra socios. 6. Without sleep. 7. Ad astra. Per legatos. 7. Among the gods. 8. E castrls. Propter naturam. 8. Wines. 9. De vallo. Ob iniuriam. 9. With punishment. 10. In templls. Cum ancora. 10. Across the place. 34 ROME AND THE EASTERN NATIONS Rome and the Eastern Nations Look at the map once more.* East of Italy lay the Empire of Alexander the Great, extending from Greece to India and south to the ends of Egypt (Aegyptus). This empire broke up after Alexanders death into a number of strong kingdoms governed by the descendants of Alexander's gen- erals. The Romans first defeated Pyrrhus, one of Alex- ander's generals who had invaded Italy; then carried the war to Greece, which soon fell into their power. Asia Minor and Egypt were added to the Roman power by successful wars, and thus all the East came under the control of Rome. For centuries these lands enjoyed a period of peace, dur- ing which the language, customs, and above all, the splen- did governmental system of the Romans spread all over this area. Around the frontiers stood the famous Roman army, repelling all attacks. When, finally, the power of Rome was overthrown, the Latin customs and language had become so much a part of the traditions of the subject nations, especially in the West, that they never lost hold. These nations continued to use the Latin language, to follow the Roman style of living, and to adapt the Roman system of government to their own needs. The Latin languages of modern times are Italian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese. Beyond the bounds of Europe, Latin languages are spoken in the southwest portion of the United States, in Mexico, Central America, and throughout South America. * Cf. page 23. 35 APPLIED LATIN Many Latin words were added to the English language through the French language when the Normans, under William the Conqueror, subdued England. The Normans made French, a branch of Latin, the court language of England. In the centuries that followed, many more French (Latin) words were taken over by the English. When English became again the court language, the French (Latin) words were kept. A knowledge of Latin is therefore a splendid assistance to the study of most modern languages, and especially to the study of English. IV. THE ADJECTIVE. FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS 53. altus, alta, altum, high or deep. annuus, annua, annuum, yearly. bonus, bona, bonum, good. copiosus, copiosa, copiosum, abundant. longus, longa, longum, long. amplus, ampla, amplum, extensive. certus, certa, certum, certain, appointed. novus, nova, novum, new or strange. 54. The words above are adjectives. We take up adjec- tives now because they are closely associated with nouns and resemble them in declension. Adjectives add some fact, such as a condition, or a quality, to nouns, and regularly stand just before or just after the nouns they qualify. Because of this close association with nouns, adjectives came to be de- clined like nouns. In the English language, as in Latin, ad- jectives are used to qualify the meanings of nouns. They call attention to size, color, shape, quality, etc. 36 THE ADJECTIVE 55. Latus, lata, latum, wide. Memorize this standard adjective. Notice that latus uses the endings of the first and second declensions. Singular Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. Nom. latus lata latum lati latae lata Gen. lati latae lati latorum latarum latorum Dat. lato latae lato latis litis latis Ace. latum 15 tarn latum lauds latas lata Voc. late lata latum lati latae lata All. lato lata lato latis latis latis 56. Word Study. — Many English words are derived from Latin adjectives. From altus, altitude; annuus, annual, perennial, triennial, biennial, millennium; bonus, bonbon, bounty, bonus; copiosus, copious; longus, long, longitude, length, elongate, prolong; amplus, ample, amplitude, amplify; certus, certain, certitude, ascertain, certificate; novus, novel, new, novelty, renovate, novice; latus, latitude, dilate. Quiz. — What are adjectives? How are they used? What about the use of adjectives in English? 57. Like latus, decline the following adjectives: aequus, -a, -um, equal, level. gratus, -a, -um, acceptable, aeternus, -a, -um, eternal. pleasing. antiquus, -a, -um, ancient. magnus, -a, -um, great. barbarus, -a, -um, savage, foreign. malus, -a, -um, bad. clams, -a, -um, clear, famous. multus, -a, -um, much, great. densus, -a, -um, dense, thick. dubius, -a, -um, doubtful, un- falsus, -a, -um, false. certain. firmus, -a, -um, firm, strong. parvus, -a, -um, small. 58. Decline in the singular and plural: hora longa, vicus 37 APPLIED LATIN antiquus, densa silva, supplicium barbarum, equus novus, ancora magna, falsus modus. Be sure that the form of the adjective corresponds in gender, number, and case, to the form of the noun qualified. 59. Rule.— Agreement of Adjectives. — Adjectives must agree with the nouns they qualify in gender, number, and case. 60. Translate the following expressions: Note all possible cases, i. Viae latae, servo bono, famam amplam, populo antlquo, causa dubia. 2. Imperl magnl, horarum longarum, legatorum bonorum, oppidi clari. 3. Fllio grato, socils novls, vitam copiosam, regna mala, vicos barbaros. 61. Word Study.^ — Pick out the Latin derivatives: 1. There is perennial snow in the higher altitudes of the Alps. 2. We received a bonus for extra work. 3. The sun is directly over a meridian of longitude at noontime. 4. We were sur- prised at the magnificent tribute to our army. 5. Admiral Peary explored new latitudes near the North Pole. 6. Take ample space for problems in multiplication. 7. We consider ancient games mere antics. 8. On a certain day the male- factor was sentenced. 9. Equatorial storms are particularly severe. 10. Above a dense fog the sun shines as clear as ever. 1 1 . The aeroplane lost its equilibrium. 12. We should doubt false reports. 13. Let us never equivocate. 14. What is the difference between equity and inequity? 15. Our opinion was confirmed by reading the novel. 16. Many people ex- pected the Millennium to occur during the last century. Quiz. — What rule governs the agreement of adjectives and nouns? You have had some nouns, such as agricola, 38 THE ADJECTIVE which arc masculine in gender, though they appear to be feminine. What should be the gender of the adjective modi- fying such nouns? 62. These adjectives are formed from Latin nouns al- ready given: accuratus, -a, -um, accurate, carefid. bellicosus, -a, -um, warlike. curiosus, -a, -um, curious, meddlesome. fortunatus, -a, -um, fortunate. frumentarius, -a, -um, pertaining to grain. fugitivus, -a, -um, fugitive. iratus, -a, -um, angry. inimicus, -a, -um, hostile. invius, -a, -um, pathless. publicus, -a, -um, public, common. vicinus, -a, -um, neighboring. 63 . Translate these expressions : i . Ad muros altos , scientia accurata, ante portas magnas. 2. Trans imperium antiquum, praesidium certum, apud falsum amicum. 3. Sine vigilia aeterna, rosa annua, de murls vicinis. 4. Propter famam magnam, ex proelio aequo, locus publicus. 5. Praeter bonos amlcos, super silva invia, a bello dubio. 6. Sub astris novis, fama fugitlva, in campo lato. 7. Servorum curiosorum, post vltam claram, cum filils fortunatls. 8. Victoria certa, pr5 templo alto, inter populos barbaros. 9. Circum turbam densam, contra fortiinam malam, extra pugnam magnam. 64. Translate: i.Viavici. 2. Initium pugnae dubiae. 3. Rem! nautarum inimicorum. 4. Provincia regnl vicini. 39 APPLIED LATIN 5. Ira captivl. In these examples notice especially the use of the genitive case. This case is often called the adjectival case, for, (1) like an adjective, it is regularly used with a noun and limits or qualifies its meaning; (2) it regularly stands just before or just after the noun it qualifies. 65. Rule. — Genitive of Possession. — -The genitive case often denotes possession or ownership. In English, the geni- tive case is often called the possessive. It is shown by the addition of J s (or s') to the noun — the boy's hat {the boys' hats) . 66. Word Study. — Tell the meanings of these words by finding the Latin bases. Learn their spelling, and use the words in sentences of your own: 1. Clear, equality, longi- tude, latitude, clarity, magnate. 2. Multitude, density, ancient, inaccurate, popular. 3. Curiosity, enemy, malevo- lent, falsify, doubt, confirm. 4. Antiquary, antique, clarion declaration, condensation, failure. 5. Affirm, infirmary, con- gratulate, gracious, gratis, majesty. 6. Malignity, malice, sinecure, secure, impervious, voyage. 67. Make a list of the derivatives from the adjectives. Quiz. — Why is the genitive case called adjectival? What does this case commonly denote? Its name in English? How is this case indicated in English? Give the genitive singular of the words man, boy, lady, child, valley, Harry, Mr. Jones. Give the genitive plural of ally, calf, fairy, King of England, Miss Snow, lady. Write some English sentences containing these words in the genitive case. 40 THE VERB V. THE VERB. FIRST CONJUGATION 68. amo, / love; amare, to love. clamo, / shout; clamare, to shout. libero, / free; liberare, to free. narro, / relate; narrare, to relate. orno, / adorn; ornare, to adorn. paro, / prepare; parare, to prepare. parto, / carry; portare, to carry. specto, / look at; spectare, to look at. supero, / surpass; superare, to surpass. voco, / call; vocare, to call. 69. We take up at this time another of the eight parts of speech, the verb. A verb is a word used to declare or assert something about a person, place, or thing. In sentences there are two essential parts, the subject and the predicate. In English the subject and the predicate must be expressed; in Latin the subject may be included in the form of the verb, as, laudo, / praise. A verb alone may then compose a Latin sentence, for it contains the two parts necessary to the expression of a complete thought. 70. Verbs may be transitive, that is, require a direct object to complete the meaning, as, / struck the post; or intransitive, that is, require no direct object to complete the meaning, as, / walk. 71. We have seen that nouns in Latin have different forms or cases which compose the various declensions. In like manner the different forms of a Latin verb are said to com- pose a conjugation. There are in Latin four conjugations or groups of verb 4i APPLIED LATIN forms: the first, second, third, and fourth. All the verbs of the present lesson belong to the first conjugation. The conjugation to which a verb belongs is indicated by the second form, called the infinitive, as, amare, clamare, etc., above. All verbs of the first conjugation have the long vowel a in the infinitive form, as, laudare. This long vowel a is called the characteristic vowel of the first conjugation. English verbs are similar in their uses to Latin verbs. They do not, however, fall into four distinct conjugations, nor have they so elaborate a system of forms. Quiz. — What is a verb? What is its importance? What is a conjugation? Why is the infinitive form given? Why is the English verb simpler than the Latin? 72. Very many words in English are derived from Latin verbs. Sometimes these words are exactly the same in spell- ing as the Latin word upon which they are based. More often the Latin verb is buried in the English word, by being either preceded by a syllable (or two), called the prefix, or followed by a syllable (or two) , called the suffix. You have already learned the meanings of some prefixes. Consider the fol- lowing examples of English words derived from Latin verbs. 73. amo: amiable, amiability, amateur, amity, enmity, inimical, enemy, amicable, clamo: claim, claimant, clamor, acclaim, acclama- tion, declaim, declamation, disclaim, ex- claim, exclamation, exclamatory, reclaim, reclamation, proclaim, proclamation. 42 THE VERB libero: liberate, liberty, deliberate, liberal, narro: narrate, narration, narrative. orno: ornament, adorn, adornment, suborn. paro: prepare, preparation, preparative, compare, com- parable, comparative, comparison, apparel, ap- paratus, separate, separation, repair, reparation, reparative, porto : transport, transportation, report, reporter, im- port, importation, importer, important, port- able, portfolio, portmanteau, porter, portage, importune, portals, port, purport, portico, de- port, inopportune, portly, deportment, specto: spectator, spectacle, spectacles, respect, in- spect, spectre, spectrum, prospective, perspec- tive, aspect, voco: vocative, vocation, vocal, vocabulary, revoke, convoke, invoke, voice, irrevocable. 74. Learn these words carefully. How many of them do you use? Did you realize that these words were connected by the possession of a common Latin base? Can you add any other words to this list? Quiz. — For what reason is it difficult to determine the Latin base in English derivatives ? How do you know that the words following amo are interrelated? (Note the appear- ance of the common base am-.) 43 APPLIED LATIN 75. LAUDO. — Active Voice — Indicative Mood Singular Present Tense Plural i. laudo, / praise i. laudamus, we praise 2. laudas, you praise 2. laudatis, you praise 3. laudat, he (she, it) praises 3. laudant, they praise Imperfect Tense 1. laudabam, / was praising 1. laudabamus, we were praising 2. laudabas, you were praising 2. laudabatis, you were praising 3. IsLudsLbat, he (she,it) was praising 3. laudabant, they were praising Future Tense 1. laudabo, / shall praise 1. laudabimus, we shall praise 2. laudabis, you will praise 2. laudabitis, you will praise 3. laudabit, he (she, it) will praise 3. laudabunt, they will praise . 76. Learn the conjugation of these tenses and the meaning of the terms used in connection with verbs. 77. Voice. — The Latin verb has two voices, the active and the passive. The Active Voice is composed of all the forms of the verb which indicate that the subject of the sentence is acting upon some one or something; as, / praise the horse. The Passive Voice includes all those parts of the verb which indicate that the subject of the sentence is being acted upon by some one or something; as, / am praised by John. 78. Mood. — The Latin verb has three moods : indicative, subjunctive, and imperative. The term mood refers to the feeling or mood of the speaker or writer. The Indicative mood is used when the speaker wishes to state a fact. Its use implies firmness, frankness, and independence. The Subjunctive mood lacks the firmness and assurance of the indicative. It does not state facts, but rather possibilities, things which might be true under certain conditions; as, I 44 THE VERB may see, not I see; I might hear, not I hear. The Impera- tive mood is used to give a command; as, shoot! charge! 79. Tense. — The word tense means time. Tenses tell the time at which an action takes place. The Present tense indicates that the action takes place now; that is, at the time when the speech is being made. The Imperfect tense implies that (i) the action took place in the past, and (2) that it took some time in being accomplished. The Future tense implies that the action will take place in the future; that is, after the speech is made. 80. Number. — Each tense of the Latin verb is further divided into two parts, called Numbers. The Singular number follows a subject which is singu- lar; the Plural, a subject which is plural. 81. Person. — Each number of the verb has three forms, called Persons. The first person singular indicates that the subject of the sentence is /; the second person, you; the third, he, she, or it. The first person plural indicates that the subject of the sentence is we; the second you; the third, they. The Latin words meaning I, you, we, do not appear in a Latin sentence unless very emphatic. Ordinarily these words are included in the form of the Latin verb, as, laudo, / praise, etc. But when the subject of the sentence is he, she, or it, this subject is regularly expressed; as, poeta laudat, he, namely, the poet, praises. 82. Translate these verb forms : 1. Amo, llberat, ornatis. 2. Clamas, vocant, superamus. 3. Paras, portant, spectatis, narramus. 4. Parabat, clamabam, portabamus. 5. Narra- 45 APPLIED LATIN bas, vocabant, amabas. 6. Spectabatis, ornabant, llbera- batis, superabant. 7. Portabunt, vocabo, superabimus. 83. Translate these simple declarative sentences: Latin to English 1. Clamo. 2. Filiam amas. 3. Femina frumentum ex oppido* portat. 4. Amlcum ex agro * vocamus. 5. Provinciam llberatis. 6. Socil praesidium superant. 7. Aedificium ornabam. 8. Fatum viri narrabas. 9. Nuntius oppidum spectabat. 10. Tela e fossa* portabamus. 11. Gladios parabatis. 12. Flliae rosas amabant. 13. Remos spectabo. 14. Pericula superabis. 15. Poeta fabulam novam narrabit. 16. Frumentum parabimus. 17. Clamabitis. 18. Amlci portas ornabunt. English to Latin 1. We shall shout. 2. You were loving glory. 3. The women carry roses from the building. 4. We call the men. 5. You were freeing a kingdom. 6. The allies will conquer. 7. We were adorning the place. 8. You relate a long story. 9. The messengers will look at the horses. 10. I carry a shield. 11. You were preparing gifts. 12. The daughter will love the man. 13. We shall look at the forests. 14. You were conquering the allies. 15. The poets relate the fates of cities. 16. I was preparing aid. 17. You shout. 18. The friends of the boys carry wine. 84.* The Ablative Case. — The ablative is often called the adverbial case because (1) it qualifies or limits the mean- ing of the verb; (2) like an adverb, it defines the time, man- ner, place, cause, or degree of the action of a verb. In this lesson there are a few cases of the ablative intro- duced by ex (e before a word beginning with a consonant) which show the place from which something is taken or moves. 46 THE VERB 85. Rule.— Ablative of Place From Which. — The abla- tive with ab, de, ex is used to express place from which. As you have noticed in these sentences, a first person singular subject is followed by a first person singular verb; a second person singular subject by a second person singular verb; a third person singular subject (whether masculine, feminine, or neuter) by a third person singular verb. 86. Rule. — Agreement of a Verb with Its Subject. — A verb must agree with its subject in person and number. 87. This same rule applies to the English language. If you learn carefully the meanings of the Latin tenses, you will at the same time learn how to conjugate properly the tenses of the English verb. Quiz. — Why is the ablative called the adverbial case? How is place from which expressed? Give the rule for the agreement of subject and verb. What is a declarative sentence ? 88. There are certain parts of the Latin verb which are selected for memorizing, because all the other verb forms can be made from them. These forms are called the principal parts of the verb. In Latin there are four parts usually given. If fewer than four appear, the lacking forms were not commonly used by Latin writers. The principal parts of the verb laudo are the following: Present Indicative i. laudo I praise Present Infinitive 2. laudare to praise Perfect Indicative 3. laudavi I have praised 47 Perfect Passive Participle 4. laudatus praised or having been praised APPLIED LATIN i. Examples. — . clamo clamare clamavi clamatus amo am are amavi amatus paro par are paravi paratus Give the principal parts of the other first conjugation verbs. 90. In English, the principal parts of the verb are three in number, the infinitive not being given because English does not present jour regular conjugations. (Cf. 71.) 91. Examples of the Principal Parts of English Verbs: Present Indicative Past Indicative Past Participle I love I loved loved I produce I produced produced I pull I pulled pulled I go I went gone I sing I sang sung I am I was been I see I saw seen I feel I felt felt I sit I sat sat Hie Hay lain The English verbs love, produce, pull, are said to belong to the regular conjugation and do not show serious changes in form; go and sing are said to belong to the irregular conjugation; (1) because the vowels in the forms change and (2) because entire forms differ. Examine the English verbs in your reading book. Classify them according to the conjugations and give the principal parts. 48 THE VERB 92. We learn the perfect passive participle of Latin verbs at this time because a great number of English words are derived from this principal part. How many words have you already had from this principal part? Quiz. — What is the importance of the principal parts of a verb? How many principal parts has the English verb? What two conjugations are found in English verbs? Why do we learn the participle of Latin verbs now? 93. LAUDO. — Active Voice — Indicative Mood Singular Perfect Tense Plural i. laudavi, / have praised i. laudavimus, we have praised 2. laudavisti, you have praised 2. laudavistis, you have praised 3. laudavit, he {she, it) has praised 3. laudaverunt, they have praised Pluperfect Tense 1 . laudaveram, / had praised 1 . laudaveramus, we had praised 2. laudaveras, you had praised 2. laudaveratis, you had praised 3. laudaverat, he (she, it) had 3. laudaverant, they had praised praised Future Perfect Tense 1. laudavero, / shall have praised 1. laudaverimus, we shall have praised 2. laudaveris, you will have praised 2. laudaveritis, you will have praised 3. laudaverit, he (she, it) will have 3. laudaverint, they will have praised praised Practise the conjugation of these tenses, using the verbs already given. These tenses, with those already learned, complete the six tenses of the indicative mood. 94. Use of These Tenses. — The perfect tense implies that the action of the verb is complete in the present lime. 4 49 APPLIED LATIN The pluperfect tense implies that the action of the verb was completed in past time. The future perfect tense implies that the action of the verb will have been completed in future time. 95. In English, the tenses most used are the present, past, and future; in Latin, the present, perfect, and future. All the other tenses of the indicative exist in English and are fre- quently used. They consist, however, not of a single verb form, as in Latin, but are formed by the addition of a num- ber of small. verbs called auxiliaries. These are do, may, might, would, could, etc. 96. Examples of English Auxiliary Verbs. — I do praise, I am praising, present indicative; I was praising, imperfect indicative ; I shall praise, you will praise, future indicative ; I have praised, perfect indicative ; I had praised, pluperfect indicative; I shall have praised, future perfect indicative; I may praise, I might praise, I could praise; I would praise, I may have praised, I was going to praise (tenses outside of the indicative mood). The words italicized are English auxiliary verbs. Quiz. — How many tenses are there in the indicative mood? What are the tenses of the indicative most used in Latin? in English? How are many tenses made in English? 97. Translate the following forms : i. Libera vi t, ornavis- tis, amavl. 2. ClamavistI, vocaverunt, superavimus, para- visti. 3. Portaverunt, spectavistb, narravimus. 4. Clama- verat, paraveram, portaveramus. 5. Narraveras, voca- verant, amaveras, spectaveratis. 6. Ornaverant, llbera- verit, superaveratis. 7. Vocaverint, portavero, superaveri- THE VERB mus. 8. Paraveris, spectaveritis, amaverimus, liberaver- int. 9. Narraverit, clamaveris, ornavero. 98. Translate 1. Nomen* feminae clamavl. 1. 2. Magnam viri pecuniam* ama- 2. vistl. 3. Femina coronam magnam 3. porta vit. 4. Ex aedificio servos vocavimus. 4. 5. Nuntios llberavistis. 5. 6. Socil flammas superaverunt. 6. 7. Templum a] turn ornaveram. 7. 8. Fata mala narraveras. 8. 9. Nuntius pugnam ex Insula 9. spectaverat. 10. Copiam f rumen tl porta vera- 10. mus. 1 1 . Sagittas paraveratis. 1 1 . 12. Flliae litteras spectaverant. 12. 13. Turbam barbaram specta- 13. vero. 14. Scientia impedlmentum 14. superaverit. 15. Poeta periculum narraverit. 15. 16. Proelium paraverimus. 16. 17. Clamaveritis. 17. 18. Amlcl portam ornaverint. 18. Si Translate We shall have shouted. You had loved the farmer's horse. The women have carried crowns. They have called the retinue from the fields. You had freed the messengers. The allies will have conquered the provinces of the king- dom. We had adorned the temple. You have related the story of the war. The messengers will have looked at the fight from the wall. I have carried the roses. You will have gotten ready the arrows. The daughter will have looked at the form of the letter. We shall have looked at the earth. You had overcome the flames. The poets have related the dangers. I have gotten ready the gift. You have shouted. The friends had adorned the gate. APPLIED LATIN THE DIRECT OBJECT 99. Some verbs in Latin may be used alone, that is, with- out objects (intransitive) . Most verbs are so full of action that they demand the use of some word to tell the object toward which their action is directed (transitive). Note the accusative cases in the sentences above. 100.* Rule. — The Direct Object. — The direct object of an active transitive verb is put in the accusative case. In English this case is called the objective. WORD ORDER 101. The most important places in a Latin sentence are the first and last. Consequently, the subject usually stands first and the verb last. The object, and all other words, regularly stand between subject and verb. English sentences follow the natural word order. The subject and its modifiers begin the sentence, the verb is next, and the verb modifiers come last. Review the derivatives from first conjugation verbs. Quiz. — What is the case of the direct object in Latin? What is the usual order of words in a Latin sentence? in an English sentence ? The Nations of the Ancient World Let us look once more at the map on page 23 and read the names of the lands conquered by the Romans. In the far West lay the British Islands: Britannia (Britain, British, Britons), Scotia (Scotland, Scottish, Scots), and Hibernia (Hibernians, Ivernia, Erin, Ireland). These islands were 52 THE NATIONS OF THE ANCIENT WORLD known to the Ancients especially because of great deposits of tin in England. In Europe was Gallia (Gaul, Gallic, Keltic), inhabited by the Kelts, who in early time controlled all the northern part of Europe. Gaul was divided into three parts; that inhabited by the Belgae (Belgium), the Celtae (Kelts), and the Aquitani. The conquest of Gaul was completed by the great general Julius Caesar, and the Gallic campaigns are described in his famous Gallic War (Bellum Gallicum). North of Gaul lay Germania, across the river Rhine (Rhenus), inhabited by the German! (Germans), who were an everlasting source of anxiety to the Romans. South of Gaul was Hispania (Spain), a part of which (Lusitania) is today Portugal. On the northern coast of Africa lay Mauretania (Morocco, Moors, Moorish), Libya, and Aegyp- tus (Egypt). Between Europe and Africa were the Pillars of Hercules (Straits of Gibraltar). In the Mediterranean Sea were the following islands: Baleares (Balearic), Corsica, Sardinia, Ilva (Elba), Sicilia (Sicily), Creta (Crete), Rhodus (Rhodes), and Cyprus. East of Italy (Italia) lay Graecia (Greece), bounded on the north by Macedonia and Thracia (Thrace). Beyond Greece was Asia (modern Turkey in Asia), which was composed of a number of small states, of which Armenia was one. The power of the Roman empire never reached further than Armenia, and beyond that point the huge Parthian (Persian) empire was a continual menace. 53 APPLIED LATIN VI. THE VERB. SECOND CONJUGATION 102. habeo, / have or hold; iubeo, / order; maneo, / remain; sedeo, / sit; teneo, / hold; timed, / fear; taceo, / am silent; terreo, / frighten; video, / see; valeo, I am strong or well; habere, to have or hold. iubere, to order. manere, to remain. sedere, to sit. tenere, to hold. timere, to fear. tacere, to be silent. terrere, to frighten. videre, to see. valere, to be strong or well. Learn these second conjugation verbs. 103. There are two ways by which you may quickly recog- nize verbs of the second conjugation: (i) the final 6 of the verb is preceded by the letter e; (2) the infinitive form (sign of the conjugation) always ends in the letters ere, of which the first e is always long in quantity. This long vowel e is called the characteristic vowel of the second conjugation. 104. The following English words are formed from these second conjugation verbs. Habeo gives us habit, habitable, habitual, habitation, habiliments, inhabit, haven, exhibit, habitat, prohibit. Maneo is found in remain, remainder, mansion, manse, manor, manorial, maintain, remnant, permanent, perma- nence, permanently. Sedeo is the base of seat, sedan, sedate, sedative, sed- entary, session, sediment, reside, residence, residual, resid- uum, preside, president, subside, insidious, sedition, set- tee, settlement. 54 THE VERB Teneo gives us tenable, tenacious, tenure, tenant, tene- ment, detain, retain, sustain, tenor, attain, tentative. Timed appears in timid, timidity, timorous, intimidate. Learn the meaning and spelling of these words. Use them in sentences of your own composition and add any other words of like origin that you know. In working out the meanings be careful to note the prefixes used. Quiz. — How can verbs of the first and second conjuga- tions be distinguished?. 105. HABEO.— Active Voice— Indicative Mood Singular Present Tense Plural i. habeo, / have i. habemus, we have 2. habes, you have 2. habetis, you have 3. habet, he {she, it) has 3. habent, they have Imperfect Tense 1. habebam, / was having 1. habebamus, we were having 2. habebas, you were having 2. habebatis, you were having 3. habebat, he (she, it) was having 3. habebant, they were having Future Tense 1. habebo, / shall have 1. habebimus, we shall have 2. habebis, you will have 2. habebitis, you will have 3. habebit, he {she, it) will have 3. habebunt, they will have Practise the conjugation of these tenses, using the second conjugation verbs already given. 106. Translate these verb forms : 1. Iubeo, manet, sedetis, terres, timent, tacemus, tenes, vident, valetis, habemus. 2. Valebat, videbam, terrebamus, tacebas, timebant, tenebas, sedebatis, manebant, iubebatis. 55 APPLIED LATIN 3. Tenebunt, sedebo, manebimus, iubebis, habebitis, valebimus, videbunt, terrebit, tacebis, timebitis. 107. Word Study. — Taceo appears in English in the words tacit, taciturn, taciturnity, reticent. Terreo gives us the words: terror, terrify, terrible, deter. Video is a very common base in English: Vision, visible, visibility, visionary, vista, survey. Evidence, vizor, revise, revision, view, visage, invisible, visual, provide, provision, provisional. Proviso, advice, prudent, supervision. Valeo makes these words possible: value, valuable, in- valuable, valor, valid, invalid, prevail. Valiant, valorous, validate, valid. Available, convalescent, valedictory. 108. Learn these words carefully, and try to make out their meanings without the aid of an English dictionary. Use them in sentences of your own construction. Pick out some Latin bases in your English reader. 109. moved, / move; movere, to move. misceo, / mix; mlscere, to mix. pateo, / extend; patere, to extend. i* pareo, / obey; *■ parere, to obey (followed by the dative). pleo, / fill; plere, to fill. ardeo, I am on fire or burn; ardere, to be on fire or bum. arceo, / ward of or prevent; arcere, to ward of or prevent. augeo, / increase; augere, to increase. doceo, / teach; docere, to teach. haereo, / stick or cling; haerere, to stick or cling. Use these verbs in practising the three tenses of the second conjugation already given. 56 THE VERB 110. Translate i. Poenam augeo. 2. Aquam mlsces. 3. Fllia parva feminae paret. 4. Via longa patet. 5. Campos latos pletis. 6. Magnae silvae ardent. 7. Aedificium in oppido* antlquo ardebat. 8. Slgnum clarum movebas. 9. Clarus poeta amicos docebat. 10. Fama bona in memoria viro- rum haerebat. 11. Captlvos falsos habebatis. 12. Mult! cqul in campo mane- bant. 13. In via lata sedebo. 14. Imperium vlcinum tenebis. 15. Captlvus Iratus iniuriam timebit. 16. In somno alto tacebimus. 17. In victoria valebitis. 18. Feminae rosas in agrls videbunt. Translate 1. We shall be strong. 2. You were teaching the boys. 3. The daughters will obey the poet. 4. We fill the walled town. 5. You were mixing wine. 6. The dangers will frighten the allies. 7. We were ordering the sailors. 8. The tongues of poets are silent. 9. The mansion will be on fire. 10. I ward off the danger. 1 1 . You were moving the anchor from the road. 12. The fugitive slaves will sit in the road. 13. W T e shall remain in the camp. 14. You were afraid of a scarcity of grain. 1 5 . They are holding the crowns. 16. I was frightening the farmers. 17. The sword is sticking in the earth. 18. The allies will remain in the village. 111.* In paragraph no you find a few cases of the abla- tive introduced by the preposition in to express the place in which something is situated or happens. 112. Rule. — Ablative of Place in Which. — Place in which is regularly expressed by the ablative with the preposition in. Quiz. — How is place in which expressed in Latin? in English? What word distinguishes this use of the ablative? 57 APPLIED LATIN 113. HABEO. — Active Voice — Indicative Mood Singular Perfect Tense Plural i. habui, / have had i. habuimus, we have had 2. habuisti, you have had 2. habuistis, you have had 3. habuit, he {she, it) has had 3. habuerunt, they have had Pluperfect Tense 1. habueram, / had had 1. habueramus, we had had 2. habueras, you had had 2. habueratis, you had had 3. habuerat, he {she, it) had had 3. habuerant, they had had Future Perfect Tense 1. habuero, / shall have had 2. habueris, you will have had 3. habuerit, he {she, it) will have had 1 . habuerimus, we shall have had 2. habueritis, you will have had 3. habuerint, they will have had 114. In order to practise these tenses it is first necessary to learn the principal parts of the second conjugation verbs already given. Note that verbs whose fourth principal part ends in -m are intransitive. habeo, iubeo, habere, iubere, habui, iussl, habitus, iussus. maneo, sedeo, teneo, timeo, manere, sedere, tenere, timere, mansi, sedi, tenul, timul, mansum. sessum. (tentus). taceo, tacere, tacui, tacitus. terreo, video, valeo, terrere, videre, valere, terrui, vldl, valui, territus. vlsus. moveo, movere, movl, motus. mlsceo, mlscere, miscul, mlxtus. pateo, pareo, pleo, ardeo, patere, parere, plere, ardere, patul, parul, plevi, arsl, pletus. arsus. arceo, arcere, arcul, augeo, doceo, haereo, augere, docere, haerere, auxi, docul, haesl, auctus. doctus. haesum. 58 THE VERB 115. Conjugate the perfect, pluperfect, and future per- fect tenses of these second conjugation verbs. Review the English words derived from these verbs. Quiz. — Why is it essential to learn principal parts? Mention some English words derived from the fourth prin- cipal part of these verbs? What does the fourth principal part in -m denote? 116. Translate: i. Movit, mlscuistis, patul. 2. ParuistI, pleverunt, arsimus. 3. Arcuisti, auxerunt, docuistis, haesi- mus. 4. Docuerat, auxeram, arcueramus. 5. Arseras, pleverant, parueras. 6. Patueratis, mlscuerant, moverat, haeseratis. 7. Pleverint, arsero, arcuerimus. 8. Auxeris, docueritis, haeserimus. 9. Moverint, mlscuerit, patueris, paruero. 117. Translate 1. Portam flrmam movi. 1. 2. Frumenta miscuisti. 2. 3. Regnum magnum patuit. 3. 4. Nautae bono paruimus. 4. 5. Aedificia friimento* plevistis. 5. 6. Vlcl in provincia arserunt. 6. 7. Perlcula cura arcueram. 7. 8. Audaciam auxeras. 8. 9. Nauta filios parvos docuerat. 9. 59 Translate We shall have stayed in the field. You had filled the town with allies. The slaves had burned the yearly grain. The wind has moved the roses. You had taught the new cap- tive. The wind will have warded off the flames. We had mixed the great swords. You have increased the guard. The crowd will have obeyed. APPLIED LATIN Translate Translate io. Haeseramus. 10. I have filled the temple with roses. ii. Scutum amplum moveratis. n. The forest will have been on fire. 12. Vina bona mlscuerant. 12. The woman had taught the poet's daughters. 13. Oppida magna arserint. 13. We shall have held the crown. 14. Captivum curiosum docueris. 14. You had increased (your) dil- igence. 1 5 . Nuntius tela moverit . 15. The water had filled the lands . 16. Via in silvam patuerit. 16. I had stuck to (my) boldness. 17. Viros bonos docueritis. 17. You will have warded off fate. 18. Animo bellicoso haeserint. 18. He will have held the chief command by the sword. 118.* In the sentences above there are some cases of the ablative without a preposition to indicate the means by which something is done. 119. Rule. — Ablative of Means. — The means by which anything is done is expressed by the ablative without an intro- ductory preposition. 120. Word Study. — From moved come: move, motion, remove, motive, emotion, commotion, locomotive, mobile, mob, remote, promotion; misceo: miscellaneous, promiscu- ous, mix, mixture; pateo: patent, expatiate; pared : parent, parentage; pled: complete, complementary, plenty, re- plete, deplete, implement, supplement, accomplish; arced: coerce, coercion; arded: ardent, ardor, arson; auged: augment, author, authority, auctioneer, auxiliary; doced: doctrine, doctor, docile, document; haered: adhere, ad- hesive, cohere, incoherent, cohesion, hesitate. Review the derivatives from the second conjugation verbs. 60 APPLIED LATIN Quiz. — How is the means (or instrument) by which an action is accomplished expressed in Latin? in English? The Peninsula of Italy The Italian peninsula fell naturally into three divisions, marked in a general way by the three rivers: Arnus (Arno), Tiberis (Tiber), and Liris. About the Arnus lay the lands of the Etruscans, those mysterious people whose writings have never yet been deciphered. Bordering the Tiber was Latium, the home of the Latins, whose chief city was Rome. Below the Liris Italy bore the name Magna Graecia (Great Greece). This part of the peninsula had been settled at an early period by men from Greece. The three rivers men- tioned carried away the waters from the Apennine Moun- tains, a chain of hills which ran down the center of the pen- insula. Above the Arnus, between the Alps and the northern end of the Apennines, was an extensive plain drained by the river Padus (Po). This plain belonged to Cisalpine Gaul (Gaul, this side of the Alps), and, as the name suggests, was inhabited by Gauls, not by Latins. When the Latins came down to Latium, they passed along the crests of the Apen- nines, escaping the Etruscans, and left little groups of their own people along their path. These were the Umbrians, Sabines, and Samnites. Be careful to note that Rome held the central position in Italy, and Italy the central position in the ancient civilized world. This central position meant much in the march of the Romans to imperial power. 62 THE NOUN VII. THE NOUN. THIRD DECLENSION 121. consul, a consul, magistrate, m. Caesar, Caesar, a Roman name, m. hiems, the winter, f. frater, a brother, m. homo, man, m. amor, love, m. legio, legion, a division oj the corpus, the body, n. Roman army, f. urbs> a C u y ^ f. nomen, a name, n. civ i s> a citizen, m. vox, the voice, a word, f. nubes, a cloud, f. aetas, age, f. sedfle, a seat, n. virtus, courage, manliness, f. animal, an animal, n. caput, the head, n. 122. There is no single noun whose declension can be used as the standard for all third declension words. How- ever, the declensions of the nouns given above serve as standards for all words of this declension in common use. These standard nouns must be carefully learned, as third declension words are very common in Latin. When men began to make a careful study of the individual words of the Latin language, they found a large number that had the endings of the first declension, many that were like the second, and some that we shall soon find set apart in the fourth and the fifth declensions. All the rest, because of certain similarities, were grouped in the declension that we are now studying. For this reason the number of words in this declension is unusually large, and no single noun can be used as a standard for all the rest. 123. Word Study. — From the nouns above come the English words: consul, consulate, consular. homo, human, humanity, humane, inhuman. 63 APPLIED LATIN legio, legion, legionary. nomen, noun, nominal, nominate, cognomen, pro- noun, denomination. vox, voice, vocal, vowel, vocabulary, semivowel, vo- ciferate, invoke, equivocal, vocation. virtus, virtue, virtuous. caput, capital, capitol, decapitate, chapter, occiput, recapitulate, precipice. Caesar, Caesarean, Kaiser, Czar, Shah. frater, fraternal, fraternity, fratricide, fraternize. amor, amour, amorous, amity, enemy. corpus, corporate, corporation, incorporate, corpse, corps, corporeal, corpuscle, habeas corpus. urbs, urban, urbane, suburban. civis, civic, civilian, civilize. Use these English words in sentences of your own. Quiz. — Why are there so many standard words of the third declension? 124. Consul, consulis, a consul, m. Hiems, hiemis, the winter, i . Singular Singular Nom. consul, a consul, m. hiems, the winter, f. Gen. consulis, of a consul. hiemis, of the winter. Dat. consul!, to or for a consul. hiemi, to or for the winter. Ace. consulem, a consul. hiemem, the winter. Voc. consul, (0) consul. hiems, (0) winter. AM. consul e, with, from, in, or by hieme, with, from, in, or by a consul. the winter. Plural Plural Nom. consules, consuls. hiemes, winters. Gen. consulum, of consuls. hiemum, of winters. Dat. consulibus, to or for consuls. hiemibus, to or for winters. Ace. consules, consuls. hiemes, winters. Voc. consules, (0) consuls. hiemes, (0) winters. AM. consulibus, with, from, in, or hiemibus, with, from, in, or by consuls. by winters. 64 THE NOUN 125. Like the word consul decline: exsul, exsulis, an exile, m. sal, salis, salt, m. (saline, salary). sol, solis, the sun, m. (no genitive plural in good use) (solar, solar- ium). 126. Gender in the Third Declension. — No rule for gender which will include all words of the third declension can be framed in any brief form. It is best to learn the gender of the words as they appear in the lessons. 127. Translate for practice in third declension cases: i. Salis, consulem, hiemes, exsulibus, sole. 2. Pro consule, inter exsules, propter solem, post hiemem. 3. Consulum annu- orum, longls hiemibus, solem clarum, gladius exsulis. 4. Donum salis, in templo solis, consules. 5. Populum voca- mus. 6. Hiemes longas amamus. 128. Translate: 1. The consul's daughter. For the exiles. By the sun. Of salt. The winter (ace). 2. O consuls! The exiles will hold the booty. In the sun. Before the battle. 3. In front of the gate. On account of victory. Without a sword. 129. Examples of the Use of Derivatives. — 1. To save life, a saline solution is often injected into the blood. 2. The sun is the chief member of the solar system, which includes the planets Venus, Mars, the Earth, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune. 3. Sun parlors are called solaria. 4. Salary was originally salt money; that is, money with which to buy an article without which mankind cannot live. 65 APPLIED LATIN 130. Homo, hominis, a Legio, legionis, a Nomen, nominis, a man, m. legion, f. name, n. Singular Singular Singular Norn , homo, a man, m. legio, a legion, f. nomen, a name, n. Gen. hominis legionis nominis Dat. homini legion! nomini Ace. hominem legion em nomen Voc. homo legio nomen Abl. homine legione nomine Plural Plural Plural Nom . homines, men legiones, legions nomina, names. Gen. hominum legionum nominum Dat. hominibus legionibus nominibus Ace. homines legiones nomina Voc. homines legiones nomina Abl. hominibus legionibus nominibus Learn these declensions. 131. Like homo and legio decline: imago, imaginis, an imitation, image, f. (image, imagine, imaginary). margo, marginis, a border, m. (margin, marginal). origo, originis, an origin, f. (original, originate, aboriginal), virgo, virginis, a maiden, f. (virgin, Virginia). magnitudo, magnitudinis, greatness, size, f. (magnitude). multitudo, multitudinis, great number, f. (multitude). longitiido, longitudinis, length, f. (longitude). oratio, orationis, a speech, f. (oration, peroration, oratory, oratorio), led, leonis, a lion, m. (lion, leonine, Leonard). natio, nationis, a nation, f. (national, international). valetudd, valetudinis, health, f. (valetudinarian). 66 THE NOUN 132. Like nomen decline : gramen, graminis, the grass, m. (graminate, graminivorous). lumen, luminis, light, n. (luminous, luminary). limen, liminis, a threshold, doorway, n. (preliminary). agmen, agminis, an army (on the march), n. flumen, fluminis, a river, n. (flume). carmen, carminis, a poem, n. omen, ominis, an omen, n. (ominous, ill-omened). volumen, voluminis, a volume, n. (voluminous). 133. Translate: i. Imaginis, omen, volumine, carmini- bus, multitudinem. 2. Margin!, orlginum, leones, orationis, nationum, virgines. 3. Legio, nomina, agminis, luminibus, longitudinis. 4. In gramine, ad legionem, propter magni- tudinem, ab origine, carmina poetarum. 5. E flumine, cum multitudine amlcorum, sub limine, post orationem consulis. Translate: 1. For men, to a legion, with nations, in the grass, of poems. 2. On account of size, from the origin, rivers, of maidens, outside the threshold. Write English sentences using the derivatives given. Most third declension words have one more syllable in the genitive singular than in the nominative singular. 134. Amor, amoris, love, m. Frater, fratris, a brother, m. Singular Plural Singular Plural Nom. amor, love, m. amores, loves frater, a brother, m. fratres, brothers Gen. amoris amorum fratris fratrum Dat. amori amoribus fratri fratribus Ace. amorem amores fratrem fratres Voc. amor amores frater fratres Abl. amore amoribus fratre 67 fratribus APPLIED LATIN Caesar, Caesaris ;, Caesar, m. Singular Plural Norn. Caesar, Caesar, m. Caesares, emperors* Gen. Caesaris Caesarum Dat. Caesari Caesaribus Ace. Caesarem Caesares Voc. Caesar Caesares Abl. Caesare Caesaribus 135. Like amor decline : clamor, clamoris, an outcry, m. (clamor, exclaim, proclaim). honor, honoris, an honor (office), m. (honor, honorable, dishonor, honorary). labor, laboris, labor, work, m. (laborer, laborious, elaborate). viator, viatoris, a traveler, m. imperator, imperatoris, a commander, m. (emperor, empress, im- perious). ardor, ardoris, a burning heat, m. (ardor, ardent, arson). auctor, auctoris, an author, m. (authoress, auctioneer). color, coloris, a color, m. (colored, discolored, particolored). odor, odoris, an odor, smell, m. (odorous, malodorous, odoriferous). terror, terroris, fright, m. (terror, terrible, deter). soror, sororis, a sister, f. (sorority). 136. Like frater (fraternal, fratricide, fraternity) decline: pater, patris, a father, m. (paternal, patrimony, patricide, patron, patrician) . mater, matris, a mother, f. (maternal, matrimony, matricide, ma- tron). 137. Translate: i. Clamori, honoribus, laborem, viatoris. 2. Imperator (vocative), ardore, auctores, coloris. 3. Odorum, terrores, sororibus, amor (vocative). 4. Imperatorl, labore, colorum, terrorem. 5. Sororis, f nitres, matrum, Caesare, patribus. . 138. Translate: 1. Affections, by shouts, for a brother, of * Note. — Proper nouns are rarely declined in the plural. 68 THE NOUN Caesar, with colors. 2. In a burning heat, of an odor, authors of volumes, great fright. Write exercises using the English derivatives. 139. Corpus, corporis, a body, n. SlNGUL AR Plural Nom. corpus, a body, n. corpora, bodies Gen. corporis corporum Dat. corpori corporibus Ace. corpus corpora Voc. corpus corpora Abl. corpore corporibus 140. Like corpus (corporate, incorporate, corporeal) de- cline : genus, generis, a kind, breed, species, n. (genial, genuine, gentle, in- genuity). onus, oneris, a load, burden, n. (onus, onerous, exonerate). pectus, pectoris, the breast, n. (pectoral, expectorate, parapet). frigus, frigoris, cold, n. (frigid, refrigerator). opus, operis, a work, n. (operate, cooperate). rus, ruris, the countryside, n. (rural, rustic, rusticate). ius, iuris, the law, n. (jurist, jurisprudence, injustice, adjust). munus, muneris, a task, service, n. (remunerate, remuneration, municipal, common, immunity). tempus, temporis, time, n. (extempore, temporal, temporary). 141. Translate: 1. Corpus, pectore, frlgora, operibus. 2. Iura, run,* ruris, temporibus. 3. Oneris, genere, munerum. 4. In corpore, ex tempore, opera agricolarum. 5. Genus * Note. — The form run (in the country) is the locative case of rus, the country. The locative case, which in very old Latin expressed place in which, was discarded by the Latins except in certain very common words, like rus (country) and domus (house), and in the names of cities: Romae, at Rome; Athenis, at Athens; Corinthi, at Corinth; Delphis, at Delphi; Carthagini, at Carthage. Locate these cities. Why were they famous? 69 APPLIED LATIN hominum, his nationum, pectus leonis. 6. Equus magnum onus portavit. Translate: i. Of bodies, by cold, in the breast, kinds of men. 2. Works, the laws of the land, in the country, the tasks of the consul, without burdens. 142. Examples of the Use of Derivatives. — 1. There are good and bad corporations. 2. They say cherry pectoral allays expectoration. 3. The Pope lost his temporal powers in 1870. 4. Let us rusticate temporarily. 5. The prisoner was exonerated. 6. Breastworks are often called parapets. 7. Life is hardly endurable in the frigid zones. 8. The onus of the blame rested on the inhabitants of a remote municipality. 9. Vaccination brings to most people im- munity from small-pox. Write sentences using the derivatives above. 143. Aetas, aetatis, age, i. Vox, vocis, the voice, f . Singular Singular Nom. aetas, age, i. vox, the voice, f . Gen. aetatis vocis Dat. aetati voci Ace. aetatem vocem Voc. aetas vox All. aetate voce Plural Plural Nom. aetates, ages voces, voices Gen. aetatum vocum Dat. aetatibus vocibus Ace. aetates voces Voc. aetates voces Abl. aetatibus vScibus 70 THE NOUN 144. Like aetas decline: calamitas, calamitatis, a disaster, f. (calamity, calamitous). necessitas, necessitatis, need, f. (necessity, necessary). auctoritas, auctoritatis, authority, f. aestas, aestatis, the summer, f . civitas, civitatis, a state, f. (civic, civilian). humanitas, humanitatis, humanity, f . (humanitarian) libertas, libertatis, freedom, f. (liberty). nobilitas, nobilitatis, nobility, f. miles, militis, a soldier, m. (military, militia, militarism). quies, quietis, rest, f. (quiet, requiem, acquiesce, coy). virtus, virtutis, valor, f. (virtue, virtuous). 145. Like vox (voice, vocal, invoke, provoke) decline: dux, ducis, a leader, m. (duke, duchess, ducal, duchy) lux, lucis, light, f. (lucid, translucent). pax, pads, peace, f. (pacify, peaceful). lex, legis, a law, f. (legal, legislature). rex, regis, a king, m. (regal, regalia, reign, realm). 146. Translate: i. Because of need. By authority. In states. Against humanity. 2. Without liberty. With no- bility. Among the soldiers. In sleep. 3. For leaders. The light of the sun. Peace adorns a nation. The king is well. The woman's voice. The ages of men. Write sentences using the derivatives above. 147. Urbs, urbis, a city, f. Singular Plural Nom. urbs, a city, i. urbes, cities Gen. urbis urbium Bat. urbi urbibus Ace. urbem urbes Voc. urbs urbes Abl. urbe urbibus 71 APPLIED LATIN 148. Like urbs (urban, urbane, suburban) decline: pars, partis, a part, f. (impart, partition). ars, artis, an art, f. (art, artist, artistic, artificial, inert, artisan). gens, gentis, a tribe, f. (gentile). irons, frontis, the forehead, f. (front, frontal, frontispiece). dens, dentis, a tooth, m. (dental, dentist, dentifrice, dandelion). pons, pontis, a bridge, m. (pontoon, pontiff). m6ns, montis, a mountain, m. (Montana, mountainous, moun- taineer). fons, fontis, a fountain, m. (font, fountain). mens, mentis, the mind, f. (mental, mentality, demented). 149. Translate : i . Urbi, partium, virtiites gentis. 2 . Artes, frons leonis, pontibus, dente, ad f on tern aquae. 3. Mens Iram superat. 4. Pontes in flumine magno videbunt. 5. In margine fontis manebunt. 6. Imaginem solisin aquavidemus. 7. Pars turbae in oppido mansit. 8. Agricola magnum numerum servorum habet. 9. Partem urbis militibus plevimus. Notice the genitive cases following pais (7) andnumerus (8). 150. Rule. — Partitive Genitive. The genitive denoting the whole from which a part is taken is called the partitive genitive. 151. Examples of the Use of Derivatives. — 1. We live in the suburbs. 2. The artist imparts life to his pictures. 3. The frontal bone was fractured. 4. Dentifrice is a prep- aration which dentists prescribe for dental ills. 5. Robin- son is a Gentile name. 6. We admire mental ability in our fellow men. 7. The bridge was made of seven pontoons. 8. Montana is so called from its high mountains. 9. The child was baptized at a marble font. Quiz. — Explain the use of the partitive genitive. What kind of words are found before this use of the genitive? 72 THE NOUN 152. Civis, civis, a citizen , m. Nubes, nubis, a cloud, f. Singular Singular Norn. civis, a citizen, m. nubes, a cloud, f. Gen. civis nubis DaL clvi nubi Ace. civem nubem Voc. civis nubes Abl. cive (i) nube Plural Plural Nom. cives, citizens nubes, clouds Gen. civium nubium DaL civibus nubibus Ace. cives (is) nubes (is) Voc. cives nubes Abl. civibus nubibus 153. Like civis decline: Like nubes decline: avis, -is, a bird, f. (aviary). valles, -is, a valley, f. (vale) orbis, -is, a circle, m. (orbit, orb, caedes, -is, a massacre, f. exorbitant). clades, -is, a defeat, f. turns, -is, a tower, f. (turret, rupes, -is, a rock, crag, f. tower), (-im, ace.) sedes, -is, a seat, f. (siege, vestis, -is, a garment, f. (vest- sedate, insidious). ment, vest, vesture), collis, -is, a hill, m. ignis, -is, afire, m. (ignite, ignition), navis, -is, a ship, f. (navy, naval, nautical, nave), classis, -is, a fleet, f. finis, -is, an end, m. (final, finish, definite), hostis, -is, an enemy, m. (hostile, hostility). 154. Most nouns of the third declension have stems ending in a consonant; the third declension nouns above, however, have stems ending in the vowel i. Nouns like civis and nubes differ from consul in declension as fol- lows : i . They end in is (or es) in the nominative singular. 2. They have the same number of syllables in both the nominative and genitive singular. 3. Some have an ac- cusative singular in -im (turrim). 4. Some have an abla- tive singular in -1 as well as in -e (navi). 5. All have -ium 73 APPLIED LATIN not -um in the genitive plural. 6. They sometimes have -is for -es in the accusative plural. The nouns of Paragraphs 147-148 and 157-159 are -i stems. In the words of 147-148 this is shown only in the genitive plural. 155. Translate, noting all possible cases: 1. Avis, collis, finis, rupes, navis. 2. CladI, sedi, hostl, valll, caedi. 3. Nubem, avem, collem, finem, rupem. 4. Navl, clvl, orbe, turn, veste. 5. Classes, clades, sedes, hostes, valles. 6. Caedium, nubium, avium, collium, finium. 7. Rupibus, navibus, civibus, orbibus, turribus. 156. Translate: 1. In colle turrim vidisti. 2. Post nubes sol manebat. 3. Aves in silva clamaverunt. 4. Consules populum civitatis laudabunt. 5. Sol orbem terrarum (the world) spectat. 6. Vestes feminarum portabimus. 7. Propter frigus hiemis Ignem in aedificio habuimus. Compose sentences using the English derivatives in If 153. 157. Sedfle, sedilis, a seat, n. Animal, animalis, an animal, n. Singular Singular Nom. sedile, a seat, n. animal, an animal, n. Gen. sedilis animalis Dat. sedlli animal! Ace. sedile animal Voc. sedile animal Abl. sedlli animali Plural Plural Nom. sedllia, seats animalia, animals Gen. sedllium animalium Dat. sedllibus animalibus Ace. sedllia animalia Voc. sedllia animalia Abl. sedllibus animalibus 74 THE NOUN 158. Like sedfle, sedllis, a seat, n., decline: cubile, cubilis, a den, couch, bed, n. mare, maris, the sea, n. (transmarine, submarine, maritime, marsh, marigold, mariner), conclave, conclavis, a suite of rooms, n. (conclave). 159. Like animal (animalism) decline: vectigal, vectlgalis, a tax, n. tribunal, tribunalis, a tribunal, n. 160. Translate, noting all possible cases : i . Marl, animalis, cubllia, sedilium, conclavibus. 2. Vectigal, tribunalium, ma- ria, vectlgall, maribus. 3. Classem oonsulis in marl vidimus. 4. Legio partem Insulae tenebat. 5. In cublll leo tacebat. 6. Aestate* aves praedam ad silvas portant. 7. Hieme mllites in castrls manebunt. 8. Consules vectlgalia tenuerunt. * Notice the ablatives aestate (6) and hieme (7), indicat- ing time when or within which. 161. Rule.— Ablative of Time When or Within Which. — Time when or within which is expressed in Latin by the ab- lative without a preposition. 162. Examples of the Use of Derivatives. — 1. The color was ultramarine. 2. The problem of the submarine has caused great trouble in the present world war. 3. The pris- oner stood before the tribunal of the judge. 4. At the edge of the marsh grew the marigold. 5. The cardinals in con- clave at Rome chose the Pope. 6. The mariners were en- gaged in transmarine trade. 7. We deplore all evidences of animalism in our age of civilization. Quiz. — Explain the ablative of time when or within which. 75 LATIUM, THE HOME OF THE LATINS Latium, The Home of the Latins When the Latins finally stopped their wanderings and found a permanent home, the land of which they possessed themselves lay along the Tiber, and was given the name of Latium. Latium stretched southward from the Tiber to a small range of hills called the Alban mountains. In this territory were located a number of villages which joined in a confederacy for protection. The enemy which they especially feared was the Etruscan nation. Against this foe a fortress was built at that point on the banks of the Tiber river, where, later, the great city of Rome stood. There were seven small hills at this point, which gave great strength to the fortress, and made it easy to prevent the Etruscans from crossing the river by means of the island which lay in the river at this point. Across the river was a tall hill called Janiculum, which the Latins quickly occupied, and turned into an outer fortification. The capital city of Latium was at first Alba Longa, situated in the Alban mountains, but the fortress at Rome soon became more im- portant than the capital, and the seat of government was transferred there. When the Romans began the conquest of the tribes around the city, they first set out toward the south. After the march of the army, the Romans built great mili- tary roads for the rapid movement of troops. The first great road (Via Appia) led toward Capua from the gate in the walls of Rome called Porta Capena. This road was later 77 APPLIED LATIN extended to the city of Brundisium, and was the main road for all travellers to the East. The Via Latina (through Latium) followed. To the north the Via Flaminia, to which was added the Via Aemilia, led to the plain of the Po river. The Via Aurelia skirted the shore on the way to Spain. VIII. THE ADJECTIVE. THIRD DECLENSION 163. felix, happy. omnis, all, every. brevis, brief, short. audax, bold. facilis, easy. acer, keen, sharp. atrox, fierce. fortis, brave. celer, swift. sagax, wise, shrewd. gravis, heavy. equester, equestrian. velox, fleet, swift. immortalis, immortal. recens, recent. insignis, remarkable, praesens, present. distinguished. 164. You have learned that adjectives, through constant use with nouns, came to be declined precisely like nouns. For this reason, then, many adjectives were declined like nouns of the first and second declensions; and many like nouns of the third declension. The adjectives above are third declension adjectives. 165. Third declension adjectives are divided into three groups: adjectives of one termination, two terminations, and three terminations. These groups are so named because, in the nominative singular, those of one termination have but one form for all three genders. For instance, the form felix may be used with a masculine, feminine, or neuter noun. In a two termination adjective, like omnis, there is a form omnis, which is used with a masculine or a feminine noun, and a form omne, which is used with a neuter noun. Adjectives 78 THE ADJECTIVE of three terminations have a separate form for each gender. Learn the meanings of the adjectives given above. 166. Word Study. — Can you tell the Latin words from which these English derivatives come: velocipede, present- able, sagacity, celerity, fortitude, insignia, acrimonious, brevity, atrocity, facility, mortality, recent, audacity, equestrienne, accelerator, gravity, felicitous, omnibus, sage, represent, omnipotent, presage, omniscient, effort, force, comfort, grievous, gravitation, abbreviate, acrid? Do you know the meaning of these words so well that you can use them in sentences? Quiz. — What are the different types of adjectives? What are the classes of adjectives of the third declension? How are they distinguished? 67. Felix, happy Recens, recent Singular Singular M.F. N. M.F. N. Norn. fellx fellx recens recens Gen. fellcis fellcis recentis recentis Dat. fellci fellci recent! recenti Ace. fellcem fellx recent em recens Voc. fellx fellx recens recens AbL felice (I) felice (i) recent e (i) recente (i) Plural Plural Norn. fellces fellcia recent es recentia Gen. fellcium fellcium recentium recentium Dat. fellcibus fellcibus recentibus recentibus Ace. fellces (is) fellcia recentes (Is) recentia Voc. fellces fellcia recentes recentia Abl. fellcibus fellcibus recentibus recentibus 79 APPLIED LATIN 168. Remember that one termination adjectives have two forms in the ablative singular. The accusative plural mascu- line and feminine may end in -is instead of -es. 169. Like felix decline the adjectives in -x of Paragraph 163 and also efficax, efficient (efficacious, efficacy). fallax, treacherous, deceitful (fallacious, fallible, infallibility). loquax, talkative (loquacious, loquacity). rapax, thievish (rapacious, rape, rapine, rapacity). 170. Like recens decline: diligens, careful (diligent). elegans, elegant (elegance). frequens, frequent (frequent (verb), frequency, infrequent). clemens, mild (clement, clemency, inclement). ingens, huge. sapiens, wise (sapient, insipid). vehemens, violent (vehemence, vehement). 171. Decline in full, with the rule about the agreement of adjectives in mind: 1. Natura felix, caedes recens, servus loquax, avis rapax, donum elegans. 172. Translate, noting all possible cases: 1. Diligens, frequentem, sapientes, ingenti, vehementibus. 2. Rapaces, loquacium, recehte, elegantem. 173. Translate: 1. Homo felix fllios dlligentes amat. 2. Via tores cladem atrocem in valle viderunt. 3. Leo ingens in rupe sedebat. 4. Virl sapientes inter loquaces amicos tacent. 5. Vehemens fill Ira patrem terruit. 6. Clemens imperator amorem mllitum habet. Write sentences using the derivatives above. Quiz. — What have you learned about adjectives like felix? 80 174. THE ADJECTIVE Fortis, forte, brave Singular M.F. N. Nom. fortis, brave forte Gen. fortis fortis Dat. forti forti Ace. fort em forte Voc. fortis forte Abl. forti Plural forti Nom. fortes fortia Gen. fortium fortium Dal. fortibus fortibus Ace. fortes (-is) fortia Voc. fortes fortia Abl. fortibus fortibus 175. The great majority of third declension adjectives follow the declension of fortis. There are only a few like felix, and still fewer like acer. Take great pains in learning fortis. Note especially that the ablative singular has but one form, and that this form ends in i: 176. Like fortis practise the declension of fragilis, -e, frail (fragile). nobilis, -e, noble (nobility). illustris, -e, remarkable (illustrious), communis, -e, common (community, commons), facilis, -e, easy (facile, facility), fertilis, -e, fertile (fertilize). levis, -e, light (levity, levitation, irrelevant, alleviate, relief), militaris, -e, military (militia), navalis, -e, naval. terribilis, -e, terrible. tristis, -e, sad. utilis, -e, useful (utility, utilitarian). 6 8i APPLIED LATIN 177. Decline in full: miles terribilis, opus facile, ager fertilis, ptigna navalis, victoria illustris. 178. Translate : i . Pontibus fragilibus, virginum nobilium, nomen illustre. 2 . Somno levi, gloriae mllitaris, artem utilem, anima tristis. 3. Caesar omnes impera tores virtu te* supera- vit. 4. In cublli leones terrore* manserunt. 5. Aves sagaces hiemem ventis vehementibus timent. 6. Communi periculo* omnes socii bellum parabant. 7. Praesidium audacia* hos- tium auximus. * Note the ablative cases in these sentences. They express the cause or reason for action. 179. Rule. — Ablative of Cause. — Cause may be expressed in Latin by the ablative case without a preposition. This use of the ablative is often replaced by the use of the prepositions ob or propter, followed by the accusative; or by the prepositions de or ex, followed by the ablative. 180. Pick out the Latin derivatives in these English sentences: 1. We should pity frailty. 2. Germany is charged with militarism, England with navalism. 3. Do you attack difficult problems with fortitude? 4. No man should think illustrious deeds ignoble. 5. Farmers use many preparations for fertilizing the fields. Quiz. — How is cause expressed in Latin? In what other ways can cause be expressed? Review the derivatives of third declension adjectives. 82 THE ADJECTIVE 81. Acer, acris, acre, sharp, keen Singular M. F. N. Norn. acer, keen, sharp acris acre Gen. acris acris acris Dat. acri acri acri Ace. acrem acrem acre Voc. acer acris acre Abl. acri acri Plural acri Nom. acres acres acria Gen. acrium acrium acrium Dat. acribus acribus acribus Ace. acres (- is) acres (-is) acria Voc. acres acres acria Abl. acribus acribus acribus 182. Though the forms of each gender are given com- pletely, note that in quite a few cases the forms of the mascu- line, feminine, and neuter of acer are the same. Note es- pecially that the ablative singular of adjectives, like acer, has but one form, and that this form ends in the letter I. 183. Practise the declension of acer, using the adjectives: celeber, -bris, -bre, famous (celebrate, celebrity). celer, celeris, celere, swift (accelerate, accelerator). pedester, -tris, -tre, on foot, pedestrian. Silvester, -tris, -tre, wooded. terrester, -tris, -tre, belonging to the earth (terrestrial). 184. Decline in full: equus acer, poeta celeber, navis celeris, imperium terrestre. 185. Translate: i. Clamores acres loca silvestria plebant. 2. Flumen velox pontem ingentem superavit. 3. Carmina APPLIED LATIN immortalia poetarum reges antlquos moverunt. 4. Initio pugnae copiae pedestres silvas densas plebant. Translate: In a wooded place. Before the famous temple. Among pedestrian forces. Beyond the kingdoms of ' the earth. Sharp cold. A celebrated state. 186. Examples of the Use of Derivatives. — 1. The life of the wealthy man is not always felicitous. 2. Vinegar has an acrid taste to some people. 3. An accelerator in- creases the speed of the automobile. 4. We speak of celes- tial and terrestrial regions. 5. Silvester was a saint of the early church. 6. The word vinegar is formed from vinum and acer. Quiz. — What facts must you specially note about third declension adjectives of three terminations? IX. THE VERB. THIRD CONJUGATION 187. ago, / set in motion; I drive; agere, to set in motion; to drive. cedo, / make a motion; I go cedere, to make a motion; to go away; I yield; away; to yield. died, / say, I state; dicere, to say, state. duco, / lead; ducere, to lead. mitto, / send; mittere, to send. peto, / seek; petere, to seek. pono, I put or place; ponere, to put or place. pello, I push back; I drive back; pellere, to push back or drive back. rego, I rule; regere, to rule. verto, / turn; vertere, to turn. 188. Verbs of the third conjugation can be recognized by the form of the infinitive. This form always ends in ere, the first e of which is short. Further, the first principal part 84 THE VERB never has the vowel e before the final letter 6, as all second conjugation verbs do (moneo). 189. Word Study. — Not only are verbs of this conjuga- tion very common in Latin, but the roots of these verbs are found in a great number of English words, verbs, nouns, ad- jectives, etc. Ago appears in the words action, actual, actor, actress, cogent, enact, exact, agitate, agile, agent, agency, react, interact, inac- tion, transact, retroact, act. Cedo gives us cede, cession, cessation, concede, recede, success, recess, precede, proceed, procession, intercede, ex- ceed, excess, incessant, process. Dico underlies dictionary, diction, dictate, contradict, edict, male- diction, predict, verdict, indict, dictum. Duco appears in the words duke, conduct, conductor, reduce, reduction, ab- duct, conduce, deduce, ducat, duchy, introduce, produce, product. Mitto gives us mission, missionary, dismiss, omit, permit, trans- mit, submit, admit, intermission, missile, promise, emissary. Try to make out the meanings of these words. Learn how to spell them and talk over the proper uses with your teacher. Quiz. — How can third conjugation verbs be identified? 85 APPLIED LATIN 190. DUCO.— Active Voice— Indicative Mood Singular Present Tense Plural i. duco, / lead i. ducimus, we lead 2. ducis, you lead 2. ducitis, you lead 3. dficit, he {she, it) leads 3. ducunt, they lead Imperfect Tense 1. ducebam, / was leading 1. ducebamus, we were leading 2. ducebas, you were leading 2. ducebatis, you were leading 3. ducebat, he {she, it) was leading 3. ducebant, they were leading Future Tense 1. ducam, / shall lead 1. ducemus, we shall lead 2. duces, you will lead 2. ducetis, you will lead 3. dticet, he {she, it) will lead 3. ducent, they will lead 191. Practise these tenses, using the verbs given in Paragraph 187. Be specially careful with the future tenses. The future tense of the first and second conjugations ends in -bo in the first person singular; the future tense of the third and fourth conjugations ends in -am in the first person singular. Note this difference with great care. 192. Translate these verb forms: 1. Ago, cedit, dlcitis, ducis, mittunt, petimus, ponis, pellunt, regitis, vertimus. 2. Regebat, pellebam, ponebamus, petebas, mittebant, ducebas, dlcebatis, cedebant, agebatis, vertebat. 3. Mittent, petam, ponemus,pelles, regetis, vertemus, agent, cedet, dicam, ducent. Word Study: 193. Peto gives us the root of these words: appetite, compete, competition, impetuous, repeat, petulant, competent, impetus. Pono appears in the words pose, position, positive, deposit, decompose, im- pose, expose, transpose, opponent, opposite, pro- pose, posture, compose, compositor, exposition. 86 THE VERB Pello gives us compel, repel, expel, impel, repellant, propel, pulse, impulse, repulse, propulsion, compulsion, expul- sion, propeller, repulsive, impulsive. Rego supplies us with regent, regal, reign, royal, regimen, direct, regu- late, rector, regiment, incorrect, rectify, erect, regu- lar, regalia, interregnum. Verto underlies avert, revert, convert, pervert, subvert, invert, di- vert, vertical, versatile, vertigo. Try to make these words your own possessions. Use them in sentences. Talk them over in the class. 194. cado, / fall; cadere, to fall. cured, / run; currere, to run. iungo, / join; iungere, to join. premo, / press hard; I overwhelm; p rem ere, to press hard, overwhelm. quaero, / ask; quaerere, to ask. rumpo, / break; rumpere, to break. scribo, / write; scribere, to write. tego, / cover; tegere, to cover. traho, / draw; trahere, to draw. tango, / touch; tangere, to touch. 195. Learn these verbs, and practise them in the tenses already given. 196. Translate: i. Aquam claram tango. 2. Turris de monte cadit. 3. Caesar slgnum veste tegit. 4. Scientiam cum ciira iungimus. 5. Ancoram ingentem ex aqua trahitis. 6. Milites ad fossam* currunt. 7. Hostem barbarum preme- bam. 8. Nomen urbis ab homine quaerebas. 9. Ventus velox 87 APPLIED LATIN nubes rumpebat. 10. Ad vlcum* currebamus. n. Scutum sine auxilio trahebatis. 12. Agricolae fontes cum flumine iungebant. 13. In Ignem* cadam. 14. Servum rus* ducebas. 15. Somnus milites in castris premet. 16. Litteras breves scrlbemus. 17. Viam a viatoribus quaere tis. 18. Equi celeres virum circum oppidum trahent. * In these sentences you find some instances of the accusa- tive case introduced by ad or in expressing the place to which. 197. Rule. — Accusative of Place to Which. — Place to which is expressed by the accusative with ad or in. Names of cities (Roma), also rus, the countryside, and domus, a house, omit the preposition. 198. Translate: 1. We shall turn the huge ship. 2. You were ruling the brave allies. 3. The servants will drive the horses. 4. We put heavy burdens upon the men. 5. You were asking the name of the street. 6. The brothers will send gifts to (their) father. 7. We were leading the citizens into the temple. 8. You state the cause. 9. The birds will go away in winter. 10. I am sending the sisters from the city. 11. The sun was driving away the cold. 12. The forests will cover the mountains. 13. We shall go away from the river. 14. You were asking the classes of animals. 15. The sailors are leading the captives to Caesar. 16. I was driving a treacherous lion. 1 7 . You rule provinces covered with woods. 18. All the men will send roses. In your English reader find ten words derived from Latin. Quiz. — How is place to which expressed in Latin? Are there any exceptions? Why do you think the preposition 88 THE VERB was omitted with the words mentioned in the rule? What can you say about the sentence, "I am going home." 199. DUCO. — Active Voice — Indicative Mood Singular Perfect Tense Plural i . duxi, / have led i . duximus, we have led 2. duxisti, you have led 2. duxistis, you have led 3. duxit, he (she, it) has led 3. duxerunt, I hey have led Pluperfect Tense 1. duxeram, / had led 1. duxeramus, we had led 2. duxeras, you had led 2. duxeratis, you had led 3. duxerat, he (she, it) had led 3. duxerant, they had led Future Perfect Tense 1 . duxero, / shall have led 1 . duxerimus, we shall have led 2. duxeris, you will have led 2. duxeritis, you will have led 3. duxerit, he (she, it) will have led 3. duxerint, they will have led 200. Before practising these tenses, it is necessary to learn the principal parts of the verbs already given: I II III IV ago, agere, egl, actus. cedo, cedere, cessl, cessum. dico, dlcere, dlxl, dictus. duco, ducere, duxi, ductus. mitto, mittere, misl, missus. peto, petere, petivl, petltus. pond, ponere, posul, positus. pello, pellere, pepull, pulsus. rego, regere, rexl, rectus. verto, vertere, vertl, versus. cado, cadere, cecidi, casum. curro, currere, cucurri, cursum. iungo, iungere, iunxi, iunctus. premo, premere, pressl, pressus. quaero, quaerere, quaeslvl, quaesltus, rumpo, rumpere, rupl, ruptus. scrlbo, scrlbere, scrips!, scrlptus. tego, tegere, texl, tectus. traho, trahere, traxl, tractus. tango, tangere, tetigi, tactus. 89 APPLIED LATIN 201. Practise the three tenses of Paragraph 199, using the verbs given above. Try to determine from which principal part the English words of Paragraph 193 are derived. 202. Word Study. — We have the following English de- rivatives from: cado: cadence, casual, occasion, coincide, accident, de- ciduous. curro: current, currency, occur, incur, course, cursive, recur. iungo: join, joint, juncture, junction, injunction, re- joinder. premo: press, pressure, compress, repress, express, im- press, oppress, suppress. quaero: inquire, inquest, request, query, question, re- quire, perquisite, acquire, exquisite. Use these derivatives in sentences of your own construc- tion. 203. Translate these expressions into English: 1. Cecidit, cucurristis, iunxi, pressistl. 2. Quaeslverunt, rupimus, scrlpsistl. 3. Texerunt, traxistis, tetigimus. 4. Ruperat, scrlpseram, cecideramus, presseras. 5. Texerant, tetigeras, traxeratis. 6. Iunxerant, cucurrerat, quaesiveratis. 7. Traxerint, pressero, scrlpserimus, iunxeris. 8. Cecideritis, quaeslverimus. 9. Cucurrerit, ruperint, tetigeris, texero. 204. Translate Translate 1. Bonam vitam egi. 1. We shall have fallen into the flames. 2. Ex agro cessistl. 2. You had run to the spring. 90 THE VERB Translate 3. Consul nomen urbis dixit. 4. Populum clarum duximus. 5. Litteras longas mlsistis. 6. Dona grata petlverunt. 7. Volumen parvum in aedificio posueram. 8. Legatos illustres pcpuleras. Translate 3. The leaders had sought the camp of Caesar. 4. They have joined wine with water. 5. You had repressed the crowd. 6. The soldiers will have broken the swords. 7. We had written a long letter. 8. You have covered the fields with grain. 9. They will have drawn the ship from the sea. 10. I have touched the fierce ani- mal. 1 1 . You will have sought the poet. 12. The sister had covered (her) head with a garment. 13. We shall have fallen from the rock. 14. Ab hostibusvelocibuscesseris. 14. You had joined shouts with terror. 15. Calamitas nationem egerit. 9. Omnes terras gladio rexerat. 10. Caput leonis verteramus. 11. Iunxeratis. 12. Imperator milites acres in _ proelium duxerat. 13. Omen bonum dlxero. 15. The clouds have touched the earth. 16. I had run to (my) mother. 17. You will have repressed the boldness of the legions. 18. Coronas in capitibus posuerint. 18. The slave will have broken the arrows. 16. Naves celeres verterimus. 17. Regna lata rexeritis. 205. Word Study. — In English we have from: rumpo: rupture, eruption, abrupt, interrupt, rumple, bankrupt, disrupt, corruption. scribo: scribe, scrivener, scripture, scribble, describe, inscribe, subscribe, prescribe. tego: detect, detective, protect, protection, tegument, protege. 91 APPLIED LATIN trahd : attract, abstract, detract, trail, train, tract, trace, retract, contract, distract. tango : tact, tangent, tangible, tangle, intact, contact. Try to make out the meaning of these derivatives, and talk them over in class. The Cities of Italy* Though we are chiefly interested in the story of the city of Rome and of its inhabitants, we must not forget that there were other cities in Italy which played a great part in the history of Roman greatness. Just south of the Alps, in the plain of the Po, were a number of important cities. Mediolanum (medioplanum , middle of the plain) is today Milan; Placentia (placeo, the pleasing city) is Piacenza. Cremona, an important city in antiquity, was in the late Middle Ages the home of renowned violin makers. The city of Mantua has become immortal because the great Latin poet Vergil was born there. On the banks of the Arnus river stood Pisa, famous today because of its Leaning Tower, and Florentia (floreo, the flourishing city), which today is eternally lovely Florence. South of the Liris river was sit- uated Capua, long the second city of Italy. This city Han- nibal, the great Carthaginian general, used as his base dur- ing the great death struggle between Rome and Carthage. Near Capua lay Naples, an early settlement of the Etrus- cans in Magna Graecia. Today steamers from Italy to America make Naples their last stopping place on the way to the New World. Behind Naples stood Vesuvius, *Cf. page 61. 02 THE ADJECTIVE a mountain which, as a volcano, overwhelmed the fair cities of Pompeii and Herculaneum, the fashionable pleasure resorts of the Romans, in 79 a.d. In Magna Graecia were Tarentum (Taranto, a great modern Italian naval base), and Brundisium (Brindisi to-day), the port from which all steamships leave Italy for Greece and Egypt. X. THE ADJECTIVE. COMPARISON 206. The Value of Comparison. — Whatever we meet that is new or strange we try to understand by comparing with something we already know or with which we are famil- iar. For instance, we realize how sweet some new thing is, (1) by comparing it with the sweet thing that we eat con- stantly (sugar), or, (2) by recalling all the sweet things we have ever eaten and comparing the new thing with them. So, for the sake of giving the proper value to new things, we need degrees of comparison in Latin as well as in English. The Latins used the following forms to express these com- parative values. 207. Positive Degree latus, wide, f elix, happy, recens, late, recent, fortis, brave, acer, sharp, Comparative Degree latior, lathis, wider, felicior, felicius, happier, recentior, recentius, Superlative Degree latissimus, -a, -um, widest. felicissimus, -a, -um, happiest. recentissimus, -a, later or more recent, -um, latest or most recent. fortior, fortius, fortissimus, -a, -um, braver, bravest. acrior, acrius, acerrimus, -a, -um, sharper, sharpest. 93 APPLIED LATIN 208. Remember: (i) That the comparative degree must be used when a comparison is to be made between two things; (2) that the superlative must be used when three or more things are to be compared. Incorrect use of the degrees of comparison is a very common error among students of English. 209. Like latus compare altus, clarus, amplus, firmus. Like felix compare audax, atrox, velox. Like recens compare dlligens, frequens, ingens, sapiens. Like fortis compare nobilis, levis, tristis, fertilis. Like acer compare celeber. Give the English comparison of each of the above words. 210. The degrees of comparison are also declined. The positive (latus) you have already learned: the superlative is also declined like the adjective latus ; the declension of the comparative you will learn in the next paragraph. The rule regarding the agreement of an adjective with its noun applies to the comparative and superlative degrees as well as to the positive. Quiz. — What is the importance of degrees of comparison? 94 THE ADJECTIVE 1. Fortior, fortius, braver Singular M.F. N. Norn. fortior, fortius, braver fortius Gen. fortioris fortioris Dat. fortiori fortiori Ace. fortiorem fortius Voc. fortior fortius Abl. fortiore (i) Plural fortiore (i) Norn. fortiores fortiora Gen. fortiorum fortiorum Dat. fortioribus fortioribus Ace. fortiores (is) fortiora Voc. Abl. fortiores fortioribus fortiora fortioribus 212. Like fortior decline: audacior, facilior, acrior, brevior, recentior, clarior. 213. Decline in full: Initium audacius, fabula brevior, opus facilius, tempus recentius, homo nobilior. 214. Translate: i. Fortissimos hostes in proelio superabi- mus. 2. Regna ampliora rexeras. 3. Inter homines honores Insigniores habebunt. 4. Praesidium firmissimum in urbe mansit. 5. Altissimos monies run amamus. 6. Imaginem clariorem solis in aqua vides. 7. Virl fortes animalia leoni- bus* ferociora in silvls petiverunt. 8. Deus nomen omni- bus nominibus* altius habet. 9. Aquam bono vino* clar- iorem mlscemus. * Notice the ablative cases used in the last three sen- tences. They indicate a comparison. 215. Rule. — Ablative of Comparison. — The ablative case with a comparative denotes comparison. 95 APPLIED LATIN 216. Translate: i . We have horses fleeter than the winds 2. They saw towers higher than hills. 3. Caesar held prov inces more extensive than a kingdom. 4. They were adorn ing a building more ancient than the temple of the god. Quiz. — How is a comparison often expressed in Latin? Learn these irregular comparisons: 217. bonus, good, melior, better, malus, bad, peior, worse, magnus, great, maior, greater, parvus, small, minor, smaller, multus, much, plus, more, Notice that in English some of these adjectives are also compared irregularly. Learn their comparisons in English. 218. The adjective facilis, easy, is compared irregularly as follows: facilis, facilior, facillimus. Like facilis compare difficilis, difficult; similis, similar; dissimilis, dissimilar; gracilis, slender; and humilis, lowly. 219. Plus is defective in declension. optimus, best. pessimus, worst. maximus, greatest. minimus, smallest. plurimus, most. Singular M.F. N. Nom. plus Gen. Tint plviris uai. Ace. plus Voc. Abl. nlure Plural M.F. N. plures phira plurium plurium pliiribus pliiribus plures (-i is) plura pliiribus pliiribus 220. In English there are several ways of wording com- parisons. You may say — wide, wider, widest. or wide, rather wide, very wide, or wide, comparatively wide, extremely wide. 96 THE VERB 221. Decline in full: Causa optima, aedificium maius, vlnum pessimum, turba maxima, flumen minus. 222. Translate: i. Pueri boni amlcos optimos habent. 2. Opera facillima petis. 3. Gracillima gramina ventusgra- vior pressit. .4. Turba maxima in templo sedebat. 5. Peiora vlna miserunt. 6. PlurimI viri famam amant. 7. Plurimae feminae pacem petebant. 8. Dona minora amorem mai- orem portant. 9. Fratres dissimillimos in via vidimus. 223. Translate: 1. Rather small women, better wine, a great reward. 2. A very lowly art, greater glory, in the smallest danger. 3. The worst calamity, for an extremely bad boy, more men, of the best citizens, more citizens. XI. THE VERB. THIRD CONJUGATION IN -IO 224. capio, capere, cepi, captus, to take. cupio, cupere cupivi, cupitus, to desire. facio, facere feci, factus, to make or do, fugio, fugere fug*, fugitum, to flee. iacio, iacere, iect, iactus, to throw. rapid, rapere, rapui, raptus, to snatch. specio, specere, spexi, spectus, to spy. quatio, quatere, quassi, quassus, to shake. 225. That these verbs belong to the third conjugation is shown by the ending of the infinitive. You will find that verbs of the fourth conjugation also end in -id, but you must not confuse these verbs with them. The -io ending of the first principal part may trouble you, but the ending of the infinitive in -ere should make a mistake impossible, for the fourth conjugation infinitive ends in -ire. 7 97 APPLIED LATIN 226. Learn the following tenses: CAPIO. — Active Voice — Indicative Mood Singular Present Tense Plural i. capio, / take i. capimus, we take 2. capis, you take 2. capitis, you take 3. capit, he {she, it) takes 3. capiunt, they take Imperfect Tense 1. capiebam, / was taking 1. capiebamus, we were taking 2. capiebas, you were taking 2. capiebatis, you were taking 3. capiebat, he {she, it) was taking 3. capiebant, they were taking Future Tense 1. capiam, / shall take 1. capiemus, we shall take 2. capies, you will take 2. capietis, you will take 3. capiet, he {she, it) will take 3. capient, they will take 227. In the last three tenses of the indicative these verbs follow the conjugation of the verb duco exactly. Practise the conjugation of all these tenses, using the verbs in Paragraph 224. 228. Word Study. — We find in English the following derivatives from: capio : capture, capacious, conception, accept, receptacle> receive, intercept, deceive, except, receipt. cupio: cupid, cupidity. facio: fact, facility, factor, factory, perfect, infect, affec- tion, efface, deface, effect, affect, faculty. fugio: fugitive, refuge, subterfuge, vermifuge, refugee. iacio: inject, reject, dejection, abject, subject, object, adjective. rapio: rapine, rapacious, rapid, rapture, rapier, surrepti- tious. quatio: (often -cutio) quake, earthquake, discuss, per- cussion, concussion. 98 THE VERB specio: inspect, respect, retrospect, circumspect, des- picable, suspect. Quiz. — How do the verbs above differ from duco? How are they distinguished from verbs of the fourth conjugation? Can you spell the derivatives above correctly? 229. For practice in the third conjugation -id verbs translate the following forms: i. Cupis, facio, fugimus, rapit. 2. Iaciunt, quatitis, capis. 3. Faciebas, iaciebant, rapiebam, fugiebatis. 4. Cupieba- mus, capiebant, quatiebat. 5. Capies, cupiemus, faciam, fu- gient. 6. Rapietis,iaciet,quatiam. 7. QuassI, iecistis, rapuit, fugimus. 8. FecistI, cupivit, ceperunt. 9. Fugeras, rapu- eram, ieceramus, quasserant. 10. Feceratis, cuplverat, ceperamus. 11. Iecerimus, quassero, rapuerimus. 230. Translate 1. Vectlgal magnum capio. 2. Regnum ducis cupimus. Servi Ignem in Insula faciunt. Ex periculis belli fugiebas. Pecuniam nuntiorum rapiebat. 6. Tela barbara cum Ira* iaciebatis. 7. Terram magnam quatiam. 8. Captlvus plure cum peri- culo* fugiet. 9. Virl maximo cum clamore* opus facient. 10. Vltam longiorem bono animo 10. You desire quiet, cuplvistl. 99 Translate 1. We have taken public money. 2. You have desired a wider kingdom. 3. He has made a massacre of the soldiers. 4. You had fled from the lion with greatest danger. 5. They had snatched a soldier's shield. 6. You had thrown the booty with care into the fire. 7. We shall have shaken the mountains with courage. 8. They will have fled from the envoys with disaster. 9. Galba will have made a high wall around the town. APPLIED LATIN Translate Translate ii. Agros fertiles agricolae n. With great boldness I take cepimus. the sailor's oars. 12. Gladios terribiles quasserunt. 12. He shakes the ends of the earth. 13. Scutum ingens in mare iece- 13. We were throwing spears from ram. the mountain into the sea. 14. Clvis avem loquacem 14. They were snatching up the rapuerat. roses from the grass. 15. Frigus hiemis fugeratis. 15. You were fleeing from a sav- age lion with great fear. 16. Sedem gratam in gramine 16. You will make a bridge across feceris. the river. 17. Nobilitatem cupiverit. 17. They will desire very great fame. 18. Vestes bonas ceperimus. 18. I shall take many allies to the camp. * Notice the ablatives introduced by cum in these sen- tences. They express manner. 231. Rule. — Ablative of Manner. — The ablative with cum is used to denote the manner of an action. When the ablative is modified by an adjective, the preposition cum may be omitted. Quiz. — How is the manner of an action expressed in Latin? In English? XII. THE NOUN. FOURTH DECLENSION 232. casus, a chance, falling, m. (case, casual) . cornu, a horn, wing (of an army), n. (Capricorn). exercitus, an army, m. senatus, the senate, m. impetus, a charge, attack, m. (impetuous). passus, a pace, m. (compass, unsurpassed). usus, use, advantage, m. (misuse, abuse, usual). cursus, a running, course, m. (incursion, concourse, excursion). motus, a motion, m. (motive, locomotive). conspectus, a view, sight, m. concursus, an attack, collision, m. occasus, the setting (of the sun), m. manus, the hand, f. (manual, maneuver, manuscript). 100 THE NOUN. 5 233. Words of the fourth declension have, with a few exceptions, the same form in the nominative singular as the form which you have already learned as the fourth prin- cipal part of the verb. For example, take the noun motus from moved, casus as if from cado, cursus from curro, conspectus from specio. The fourth declension, then, en- abled the Latins to use part of a verb as a noun. It is very easy in most cases to determine the meaning of fourth de- clension nouns by recalling the meaning of the verb from which the noun is derived. 234. Learn this standard fourth declension noun: Casus, casus, a chance, m. Singular Plural Notn. casus, a chance, m. casus, chances Gen. casus, of a chance casuum, of chances Dat. casui, to or for a chance casibus, to or for chances Ace. casum, a chance casus, chances Voc. casus, (0) chance casus, (0) chances Abl. casu, with, etc., a chance casibus, with, etc., chances 235. Most of the nouns of this declension are masculine in gender. The only common neuter noun of the fourth de- clension is cornu, a horn. Cornu, cornus, a horn ! n. Singular Plural Norn. cornu, a horn, n. cornua, horns Gen. cornus cornuum Dat. cornu cornibus Ace. cornu cornua Voc. cornu cornua Abl. cornu IOI cornibus APPLIED LATIN 236. Domus, a house, f., is a fourth declension noun with some forms of the second declension. Singular domus, a house, f . domus (domi) Norn. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. AM. Loc. Plural domus, houses domuum (domorum) domibus domus (domos) domus domibus domui (domo) domum domus domu (domo) domi, at home (compare note, page 67) Domus (domestic, domicile, domesticate). 237. Write sentences containing the English derivatives given above. Quiz. — What do you know about the gender of the fourth declension? Explain the locative case. XIII. THE NOUN. FIFTH DECLENSION 238. When the nouns of the Latin language had been examined and arranged by scholars in four declensions, there were found to be a, few left; very few, indeed, hardly twenty that had a uniform declension. These were grouped in the fifth declension. Learn these nouns: acies, an edge, a line of battle, f , dies, a day, m. superficies, a surface, f. effigies, a likeness, image, f. f acies, the face, f. glacies, ice, f . series, a series, f. fides, faith, f . pernicies, destruction, ruin, f. species, an appearance, show, f . spes, hope, f. res, a thing, f. planities, a plain, f . rabiSs, fury, i. 102 THE NOUN 39. Learn to decline these two fifth declension n Dies, diei, a day, m. Res, rei, a thing, f. Singular Singular Norn. dies, a day, m. res Gen. diei, of a day rei Dat. diei, to or for a day rei Ace. diem, a day rem Voc. dies, (0) day r€s Abl. die, with, etc., a day re Plural Plural Nom. dies, days res, things Gen. dierum, of days rerum Dat. diebus, to or for days rebus Ace. dies, days res Voc. dies, (0) days res Abl. diebus, with, etc., days rebus 240. Nouns of the fifth declension are feminine in gender. Dies, m., is an exception. Only the nouns dies and res of this declension are declined throughout in both singular and plural. The others are declined in the singular. Among these some have also the nominative and the accusative plural. 241. For rapidity translate the following forms, noting all possible cases : i. Acies, casus, superficial, res. 2. Domibus, spem, cor- nua, manibus. 3. Perniciel, rebus, casum, motuum. 4. Fidem, doml, iisum, re, senatul. 5. Diebus, casu, rerum, speciem, exercituum. 6. Glacie, seriem, rabies. 242. Translate: 1. Servl montes altos dies* multos spec- tabant. 2. Multas horas per silvam densam exercitum duxit. 3. Hostes ex loco plurimos passiis cesserunt. 103 APPLIED LATIN * Notice the underscored accusatives in these sentences. They express duration of time or extent of space. 243. Rule.— Accusative of Duration of Time and Ex- tent of Space. — Duration of time and extent of space are ex- pressed by the accusative without a preposition. 244. Translate: i. The hours of the day. 2. Many strange things. 3. Beyond hope. 4. Days of anger. 5. To the faith of Caesar. 6. Because of great things. 7. The image of a man. 8. The wing of an army. Quiz. — How extensive is the fifth declension? Are all fifth declension words completely declined? How are duration of time and extent of space expressed? The City of Rome* The first settlement at Rome was on that one of the seven hills called the Palatine (Mons Palatums). Around this hill a strong wall was constructed, and inside this wall were the barracks of the soldiers. This hill was completely covered in later times by the houses (palatia, palaces) of the Emperors. Near the river was another hill called the Capitoline (Mons Capitolinus) , on which stood the temple erected to the three great gods of the Latins : Jupiter, Juno, and Minerva. This hill had two peaks, and upon the second peak was built a citadel called the Arx. As a center of civic life, the Capitoline hill has given us the words capitol and capital, which we now use in connection with our state houses and centers of state government. * Cf . p. 76. 104 THE VERB Between the Palatine and the Capitoline was the meeting- place of the Romans, called the Forum, a place which has been justly famous throughout all succeeding centuries. Nearer the river was the Forum Boarium, to which the Romans brought produce for exchange. Here was the great commercial center of early Rome. Beyond the Capit- oline lay in order the Quirinal, Viminal, Esquiline, Caelian, and Aventine hills, which were afterward enclosed within the walls of Rome. The Circus Maximus, or chief circus, lay between the Aventine and the Palatine. In this circus took place horse races, gladiatorial shows, and festal games. At the bend in the Tiber, north of the city, was the Campus Mar- tius, or field devoted to the god of war, Mars. In this field the Roman armies were trained for war and their magistrates were elected. The Janiculan hill was just across the river. XIV. THE VERB. 245. audio, I hear; finid, / finish; haurio, / draw of; I drain; impedio, / hinder; munio, / fortify; sentio, / perceive; scio, / know; servid, I serve; venio, / come; vincio, / bind; FOURTH CONJUGATION audire, to hear. finire, to finish. haurire, to draw off; drain. impedire, to hinder. munire, to fortify. sentire, to perceive (by the senses). scire, to know. servire, to serve (followed by dat- ive case). venire, to come. vincire, to bind. 246. Verbs of the fourth conjugation do not differ greatly from third conjugation verbs, especially capio, rapio. The 105 APPLIED LATIN vowel i, however, constantly appears in the forms. Verbs of this conjugation may be recognized by the ending of the infinitive -ire, in which the vowel I is always long. 247. Word Study. — Though the number of verbs in this group is small in comparison with the great number found in the other conjugations, they furnish important root verbs for the English language. Audio is the base of audit, auditor, audience, audible, obedience. Finio gives us finish, finite, infinite, infinitive. Haurio appears in exhaust, inexhaustible, exhaustion. Impedio is found in impede, impediment. Munio gives munition, ammunition. Sentio is found in sense, sensation, sentiment, sensual, sensible, sentence, presentiment, resent, assent, consent, scent, sentinel, nonsense. Scio appears in science, scientific, conscience, prescience. Servio is the base of serve, servitude, subservient. Venio is particularly common: advent, adventure, vent, prevent, intervene, invent, event, eventual. Write out some English sentences containing these de- rivatives. Quiz. — How are verbs of the fourth conjugation recog- nized? 248. AUDIO.— Active Voice— Indicative Mood Singular Present Tense Plural i. audio, / hear I. audlmus, we hear 2. audls, you hear 2. audltis, you hear 3. audit, he {she, it) hears 3. audiunt, they hear 106 THE VERB Singular Imperfect Tense Plural i. audtebam, / was hearing i. audiebamus, we were hearing 2. audiebas, you were hearing 2. audiebatis, you were hearing 3. audiebat, he {she, it) was hearing 3. audiebant, they were hearing Future Tense 1. audiam, / shall hear 1. audiemus, we shall hear 2. audies, you will hear 2. audietis, you will hear 3. audiet, he (she, it) will hear 3. audient, they will hear Practise these tenses, using the verbs already given. 249. Translate these verb forms: 1. Audio, flnit, haurltis, impedis. 2. Munit, sentiunt, scis, serviunt, venitis. 3. Muniebat, sentiebam, sciebamus, serviebas. 4. Veniebant, vinciebas, audiebatis. 5. Finiebant, hauriebatis, impediebat. 6. Finient, sentiam, hauriemus, scies. 7. Impedietis, serviemus, munient. 8. Vincient, veniam, audiet. 250. Learn these fourth conjugation verbs: dormio, / sleep; dormire, to sleep. punio, / punish; punire, to punish. sancio, I ordain or establish; sancire, to ordain or establish. sepelio, / bury; sepelire, to bury. 251. Word Study: Dormio appears in the words: dormant, dormitory. Punio gives us: punish, punitive, impunity. Sancio is the base of saint, sanctum, sanctify, sanctuary. Sepelio provides the words: sepulchre, sepulture. 252. Examples of the Use of These Derivatives. — 1. The auditor examined the accounts of the bank. 2. Fire 107 APPLIED LATIN broke out in the dormitory. 3. Francis of Assisi was a saint of the Catholic Church. 4. Caesar led the army on a puni- tive expedition. 5. Do not enter the Sanctum Sanctorum. Write other similar sentences. Ask your teacher for other derivatives. 253. Learn the principal parts of the following verbs: audio, audlre, audlvl, audltus. flnio, JFlnlre, flnlvl, flnltus. haurio, haurire, hausl, haustus. impedio, impedlre, impedlvl, impedltus. mtinio, munlre, munlvl (-il), munltus. sentio, sentire, sensl, sensus. scio, scire, sclvl, scltus. servio, servlre, servil (-IvI), servltum. venio, venire, venl, ventum. vincio, vincire, vlnxl, vlnctus. dormio, dormlre, dormlvl, dormltum. punio, piinlre, punlvl (-il), punltus. sancio, sanclre, sanxl, sanctus. sepelio, sepellre, sepellvl (-il), sepultus. 254. Translate 1. Avem inter ntibes audio. 1 2. Laborem diel cum spe finis. 2. 3. Femina aquam ex fonte haurit. 3. 4. Socios legibus malls impedl- 4. mus. 5. Oppidum vallo munltis. 5. 6. Aves odorem silvae sentiunt. 6. 7. Aetatem equl sciebam. 7. 8. Imperatorl grato serviebas. 8. 108 Translate We shall hear of the terrible dangers. You were ending a night- watch in the tower. He will drain the water from the ditch. We fortify the town with a wall. You were hindering the ardor of the soldiers. The senate will perceive the courage of the citizens. We know the face of the maiden. You serve the senate. THE VERB Translate Translate 9. Exercitus ad castra vcniebat. 9. They will come to the gate with hope. 10. Vinum antiquum hauriebamus. 10. They will draw off the new wine. 11. Vallum magno labore fini- 11. I was ending the liberty of ebatis. the captives. 12. Clves rem a captlvls audi- 12. You will hear of the necessi- ebant. ties of the state. 13. Manus pessimorum servorum 13. I bind the hands of the treach- vinciam. erous slave. 14. In agro inter colles dormies. 14. You were sleeping on a low couch. 15. Dux sapiens fllios puniet. 15. He will establish the law. 16. Pacem sine bello sanciemus. 16. The consul will punish the crowd. 17. Equum in fossa alta sepelietis. 17. You were burying the body. 18. Silvae densae agmen 18. They hinder the charge of impedient. the soldiers. 255. AUDIO.— Active Voice— Indicative Mood Singular Perfect Tense Plural 1. audivi, / have heard 1. audlvimus, we have heard 2. audlvisti, you have heard 2. audlvistis, you have heard 3. audivit, he {she, it) has heard 3. audlverunt, they have heard Pluperfect Tense 1. audlveram, / /rod heard 1. audlveramus, we have heard 2. audlveras, you had heard 2. audiveratis, you had heard 3. audlverat, he {she, it) had heard 3. audlverant, they had heard Future Perfect Tense 1. SLudivetOf I shall have heard 1. audlverimus, we shall have heard 2. audiveris, you will have heard 2. audlveritis, you will have heard 3. audlverit, he {she, it) will have 3. audlverint, they will have heard heard Practise the conjugation of these tenses, using the verbs already given. 256. Translate these forms : 1 . Munivit , impedlvistis, hausl. 109 APPLIED LATIN 2. Finivisti, audiverunt, sensimus. 3. ScivistI, servierunt, venistis. 4. Vlnximus, dormlverat, punlveram. 5. Sanxer- amus, sepeliveras, impedlverant. 6. Servients, sciveratis, senserant. 7. Munlverat, impedlveratis, hauserint. 8. Fimvero, audiverimus, veneris. 9. Vinxeritis, dormlverimus, puniverit. 10. Sanxerint, sepellveris, impedlvero. 257. Translate 1. Perniciem aciei impedlvl. 2. Leonem ferocem sepellvistl. Translate 1. We shall have heard the name of the state. 2. You had drained the deep ditch. 3. Caesar omnes leges bonas sanxit. 3. Caesar will have fortified the houses. 4. We had hindered the way- farer's steps. 5. They will have perceived the odor of wine. 6. You had kno.wn the affairs of the senate. 7. We have served the people. 8. The end of the day will have come. 9. Caesar omnes mllites sciverat. 9. The enemy had drained the rivers around the camp. 10. Colorem vestium senseramus. 10. I have ended the hope of flight. 11. Urbem fossa altissima muni- 11. You will have heard the 4. Homines malos punivimus. 5. In templo dormlvistis. 6. Nuntium fallacem vlnxerunt. 7. In aedificium cum filiis amid veneram. 8. Clvibus nobilibus serviveras. veratis. winds in the hills. 12. Nubes lumen solis impedl- 12. I have bound the brothers verant. 13. Fontes aquae malae hausero. 14. Imperium ducis finlveris. 15. Vocem Caesaris in senatu audiverit. with care. 13. You had slept among the mountain crags. 14. The commander will have ratified peace. 15. We had punished the treach- erous envoys. no THE SENTENCE. INTERROGATIVE Translate Translate 16. Exsules punlverimus. 16. You have buried the body of Caesar. 17. Frigus flumina hieme vlnxerit. 17. The mountains have hin- dered the swift motion of the winds. 18. In valle inter montes dorm- 18. He had heard the false re- Iveritis. port. XV. THE SENTENCE. INTERROGATIVE 258. Up to the present time we have dealt only with the declarative sentence, the form which is used when we wish to make a statement of fact. We now come to the inter- rogative sentence, which is employed when we wish to ask a question. In English this kind of sentence is shown com- monly by the addition of a mark of punctuation called the question mark at the end. Now, in the time of Shakespeare it was not an uncommon practice to place this mark of punc- tuation just above the first word of a question, so that the reader might not have to wait till the end of the sentence, as we do now, to find out whether or not the sentence was a question. Among the Romans there was a similar practice. One of three little words, -ne, nonne, num, was usually placed at the beginning of an interrogative sentence. These little words told the reader or listener not only that the sentence was a question, but also indicated what kind of an answer was expected. 259. The little word -ne attached to the first word of a sentence showed that the sentence was interrogative, and that the answer expected might be either affirmative or nega- iii APPLIED LATIN tive. Habesne rosam? Have you a rose? Yes or no (Habeo or non habeo). The word nonne at the beginning of a sentence indicated a question requiring an affirmative answer. Nonne rosam habes? You have a rose, haven't you? Yes (Habeo). The word num at the beginning indicated a question re- quiring a negative answer. Num rosam habes? You haven't a rose, have you? No (Non habeo). 260. In Latin, the difference between declarative and in- terrogative sentences is commonly shown by the addition of these little words, but there are also other words; as, ubi, where, and unde, whence, which may introduce questions. Such introductory words are common. They are either pronouns or adverbs. We shall meet them later, but for the present remember that every interrogative sentence must be introduced by some interrogative word. 261. Translate: i. Nonne exercitus impetum fecit? 2. Num flammae equos terrent? 3. Ubi servi viam parave- runt? 4. Regesne gentes hominum regent? 1. Have you seen the captive? 2. Whence came the sound of voices? 3. You don't love money, do you? 4. Where do the boys sleep? 5. We have served the state, haven't we? Quiz. — How are interrogative sentences distinguished in Latin? XVI. THE VERB SUM, TO BE 262. This verb, although very important, we have left till now because it is irregular in conjugation, and does not fol- low the forms of any of the four regular conjugations. 112 THE VERB Principal Parts : Sum, / am; esse, to be; fui, / was or I have been, — . SUM.— Active Voice— Indicative Mood Singular Present Tense Plural i. sum, I am i. sumus, we are 2. es, you are 2. estis, you are 3. est, he {she, it) is 3. sunt, they are Imperfect Tense 1. eram, / was 1. cram us, we were 2. eras, you were 2. cratis, you were 3. erat, he {she, it) was 3. erant, they were Future Tense 1. ero, I shall be 1. erimus, wc shall be 2. eris, you will be 2. critis, you will be 3. erit, he {she, it) will be 3. erunt, they will be Perfect Tense 1. fui, / have been 1. fuimus, we have been 2. fuisu", you have been 2. fuistis, you have been 3. fuit, he {she, it) has been 3. fuerunt, they have been Pluperfect Tense 1. fueram, / had been 1. fueramus, we had been 2. fueras, you had been 2. fueratis, you had been 3. fuerat, he {she, it) had been 3. fu erant, they had been Future Perfect Tense 1. fuero, / shall have been 1. fu erimus, wc shall have been 2. fueris, you will have been 2. fueritis, you will have been 3. fuerit, he {she, it) will have been 3. fuerint, they will have been 263. Learn the tenses of the verb given above, and for practice translate the following forms of the verb sum : 1. Es, eratis, fuisti, sumus, erant, fueris. 2. Fuerimus, est, eram, ero, fuerunt, erimus. 3. Fuimus, erat, erunt, fueram, eris, eramus. 264. Examine these sentences : 1. Caesar fuit homo, Caesar was a man. The noun homo, though it is connected in sense with the noun Caesar, is a part of the predicate. It is called a pred- icate noun. 8 113 APPLIED LATIN 2. Flumen erat latum, The river was wide. The adjective latum, though it modifies the noun flumen, is a part of the predicate. It is called a predicate adjective. Predicate nouns and predicate adjectives are to be trans- lated after their verb. 265. Rule. — Agreement in the Predicate. A predicate noun agrees in case with the noun it modifies; a predicate adjective agrees in gender, number, and case. Make up some Latin sentences using the verb sum. XVII. THE ADVERB 266. The name of this new part of speech reveals to us its most important and most frequent use. The adverb belongs in a sentence, ad in connection with verb, the verb. To a slight extent the use of the adverb is extended beyond its use with the verb. Sometimes an adverb modifies an adjective or another adverb. 267. Most adverbs (i) are derived from adjectives and (2) present degrees of comparison as follows: (Adj.) Adverb Comparative Superlative (clarus), clare, clarius, more clearly, clarissime, most clearly, clearly. (fortis), fortiter, fortius, more bravely, fortissime, most bravely, bravely. (recens), recenter, recentius, more recentissime, most recently, recently, recently. (felix), feliciter, felicius, more felicissime, most happily, happily, happily. (acer), acriter, acrius, more sharply, acerrime, most sharply, sharply. These adverbs furnish standard examples of the degrees of comparison of first, second, and third declension ad- 114 THE ADVERB verbs. Most first and second declension adverbs follow the comparison of clare ; most third declension adverbs are like fortiter. 268. Some adverbs are compared irregularly: bene (bonus), well, melius, better, optime, best. male (malus), HI, peius, worse, pessime, worst. magnopere, greatly, magis, more, maxime, most. multum (multus), much, plus, more, plurimum, most. parum, Utile, minus, less, minime, least. saepe, often, saepius, oftencr, saepissime, oftencst. 269. Some very common adverbs are not derived from adjectives, but are actually cases of nouns or adjectives that arc used as adverbs. a. Some adverbs end in -6 (originally an ablative case) : subito, suddenly; necessario, necessarily; perpetud, cease- lessly; primo, at first. b. Some adverbs end in -tim or -im (originally an ac- cusative case) : gr a da tim, step by step, verbatim, word by word, nominatim, name by name, statim, immediately. 270. The following adverbs express the idea of place: ubi, where; ibi, there; inde, thence; unde, whence; hie, here; hue, hither; nine, hence. 271. The following adverbs indicate time: nunc, now; tunc, then; iam, already; nuper, recently; primum, first; deinde, next; denique, finally; numquam, never; semper, always; saepe, often; antea, before; postea, afterward. 272. The adverbs tarn, ita, sic, mean so; praeterea, be- sides; propterea, on that account. The negative adverb is non, not. "5 APPLIED LATIN 273. Translate the following: i. Dux mllites in pugnam saepe ducit. 2. Recenter venerunt. 3. Impetum subito fecerunt. 4. LegatI homines nominatim vocaverunt. 5. Inde leonem spec tat. 6. Ubi fontes sunt? 7. Nunc clare vide- mus. 8. Primum venit, deinde aciem spectavit, denique acriter clamavit. 9. Famam numquam habebis. 10. Nonne fortisslmi semper sumus? 11. Tunc in agro eratis. 12. Ibi captivos tenent. 13. Poeta fata verbatim narrabat. Quiz. — How are adverbs formed and used? Pick out ten adverbs in your English reader. XVIII. THE SENTENCE. COMPOUND The Conjunction 274. Our sentences so far have been very short and have expressed simple ideas only. Short sentences are commonly used by young children or those older persons whose educa- tion has been neglected. After the short sentences of child- hood we come to the longer sentences of youth. These longer sentences are, first, compound, and later, complex. 275. Compound sentences are composed of two or more short sentences of equal importance, connected by a new part of speech called the Conjunction. Example. — Ccesar gave the command and the soldiers obeyed. 276. Some conjunctions merely connect two sentences (and) ; others connect, but at the same time show a con- trast between the two sentences (but) ; others are used at the beginning of a sentence to connect it with the sentence which has just preceded. 116 COMPOUND SENTENCES 277. The following Latin conjunctions merely connect: et, -que, atque, and. Color et odor; color odorque. 278. These conjunctions connect and also show a contrast: sed, but; tamen, nevertheless; autem, however. 279. These conjunctions connect a new sentence with one which has just preceded: nam, for; itaque, and so; igitur, accordingly; enim, for; etenim,/or. 280. These conjunctions often occur in pairs: et . . . . et, both .... and. aut. . . .aut, either. . . .or. vel. . . .vel, either. . . .or. neque (nee) .... neque, (nee) neither .... nor. Conjunctions which are used in pairs are called correla- tive conjunctions. 281. It is important to remember that the conjunctions autem, enim, and igitur are regularly placed second, never first, in their sentences. The conjunction -que is always added to the word which it ought to precede. It is called an enclitic because it is always attached to another word. The accent of a word to which an enclitic is attached is on the syllable just before the enclitic, homines'que. 282. The most common English conjunctions are and, but, because, neither, nor, either, or, for, if, than, that. 283. Translate: i. Honorem gloriamque petimus. 2. Et patrem et matrem amabant fllii. 3. Virum facile ceperunt sed femina fugit. 4. Avis frumentum rapuit, et in rupe sedit. 5. Neque aestatem neque lumen solis timemus. 6. Etenim domum in insula habemus. 117 APPLIED LATIN 284. Translate: i. Where are the hills and valleys? 2. And so the general led the army into camp. 3. We saw neither houses nor low buildings. 4. For (cf. 282) the town was on fire. 5. Nevertheless the slaves warded off the flames, and overcame the fire. 6. Both women and men sought flight. 7. However the danger drove them from the road. Quiz.— Explain the words conjunction, enclitic, cor- relative. XIX. THE PRONOUN 285. If it were always necessary to repeat the noun-sub- ject of a sentence, and there were no words which could re- place the subject, we would talk something in the following way: "John says that John saw John's wife at John's store and that John's wife said to John that John's wife was on the way home." Happily there are words which we may use to replace the noun. These words are called pronouns, and the word pro (for) noun (a noun) reveals the use of this new part of speech. 286. In English and in Latin there are personal, demonstra- tive, reflexive, interrogative, relative, and indefinite pronouns. 287. Personal pronouns replace nouns which are the names of persons. They are usually employed when it is desirable to emphasize the subject of a verb which is used in the first or second persons, singular or plural. As you have learned, the personal subjects of the verbs, unless especially important or emphatic, are not expressed in Latin, but are included in the verb form. 118 THE PRONOUN 288. The personal pronoun of the first person : Singular Plural Norn, ego, / nos, we Gen. mei, of me nostrum, (i), of us Dat. mini, to or for me nobis, to or for us Ace. me, me nos, us Voc. , , Abl. me, with, etc., me nobis, with, etc., us 289. The personal pronoun of the second person : Singular Plural Nom. tu, you vos, you Gen. tui, of you vestrum (i), of you Dat. tibi, to or for you vobis, to or for you Ace. te, you vos, you Voc. , , Abl. te, with, etc., you vobis, with, etc., you Learn these pronouns. 290. Translate: i. Ego filiam regis amo. 2. Te in aedi- ficium portamus. 3. Nos fortissiml militum sumus. 4. Vos equum in via vidistis. 5. Nos loquaces sumus sed numquam mall. 6. Nos ad mare venimus et rosas in aquam claram iecimus. 7 Vos cum poeta* venistis. 8. Cum virginibus puerisque* templum spectavl. 9. Legatum tecum* mlsl. 10. Voblscum in exercitii serviebamus. 11. Multa animalia nobiscum in agro dormiunt. 12. Rex te e regno pellet. * Note the use of the ablative with cum in these sentences. They express accompaniment. 291. Rule. — Ablative of Accompaniment. — The ablative with cum expresses accompaniment. 292. The preposition cum is regularly attached (enclitic) to the ablative cases of these two personal pronouns (tecum) . 119 APPLIED LATIN 293. Translate: i. The consul looked at the races with the citizens. 2. Did the sad woman come with you? 3. The gen- eral with leaders and envoys ran to the camp. 4. We came with you. 5. They spoke to us about the soul. Quiz. — What kinds of pronouns are there in Latin? in English? How is accompaniment expressed in Latin? The Story of Early Rome At the beginning, Rome was merely an outpost of the Latin Confederacy against the Etruscans. Many soldiers lived there. When the fortress became thoroughly estab- lished and there was a lull in the fighting, the peaceful occu- pations of herding and agriculture began to appear. The farmers and herdsmen went out each morning to their work, and returned each evening to the protection of the walls of the Palatine. Popular tales of the Romans told an inter- esting story of the way early Rome was filled with people. It seems that the Romans held some great festival to which all the maidens of the neighboring tribes were invited. When the games were going on, and all the maidens were intently watching, each Roman, at a given signal, seized one for himself and kept her for his wife. Thus, they said, domestic life began at Rome. After Rome had become important as a large village, the men of surrounding tribes made their homes there and in- creased the population. Eventually Rome fell into the power of the Etruscans, who set up a kingdom there. When the new government was established, the leading 120 THE VERB men of the Roman families were called together as an ad- visory council for the kings, and formed the Senate. De- scendants of these senators made up the first group of citi- zens at Rome called the Patrician Order. Men of other tribes who had come to Rome made up the Plebeian Order, or the common people of Rome. The Etruscan kings were finally banished, and a Republican government under two Consuls was set up. This government was at first entirely controlled by the Patricians, the Plebeians having no voice in public affairs. The later history of Rome is mainly the story of the struggle of the Plebeians for a voice in the gov- ernment. XX. THE VERB. FIRST CONJUGATION 294. anno, armare, armavi, armatus, to equip with weapons, arm. cred, creare, creavi, creatus, to create, elect. do, dare, dedi, datus, to give, grant. erro, errare, erravi, erratum, to go astray, make a mistake. firmo, firmare, firmavi, firmatus, to make firm, strengthen. memoro, memorare, memoravi, memoratus, to mention, relate. emigro, emigrare, emigravi, emigratum, to move away. monstro, monstrare, monstravi, monstratus, to show, point out. muto, mutare, mutavi, mutatus, to change, alter. sto, stare, steti, statum, to stand, stand firm. Learn these first conjugation verbs. 295. Word Study. — Can you tell the Latin base and the English meanings of the following words? Add, army, monster, commute, station, destiny, statute, constitution, armory, donor, solstice, demonstrate, dative, erratic, ar- 121 APPLIED LATIN mada, memorandum, confirm, editor, stagnant, armistice, firmament, memorial, monstrous, statue, render, errant, stall, infirmary, remonstrate, surrender, disarm, standard, armament, unerring, commuter, donation, firm, memoir, date, immutable, erratum, memory, monstrosity, addition, erroneous, obstacle, institute, data, error, affirm, infirmity, memorable, mutual, erring, destitute, stable, superstition, distance, assist, staid, stability, establish, restive, constant, stage, standstill. Discuss these derivatives in class. Learn to spell them correctly. Use them in sentences. 296. LAUDO. — Passive Voice — Indicative Mood Singular Present Tense Plural i. laudor, / am praised i. laudamur, we are praised 2. laudaris, you are praised 2. laudamini, you are praised 3. laudatur, he (she, it) is praised 3. laudantur, they are praised Imperfect Tense 1 . laudabar, / was praised 1 . laudabamur, we were praised 2. laudabaris, you were praised 2. laudabamini, you were praised 3. laudabatur, he (she, it) was 3. laudabantur, they were praised praised Future Tense 1. laudabor, / shall be praised 1. laudabimur, we shall be praised 2. laudaberis, you will be praised 2. laudabimini, you will be praised 3. laudabitur, he (she, it) will be 3. laudabuntur, they will be praised praised 297. The Passive Voice. You have already learned that the passive voice is used when the subject of the sentence is 122 THE VERB represented, not as acting upon some object, but as being acted upon. 298. Examples.— He strikes John (verb in the active voice). He is struck by John (verb in the passive voice). From the second of these sentences note that it is impossible to have a direct object after a passive verb. 299. Examples. — He strikes John. John is struck by him. From the second of these sentences note that the direct ob- ject of a verb in the active voice becomes the subject of the verb when the verb is changed from the active to the passive voice. 300. Translate for practice : i. Amor, llberatur, ornamini. 2. Laudatur, vocantur, superamur, pararis. 3. Portantur, spectaminl, narrantur. 4. Parabatur, laudabatur, porta- bamur. 5. Narrabatur, vocabantur, amabaris, spectaba- mini. 6. Ornabantur, llberabamini, superabantur. 7. Por- tabuntur, vocabor, superabimur. 8. Paraberis, spectabi- minl. 9. Amabimur, llberabuntur. 10. Narrabitur, cla- mabitur, ornaberis. 301. Translate: 1. Neque tells neque gladiis armor. 2. TurexBrittanorum e multitudine mllitum crearis. 3. Pro- vinciae navibus praesidilsque maximls firmabantur sed hostes impetus terribiles saepe fecerunt. 4. Post pericula et labores vltae nomina virorum illiistrium memorantur. 5. Vos inter optimos elves monstrabiminl. 302. Translate: 1. I shall be decorated with a crown. 2. We shall be overcome by the cold. 3. The slaves will be carried from the island. 4. Nevertheless they always desire freedom. 5. At first the commander looked at the army. 6. 123 APPLIED LATIN Then he changed the line of battle. 7. We have seen the sunset. Quiz. — When is the passive voice used? Can a passive verb have a direct object? XXI. THE PRONOUN. PERSONAL 303. The personal pronoun of the third person : Is, Ea, Id, He, She, It, This, That Singular M. F. N. Ncm. is ea id Gen. eius eius eius Bat. el ei ei Ace. eum earn id Voc. Abl. eo ea Plural eo Nom. ei, ii eae ea Gen. eorum earum eorum Bat. eis, iis eis, iis eis, iis Ace. eos eas ea Voc. Abl. eis, iis eis, iis eis, iis Meaning of the cases: Singular Plural Nom. he, she, it, this, that they, these, those Gen. of him, her, it, this, that of them, these, those Bat. to or for him, her, it, this, to or for them, these, those that Ace. him, her, it, this, that them, these, those Voc. Abl. with, etc., him, her, it, this, with, etc., them, these, those that 124 THE PRONOUN 304. The pronoun is, when used in agreement with a noun, becomes a demonstrative adjective; Is homo, this man; ea femina, this woman; id bellum, this war. 305. Translate: i. Aves loquaces els * dabuntur. 2. Ab els** hostes superantur. 3. Fllils* poetae novam viam monstramus. 4. A consulibus** leges malae mutabantur. 5. Ampla provinciae vectlgalia imperatorl dabantur. 6. Eorum equl in agro sunt. 7. Aedificia magna els faciemus. * Many verbs are followed by two objects : the direct (accu- sative) upon which the verb acts directly, and the indirect (dative) with which the action of the verb is indirectly con- cerned. Thus: I give the book (d. o.) to John (i. o.). In sen- tences Nos. 3, 5, 7 are cases of the dative of the indirect object. 306. Rule. — Indirect Object. — The indirect object of a verb is put in the dative case. **Note the instances in 2 and 4 of the ablative intro- duced by ab (a). These ablatives are used with verbs in the passive voice. They indicate the person by whom the action is done. Change the verb to the active voice and you will see that the ablative becomes the subject of the verb. 307. Rule. — Ablative of Agent. — The personal agent with a passive verb is put in the ablative case introduced by the prep- osition ab (a). Translate: 1. I love her son. 2. He is freed by the com- mander. 3. They are carrying grain to the town. 4. Their voices are heavy. 5. We were overcome by them. 6. Are you looking at them {fern) ? 7. We shall be armed with those swords. 8. He was appointed consul. 125 APPLIED LATIN Quiz. — Give the personal pronouns for all three persons, singular and plural. How is the indirect object expressed? The personal agent ? XXII. THE VERB. FIRST AND SECOND CON- JUGATIONS 308. LAUDO. — Passive Voice — Indicative Mood Singular Perfect Tense Plural i. laudatus (a, um) sum, / have i. laudati (ae, a) sumus, we have been praised been praised 2. laudatus (a, um) es, you have 2. laudati (ae, a) estis, you have been praised been praised 3. laudatus (a, um) est, he {she, it) 3. laudati (ae, a) sunt, they have has been praised been praised Pluperfect Tense 1. laudatus (a, um) eram, I had 1. laudati (ae, a) eramus, we had been praised been praised 2. laudatus (a, um) eras, you had 2. laudati (ae, a) eratis, you had been praised been praised 3. laudatus (a, um) erat,he (she, it) 3. laudati (ae, a) erant, they had had been praised . been praised Future Perfect Tense 1. laudatus (a, um) ero, / shall have 1. laudati (ae, a) erimus, we been praised shall have been praised 2. laudatus (a, um) eris t 'you will 2. laudati (ae, a) eritis, you will have been praised have been praised 3. laudatus (a, um) erit, he (she, it) 3. laudati (ae, a) erunt, they will will have been praised have been praised 309. These tenses are the easiest of the Latin verb be- cause they are composed of forms which you already know. 126 THE VERB They are made up of the fourth principal part of the verb and tenses of the verb sum. Hence these tenses are called com- pound tenses. The form laudatus is really an adjective, and is declined -like the adjective latus. You must be very careful to make the adjective laudatus correspond in gender and number with the gender and number of the subject of the verb, as homo laudatus est, homines laudati sunt, femina laudata est, feminae laudatae sunt, carmen laudatum est, carmina laudata sunt. 310. Translate these forms for rapidity: i. Amatus es, ornatl sunt, paratae estis. 2. Monstrata erant, mutatae erimus, creatum erit. 311. Translate : 1 . A meis filiabus amatus sum. 2 . Pericula ab hostibus creata erunt. 3. Bella Gallica ab omnibus civi- bus optimlsmemorata erant. 4. Ubisunt litterae? 5. Nomen legis mutatum est. 6. Feminae in luce solis stabant. 7. Mons altissimus in finibus hostium stat. 8. Itaque agricolae ex agrls emigraverunt. 312. Translate: 1. Toil brings fame to many men. 2. In time of war we give aid to our friends. 3. Their house is burning, and the slaves are bringing water. 4. Have we been praised by the soldiers? 5. The names of evil men are never mentioned by good citizens. 6. The enemy stood at the head of the bridge. 313. Explain the uses of the ablative in these sentences. Review all the English derivatives of first conjugation verbs. 127 APPLIED LATIN 314. deled, delere, delevi, deletus, to blot out, destroy. floreo, florere, florui, j to bloom. fulgeo, fulgere, fulsi, > to glow, flash. luceo, Ulcere, luxi, } to give light, beam. rideo, ridere, risi, risum, to laugh (at). caveo, cavere, cavi, cautus, to beware, be on one's guard. torqueo, torquere, torsi, tortus, to twist. studeo, studere, studui, j to attend to, be eager (fol- lowed by the dative). spondeo , spondere, spopondi, sponsus, to promise. placed, placere, placui, placitus, to please (followed by the dative), to favor, aid (followed by faveo, favere, favi, fautus, the dative). Learn these second conjugation verbs. 315. Word Study. — Let us see what words are derived from the verbs above: deled, delete, indelible. floreo, flower, flourish, Florence, efflorescence, florist. fulgeo, refulgent, effulgent. luceo, Lucy, lucent, translucent, lurid, elucidate. rideo, deride, derision, risible, ridicule. caveo, caution, precaution, cautionary. torqueo, extort, contort, distort, torture, torment. studeo, study, studious, student. spondeo, spouse, respond, sponsor, despond, irresponsible, corre- spond. placeo, please, displease, complacent, complaisance, pleasant, pleasure, placid. faveo, favorite, favor, disfavor, favorable. 316. Examples of These Derivatives in English. — i. We have indelible pencils. 2. The florist sells flowers. 3. The polished shield was refulgent in the sunlight. 4. Very fine china through which light can shine is said to be trans- lucent; glass through which the eye can see objects very 128 THE VERB clearly is called transparent. 5. A lurid flame lighted up the heavens. 6. Do not deride people who take precautions. 7. By means of torture evidence was extorted from the slave. 8. An irresponsible person is a bad companion for young people. 9. May fortune favor the brave. 317. HABEO.— Passive Voice— Indicative Mood Singular Present Tense Plural 1. habeor, / am held (had) 1. habemur, we are held (had) 2. haberis, you are held (had) 2. habemini, you are held (had) 3. habetur, he (she, it) is held (had) 3. habentur, they are held (had) Imperfect Tense 1. habebar, I was held (had) 1. habebamur, we were held (had) 2. habebaris, you were held (had) 2. habebamini, youwereheld(had) 3. habebatur, he (she, it) was held 3. habebantur, they were held (had) (had) Future Tense 1. habebor, / shall be held (had) 1. habebimur, we shall be held (had) 2. habeberis, you will be held (had) 2. habebimini, you will be held (had) 3. habebitur, he (she, it) will be held 3. habebuntur, they will be held (had) (had) Practise these tenses, using the verbs given in Para- graph 314. 318. Translate: 1. Placetur, spondemur, torqueris, fave- tur, delentur. 2. Iubebatur, tenebaris, terrebamur, videba- minl, habebantur. 3. Studebitur, torquebimus, delebuntur, tenebiminl, habeberis. 319. Translate: 1. Memoria periculorum graviorum no vis calamitatibus deletur. 2. Aestate silvae floruerunt. 3. Fortiina fortibus fa vet. 4. Captivl a mllitibus habentur. 5. Ignis ingens in colle fulgebat. 6. Per nubes densas sol non semper lucet. 7. Legiones victoria rlserunt et clamaverunt. 8. Nonne Iram Caesaris cavemus? 9. Silvae vehementibus 9 129 APPLIED LATIN hiemis ventis torquentur. 10. HumanitatI et libertati elves Roman! studebant. n. Dona amlcls propter curam dili- gentiamque eorum spopondimus. 12. Opera mllitum duel placent. 320. Translate: 1. We are moved by the dangers of the war. 2. The streets of the town were filled by the shouts of the wayfarers. 3. The taxes are increased because of the lack of grain. 4. Their sons and daughters will be taught by the poet. 5. The labor of years was destroyed by the flames. XXIII. THE PRONOUN. REFLEXIVE 321. You have already learned the personal pronouns of the first, second, and third persons. In such sentences as / praise myself or you love yourself or he strikes himself, a special kind of personal pronoun is used for the objects myself, yourself, and himself. This pro- noun is called the reflexive personal pronoun. 322. The reflexive pronouns of the first and second per- sons are the same in form as the personal pronouns ego and tu. I praise myself, me laudo. You praise yourself, te laudas. We praise ourselves, nos laudamus. You praise yourselves, vos laudatis. There is a special reflexive pronoun for the third per- son: Third Person Reflexive Pronoun Nom. . Gen. sui, of himself, herself, itself. Dat. sibi, to or for himself, herself, itself. Ace. se, himself, herself, itself. Voc. . Abl. se, with, from, in, or by himself, herself, itself. 130 THE PRONOUN. REFLEXIVE The plural of this pronoun has the same forms as the singular. The meanings of the plural cases are of them- selves, to or for themselves, etc. 323. The following possessive adjectives are formed from the personal pronouns: meus, mea, meum, my or mine, noster, nostra, nostrum, our. tuus, tua, tuum, your {singular), vester, vestra, vestrum, your {plural). suus, sua, suum, his, her, its. suus, sua, suum, their. These adjectives are declined like latus. The nominative singular masculine of noster and vester are exceptional (ager, Paragraph 46). All the other forms of these two adjectives follow latus exactly. Suus is reflexive. If his, her, etc., denotes possession by the subject of the verb, use suus; if possession by someone other than the subject, use the genitive of is (eius, eorum, earum). 324. Translate Translate 1. Meus servus se laudabit. 1. The king's sister looks at her own image. 2. Nos vestris coronls ornamur. 2. We know ourselves. 3. Me in aqua video. 3. Our sun shines with its own light. 4. Reges se non semper rexerunt. 4. Men love their own sons. 5. Caput tuum ad occasum solis 5. The woman is led by her own vertebas. daughters. 6. Ars per se valebit. 6. Caesar will be praised by his own leaders. 7. Poeta suum carmen narravit. 7. Your sons have loved me al- ways. 8. Nostris laboribus semper lau- 8. Your {singular) daughters give dabimur. gifts to the sailor. 9. Noster avis eorum voces au- 9. Our horses often remain in the dlverat. fields. 10. Vos nos vestibus tegitis. 10. Where are your {plural) weapons? 131 APPLIED LATIN XXIV. THE VERB. SECOND AND THIRD CON- JUGATIONS 325. HABEO.— Passive Voice— Indicative Mood Singular Perfect Tense Plural i. habitus (a, um) sum, / have been i. habiti (ae, a) sumus, we have held {had) been held {had) 2. habitus (a, um) es, you have been 2. habiti (ae, a) estis, you have held {had) been held {had) 3. habitus (a, um) est, he {she, it) 3. habiti (ae, a) sunt, they have has been held {had) been held {had) Pluperfect Tense 1. habitus (a, um) eram, I had been 1. habiti (ae, a) eramus, we had held {had) been held {had) 2. habitus (a, um) eras, you had 2. habiti (ae, a) eratis, you had been held {had) been held (had) 3. habitus (a, um) erat, he {she, it) 3. habiti (ae, a) erant, they had had been held {had) been held {had) Future Perfect Tense 1. habitus (a, um) ero, / shall have 1. habiti (ae, a) erimus, we shall been held {had) have been held {had) 2. habitus (a, um) eris, you will have 2. habiti (ae, a) eritis, you will been held {had) have been held {had) 3. habitus (a, um) erit, he {she, it) 3. habiti (ae, a) erunt, they will will have been held {had) have been held {had) Practise these tenses, using the verbs given in Paragraph 3 J 4. 326. Translate: 1. Iussus sum, territa es, visum est, placitum est, deleta sunt, sponsl sumus. 2. Dele turn erat, torti erant, iussl eramus, habitae eratis. 3. Visum erit, placitum erit, territi eritis, iussi erunt. 327. Translate: 1. Captlvus in supplicio aeterno habitus sum. 2. Viri suis calamitatibus moti erant. 3. Num sol se movet? 4. In fabulls poetarum multa sunt falsa. 5. Leo atrox se in clara fliiminis aqua spectabat. 6. Omnis exer- citus in suo loco manebat. 7. Frater sororem suam duxit. 8. 132 THE VERB Caput, frons, dentes, mantis sunt partes corporis. 9. Natura hominum vestibus bonis non mutatur. 10. Consules clamor- ibus clvium territl erunt. 328. Translate: 1. The swift birds were seen in the forest. 2. Life is short and time is fleeting. 3. Above the pathless forests the sun shines. 4. Over the river there was a frail bridge. 5. The sad mother touched the face of her son with her hand. 6. I am considered a citizen of many states. 7. The bird was seen at the edge of the spring. Review all the English derivatives of second conjugation verbs. 329. caedo, caedere, cecidi, caesus, to cut, kill. credo, claudo, credere, claudere, credidi, clausi, creditus, clausus, to trust, believe, {followed by dative) to close. cresco, crescere, crevi, cretus, to increase. flecto, flectere, flexl, flexus, to bend. fluo, fluere, fluxi, fluxinn, to flow. frango, solvo, frangere, solvere, fregi, solvi, fractus, solutus, to break. to loosen, free. struo, struere, struxi, structus, to build. vinco, vincere, vici, victus, to conquer. Learn these third conjugation verbs. 330. Word Study. — Can you pick out the Latin bases and define the English meanings of these words? Suicide, seclusion, flux, resolve, substructure, convince, reflector, credit, flow, fraction, instruct, conviction, solve, decide, con- clude, fluent, insolvent, obstruct, destroy, deflect, creed, fluid, fraction, soluble, structure, fracture, concise, include, flue, resolute, convict, destructive, flexible, credulity, affluent, 133 APPLIED LATIN solvent, victor, dissolute, infringe, incision, conclude, con- fluence, invincible, construct, fragment, inflection, incredi- ble, influential, victim, superstructure, dissolve, fragile, precise, fluctuate. Write English sentences containing these derivatives. 331. DUCO.— Passive Voice— Indicative Mood Singular Present Tense Plural i. ducoT, I am led i. ducimur, we are led 2. duceris, you are led 2. ducimini, you are led 3. ducituTfhe (she, it) is led 3. ducuntur, they are led Imperfect Tense 1. ducebar, / was led 1. ducebamur, we were led 2. ducebaris, you were led 2. ducebamini, you were led 3. diicebatur, he (she, it) was led 3. ducebantur, they were led Future Tense 1. ducar, / shall be led 1. ducemur, we shall be led 2. duceris, you will be led 2. ducemini, you will be led 3. ducetur, he (she, it) will be led 3. dticentur, they will be led Practise these tenses, using the verbs of Paragraph 329. 332. Translate: 1. Caedor, creditur, crescitur, flectimur, frangiminl, struuntur. 2. Vincebar, solvebaris, claudebatur, credebatur, caedebantur. 3. Credetur, flecteris, crescetur. 4. Caedemur, vincemini, struentur. 333. Translate: 1. Aedificium ingens in colle altissimo struebatur. 2. Manum meam cecldi. 3. Ibi flumen nobile fluit. 4. Portae urbis clauduntur et omnes milites terrore tacent. 5. Cursus aquae ab agricola flectebatur. 6. La- bor omnia vincit. 7. Calamitatibus necessitatibusque do- cemur. 8. Captivi in oppidum ducuntur. 9. Dentes leonis gladio servi frangentur. 10. Hieme frigus crescit sed i34 THE PRONOUN. DEMONSTRATIVE aestate claro solis lumine vincitur. 1 1 . Fabula fallacis cap- tivl ab omnibus legatls credebatur. 334. Translate: i. Love laughs at all restraint. 2. Broad rivers flow from the mountains into the sea. 3. The gates of the city are closed against the enemy. 4. Caesar built a wall around the town. 5. We believe in virtue and nobility. 6. The rush of the wind was overcome by the high hills. 7. A fleet was constructed for the famous consuls. XXV. THE PRONOUN. DEMONSTRATIVE 335. hie, haec, hoc, this, or this man, woman, thing, according to the gender. iste, ista, istud, that {of yours), or that man, woman, thing, accord- ing to the gender. ille, ilia, illud, that, or that man, woman, thing, according to the gender. 336. These three words are pronouns because they replace nouns. They are called demonstrative because they point out (demonstro) or call attention to special persons, places, or things. Examples as pronouns: 1. Ille est bonus homo. That is a good man. 2. Haec est mea mater. This is my mother. Hie, iste, and ille when used in agreement with nouns are demonstrative adjectives. Examples as adjectives: 1. Hie homo est imperator noster. This man is our commander. 2. Ista fHia est sapiens. That daughter of yours is wise. These three words are, consequently, sometimes dem- onstrative pronouns, sometimes demonstrative adjectives. i35 APPLIED LATIN 337. Hie is sometimes called a pronoun of the first person because it always refers to some one close beside the speaker. Iste is sometimes called a pronoun of the second person because it refers to some one a little removed from the speaker, that is, over beside you. Ille is sometimes called a pronoun of the third person because it refers to some one at a considerable distance from the speaker. 338. Learn the declension of hie. Singular Nom. hie, haec, hoc, this, he, she, it. Gen. huius, huius, huius, of this, of him, her, it. Dat. huic, huic, huic, to or for this, to him, her, it. Ace. hunc, hanc, hoc, this, him, her, it. AM. hoc, hac, hoc, with, etc., this, him her, it. Plural Nom. hi, hae, haec, these, they. Gen. horum, harum, horum, of these, them. Dat. his, his, his, to or for these, them. Ace. hos, has, haec, these, them. AH. his, his, his, with, etc., these, them. 339. The pronoun hie is constantly used as an adjective, and when so used is a demonstrative adjective. 340. Translate: i. Hie (homo) equum in agro vidit, sed domum non duxit. 2. Mllites his gladiis caedem atrocem facient. 3. Omnes (virl) matrem Caesaris amant. 4. Hi (servi) domi sunt. 5. Rosaene aestate florent? 6. Haec (pericula) multos fortes terruerunt, sed legiones imperatoris numquam fugerunt. 7. Hoc (carmen) saepe laudatum est. 8. Hac in provincia consul sapienter rexit. 9. Hunc lega- 136 THE VERB turn de pace statim misimus. 10. Nunc bellum atrocissi- mum est in Europa. n. Trans flumen latum German! castra posuerunt. 12. His (rebus) socil territi sunt. 341. Translate: 1. These men were dragging that anchor from the water. 2. 1 am giving a gift to that son (of yours). 3. The leader of this legion saw that river and those bridges. 4. Do you favor those nations? 5. With this hope the minds of the soldiers were filled. 6. That house (of yours) in the valley is burning. 7. There stood the standard of Caesar. 8. We favor this law. XXVI. THE VERB. THIRD CONJUGATION 342. DUCO.— Passive Voice— Indicative Mood Singular Perfect Tense Plural 1. ductus (a, um) sum, / have been 1. duett (ae, a) sumus, we have led been led 2. ductus (a, um) es, you have been 2. ducti (ae, a) estis, you have led been led 3. ductus (a, um) est, he {she, it) has 3. ducti (ae, a) sunt, they have been led been led Pluperfect Tense 1. ductus (a, um) eram, / had been 1. ducti (ae, a) eramus, we had led been led 2. ductus (a, um) eras, you had been 2. ducti (ae, a) eratis, you had led been led 3. ductus (a, um) erat, he {she, it) 3. duett (ae, a) erant, they had had been led been led Future Perfect Tense 1. ductus (a, um) ero, / shall have 1. ducti (ae, a) erimus, we shall been led have been led 2. ductus (a, um) eris, you will have 2. ducti (ae, a) eritis, you will been led have been led 3. ductus (a, um) erit, he {she, it) 3. ducti (ae, a) erunt, they will will have been led have been led Practise these tenses, using >the verbs given in Para- graph 329. i37 APPLIED LATIN 343. Translate these forms: i. Caesus sum, creditum est, clausum est, flexi sumus, fracta sunt. 2. Solutus eras, structum erat, victi eratis, caesi erant, ductae eramus. 3. Petitus ero, positae erunt, recti erimus, press! eritis, scriptae erunt. 344. Translate: 1. Dentibus huius leonis caesus ero. 2. Ex hac provincia celeriter pulsl eramus. 3. Frigus Ignibus plurimls premetur. 4. Scientia artis utilis omnibus honorem dat. 5. Aqua e flumine ad urbem ducetur. 6. Auxilia a Caesare missa erunt. 7. Litterae recenter scriptae erant. 8. In manibus nunti magna pecunia posita est. 345. Translate: 1. The enemy quickly sought peace. 2. He was called emperor by a happy throng. 3. At the begin- ning of the fight the line of battle was broken. 4. However, the legions easily retained their places and then the enemy was driven from the camp. 5. The leader's standard was being carried before the marching troops. Review all the English derivatives of third conjugation verbs. The Story of Later Rome The Republican form of government lasted till the time of the great general, Julius Caesar, who brought about the changes which turned the Roman Republic into an Empire. Caesar lived just a little while before the time of Christ, and the republic which he ended had lasted about five hun- dred years. The early years of the republic were occupied with the struggles of the Patricians and Plebeians, and of both with the tribes surrounding Rome. 138 THE STORY OF LATER ROME The rising Roman power next came into conflict with the Carthaginians, who possessed a great naval empire, with a base at Carthage, in Africa. After the first war with this na- tion, Rome gained control of Sicily. The second war brought into history Hannibal, one of the world's greatest com- manders. Starting from Spain, Hannibal made a wonderful passage over the Alps, overwhelmed the Romans in North Italy, advanced toward Rome, and made his camp at Capua. For months he remained in Magna Graecia, proving a terror to the people of Rome. Roman mothers quieted their chil- dren by telling them that Hannibal "would get them if they didn't watch out." Finally he was forced to return to Carthage because of troubles at home. The third war saw the complete destruction of Carthage by Roman armies led by Scipio Africanus. The supremacy of Rome over the Western Mediterranean followed the victory of Scipio. At the same time Roman armies conquered Greece, thus extending their power over the Eastern Mediterranean. At last the task of governing the whole world became too great for the citizens of Rome. The ordinary Roman citizen could not cope with the problems of imperial control. Men of genius began to see an opportunity for seizing im- perial power. Bloody civil wars became the fashion in Rome. Marius, Sulla, Pompey, and Julius Caesar followed one another in quick succession. Caesar was at last suc- cessful, after a terrible period of civil war. But he was assassinated soon after securing control. His successor, Augustus, during a long peaceful reign, established the 139 APPLIED LATIN Empire, which spread abroad Roman laws, customs, and government throughout Europe and Western Asia. XXVII. THE PRONOUN. DEMONSTRATIVE 346. Learn the declension of ille. Singular Nom. ille, ilia, illud, that, he, she, it. Gen. illius, illius, illius, of that, him. Dat. illi, illi, illi, to or for that, him, her, it. Ace. ilium, illam, illud, that, him, her, it Abl. illo, ilia, illo, with, etc., that, him, her, it. Plural Nom. illi, illae, ilia, those, they. Gen. illorum, illarum, illorum, of those, them. Dat. illis, illis, illis, to or for those, them. Ace. illos, illas, ilia, those, them. Voc. , , , , . Abl. illis, illis, illis, with, etc., those, them. 347. The declension of iste, that (of yours), he, corre- sponds exactly in endings to the declension of ille. 348. Like hie, ille and iste are often used in agreement with nouns. When thus used these pronouns become demonstrative adjectives. Ille is sometimes used in the same sentence with hie to indicate a contrast, as ille, the former; hie, the latter. 349. Translate: i. Illud vinum pessimum erat. 2. Illo bello istl milites territi sunt. 3. Iste films imperatorem suum amat. 4. Ilia calami tas civitatem felicem superavit. 5. Nos clamorem magnam in illo templo saepe facimus. 140 THE PRONOUN. DEMONSTRATIVE 6. Ubi ille pons in flumine lato fuit? 7. Caesarem et Gal- bam videmus; ille imperator, hie agricola est. 350. Translate: 1. We see the swift motion of that river. 2. That army was led across the bridge into the territories of the enemy. 3. The fragrance of roses is pleasing to all men. 4. The color of the garment had been destroyed by the light of the sun. 5. The great war has destroyed the laws of nations. 6. In these days we seek peace not war. Certain Irregular Adjectives 351. Certain adjectives in Latin resemble ille and iste in declension, especially in the genitive and dative singular. When used alone, these adjectives become pronouns. 352. Learn this declension : totus, tota, totum, all, whole. Singular Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. Norn. totus tota totum toti totae tota Gen. totius totius totius totorum totarum totorum Dat. toti toti toti totis totis totis Ace. totum totam totum totos totas tota Voc. tote tota totum toti totae tota Abl. toto tota toto totis totis totis 353. Learn the following irregular adjectives: unus, una, unum, one, alone. ullus, ulla, ullum, any. nullus, nulla, nullum, none, no. uter, utra, utrum, which {of two). neuter, neutra, neutrum, neither {of two). uterque, utraque, utrumque, each {of two) both. solus, sola, solum, alone, only. alius, alia, aliud, other, another. alter, altera, alterum, the one, the other {of two); Genitive singular, alterius. 354. Translate: 1. Alii consules maiores provincias ha- 141 APPLIED LATIN bent. 2. Totum carmen amamus. 3. NullI pueros malos laudant. 4. Aliud flumen in mare fruit. 5. Nos soli impera- tores sumus. Word Study. — Explain these English words and use them in sentences of your own: Unit, alternate, sole, alien, neuter, union, total, alternately, soliloquy, neutrality, an- nul, unify, in to to, null, solo, once, uniform. XXVIII. THE VERB. THIRD CONJUGATION IN -10 355. Review Paragraphs 224-231. 356. Learn the conjugation of the following tenses of the passive voice of verbs in -io. CAPIO.— Passive Voice — Indicative Mood Singular Present Tense Plural 1. capior, / am taken 1. capimur, we are taken 2. caperis, you are taken 2. capimini, you are taken 3. capitur, he {she, it) is taken 3. capiuntur, they are taken Imperfect Tense 1. capiebar, / was taken 1. capiebamur, we were taken 2. capiebaris, you were taken 2. capiebamini, you were taken 3. capiebatur, he {she, it) was 3. capiebantur, they were taken taken Future Tense 1. capiar, / shall be taken 1. capiemur, we shall be taken 2. capieris, you will be taken 2. capiemini, you will be taken 3. capietur, he {she, it) will be 3. capientur, they will be taken taken 357. The verb facio does not possess these three tenses of the passive voice. Instead of them the Latins used tenses of fio, an irregular verb to be taken up later. 358. The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses of 142 THE VERB these verbs do not differ in conjugation from the same tenses of duco. Conjugate captus sum, captus eram, captus erd. 359. Practise these tenses, using the other seven verbs given. 360. For rapidity translate these forms: i. Capior, iaceris, specitur. 2. Rapimur, cupiminl, quatiebar. 3. Ca- piebaris, rapiebatur, iaciebamini. 4. Cupiebamur, rapiar. 5. Capieris, specietur, iaciemur. 6. CupieminI, quatientur. 7. Iactus sum, cuplta es, quassl eramus, factae eratis, rapta erunt. 361. Translate: 1. Praeda ab hostibus rapiebatur. 2. Tela in flumen iacta erant. 3. Murus magnus a mlhtibus capietur. 4. Mons altus ventis vehementibus quassus erit. 5. Magna pecunia ab omnibus hominibus non cupitur. 6. De vallo tela in densam turbam accurate iaciebantur. 362. Translate: 1. The great town in the valley will be captured. 2. This town was recently captured by the brave soldiers. 3. Extensive provinces are desired by the king. 4. The whole temple had been shaken by the hands of a god. 5. In what direction had the captives fled? Quiz. — Can you recall some of the English derivatives of -io verbs given before? What must you remember about the passive voice of facio ? Pick out in your English reader some (1) personal pronouns; (2) possessive adjectives; (3) reflexive pronouns; (4) demonstrative pronouns; (5) demonstrative adjectives. Can you decline the personal pronouns of the first and second persons in English? i43 APPLIED LATIN XXIX. THE PRONOUN AND ADJECTIVE. INTERROGATIVE 363. The interrogative adjective qui, quae, quod, which or what, is declined as follows: Norn. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. M. qui, cuius, cui, quern, j quo, Singular F. quae, cuius, cui, quam, N. quod, cuius, cui, quod, > quo, qua, Plural qui, quae, quae, quorum, quarum, quorum, quibus, quibus, quibus, quos, quas, quae, which or what, of which, to or for which, which or what. with, from, in, or by which. which or what, of which, to or for which, which or what. quibus, quibus, quibus, with, from, in, or by which. 364. When this interrogative adjective is used without any noun in agreement, it becomes an interrogative pronoun and is slightly different in declension and meaning. 365. The singular of the interrogative pronoun has but two terminations, one for both the masculine and feminine and one for the neuter. Learn its declension. Singular M. and F. N. Nom. quis, quid, who or what. Gen. cuius, cuius, whose. Dat. cui, cui, to or for whom or what. Ace. quem, quid, whom, what. Voc. > > . Abl. quo, quo, with, from, in, or by whom or what. 144 THE PRONOUN AND ADJECTIVE. INTERROGATIVE 366. The plural is declined exactly like the plural of qui, quae, quod, having separate forms for all genders. 367. The pronoun quis, quid, and the interrogative ad- jective qui, quae, quod, are regularly used to introduce in- terrogative sentences. 368. Translate: i. Quod aliud flumen ex monte videmus? 2. Flumen Rhenum clare videmus. 3. Quis vlnum haurit? 4. Qua in urbe rex mansit? 5. Quae feminae coronam in templum portaverunt? 6. Qui equum parvum vlnxerunt? 7. Cuius rosam puer habet? 8. A quibus socils illud bellum paratum est? 9. Quibus virls soils consul favebat? 10. Quod perlculum unum cavemus? 11. Quarum vestes servi curiosl in aqua posue runt? 12. Quid quaerebas? 13. Quo in proe- lio elves niiper superatl sunt? 369. Translate: 1. In what building were the women? 2. Whom do we see in the field? 3. To what man is the fragrance of roses pleasing? 4. With what sword was the soldier's hand cut? 5. The ship was drawn from the sea without injury. 6. Whose crown is covered by the garment? 7. In this recent battle was another messenger killed? Quiz. — Describe the uses of the interrogative adjective and pronoun. How do they differ in forms? How can you tell when the form cuius is used as a pronoun? How can you tell when it is used as an adjective? What kind of words must introduce interrogative sentences? What other words have you learned which can introduce interrogative sen- tences? 10 145 APPLIED LATIN XXX 370. . THE VERB. FOURTH CONJUGATION aperio, aperire, aperui, apertus, to open. custodio, custodire, custodivi, custoditus, to guard. mollio, mollire, mollivi, mollitus, to soften. reperio, reperire, repperi, repertus, to find. salio, salire, salui, saltus, to jump. saevio, saevire, saevivi, saevitus, to rage. stabilio, stabilire, stabilivi, stabilitus, to make steady. vestio, vestire, vesti vi, vestitus, to clothe. Learn these fourth conjugation verbs. 371. Word Study. — Can you tell the Latin root words from which these derived words are formed: Custody, mollify, aperture, sally, stability, vest, result, insult, stabil- izer, assail, vesture, exult, investments, assault, emollient, aperient, custodian, salient, vestment, resilience? 372. Examples of the Use of These Derivatives. — i. If you are in the custody of an irate policeman, do not try to mollify him with tears. 2. From an aperture in the wall a sally was attempted. 3. What inventor can discover a stabilizer for an aeroplane? 4. The Russian salient at Warsaw was soon broken by the Germans. 5. Let us not exult in the results of our investments. 6. Cold cream is an emollient. What is an aperient? 7. Resilience is the bouncing property in rubber. 8. He was arrested on a charge of assult and battery. 9. As custodian of the Seal he was vested with great authority. 10. Do you not admire stability of character? Do you know any more derivatives of these verbs? 146 THE VERB 373. AUDIO.— Passive Voice— Indicative Mood Singular Present Tense Plural i. audior, / am heard i. audimur, we are heard 2. audiris, you are heard 2. audlmini, you are heard 3. audltur, he {she, it) is heard 3. audiuntur, they are heard Imperfect Tense 1. audiebar, / was heard 1. audiebamur, we were heard 2. audiebaris, you were heard 2. audiebamini, you were heard 3. audiebatur, he {she, it) was 3. audiebantur, they w ere heard heard Future Tense 1. audiar, / shall be heard 1. audiemur, we shall be heard 2. audieris, you will be heard 2. audiemini, you will be heard 3. audietur, he {she, it) will be 3. audientur, they will be heard heard 374. Translate for practice: 1. Audiris, impedior, mun- Itur, serviuntur, vincimur, sepellminl. 2. Aperiebatur, ves- tiebar, impediebantur, serviebaris, vinciebamini. 3. Ves- tiemur, punieminl, munientur, audietur, finietur. 375. Translate: 1. Uter servus loquax punietur? 2. In fossa magna milites sepelientur. 3. Lex bona ab omnibus sancltur. 4. Totum templum a virls fortissimls custodie- batur. 5. Quis gloriam famamque amat? 6. Gloria famaque ab omnibus sapientibus amantur. 7. A quo pax petlta erit? 8. Quis hoc in loco sepelitur? 9. Ad aliud oppidum venie- bant. 376. Translate: 1. The voice of the consul will be heard in the midst of the shouts of the citizens. 2. In the forests the lions and fierce animals rage. 3. The sailors leaped from the ship. 4. The slave was guarded by the soldiers. 5. The cause of the outcries was easily found. 6. The anger of i47 APPLIED LATIN Caesar was softened by the sad voices of the people. 7. The women will be clothed in elegant garments. 8. A road was opened by the legion through the mountains. 9. What tale has been told by the messenger? XXXI. THE PRONOUN. DEMONSTRATIVE 377. The two demonstrative pronouns idem and ipse are also called intensives, because they are especially emphatic. Like hie, ille, iste, they are often used in agreement with nouns as demonstrative adjectives. They may be, then, either pronouns or adjectives. 378. Idem and Ipse are declined as follows: Idem, the same Singular M. F. N. Nom. idem, eadem, idem, the same {man, woman, thing). Gen. eiusdem, eiusdem, eiusdem, of the same. Bat. eidem, eidem, eidem, to or for the same. Ace. eundem, eandem, idem, the same. Voc. ■> > y . AM. eodem, eadem, eodem, with, etc., the same. Plural Nom. j eidem, 1 iidem, eaedem, eadem, the same. Gen. eorundem, earundem, eorundem, of the same. Bat. \ eisdem, ( iisdem, eisdem, eisdem, to or for the same. iisdem, iisdem, Ace. eosdem, easdem, eadem, the same. Voc. > , y . Abl. ( eisdem, } iisdem, eisdem, eisdem, with, etc., the same. iisdem, iisdem, 148 THE PRONOUN. DEMONSTRATIVE 379. Ipse, self {himself, itself, etc.) Singular Nom. ipse ipsa ipsum Gen. ipsius ipsius ipsius Dat. ipsi ipsi ipsi Ace. ipsum ipsam ipsum Voc. Abl. ipso ipsa Plural ipso Nom. ipsi ipsae ipsa Gen. ipsorum ipsarum ipsorum Dat. ipsis ipsis ipsis Ace. ipsos ipsas ipsa Voc. Abl ipsis ipsis ipsis 380. Translate: i. Elsdem, ipsis, earundem, eld em. 2. Ipsorum, ipsam, idem. 3. Ipsi, eadem, ipsa, eadem. 381. Translate: 1. Ipsi (homines) eandem (feminam) amant. 2. Quis filiam poetae laudat? 3. Nosomneshanc feminam laudamus. 4. Ab imperii tore (ipso) alii mllites ductl sunt. 5. Ubi domus Caesaris est? 6. Altera domus in monte Palatlno nunc stat. 7. Locum ipsum custodlmus. 382. Translate: 1. The same servants serve the same commander. 2. These same sailors leaped from the ship. 3. We slept on the same couch. 4. The body of Caesar was buried in the temple itself. 5. Those same men will estab- lish peace. 6. The steps of the consul were suddenly hin- dered by a throng of men. 149 APPLIED LATIN XXXII. THE VERB. FOURTH CONJUGATION 383. AUDIO.— Passive Voice — Indicative Mood Singular Perfect Tense Plural i. audltus (a, um) sum, / have i. audlti (ae, a) sumus, we have been heard been heard 2. audltus (a, um) es, you have 2. audit! (ae, a) estis, you have been heard been heard 3. audltus (a, um) est, he {she, it) 3. audlti (ae, a) sunt, they have has been heard been heard Pluperfect Tense 1. audltus (a, um) eram, / had 1. audlti (ae, a) eramus, we had been heard been heard 2. audltus (a, um) eras, you had 2. auditi (ae, a) eratis, you had been heard been heard 3. auditus (a, um) erat, he (she, 3. audlti (ae, a) erant, they had it) had been heard been heard Future Perfect Tense 1. audltus (a, um) ero, / shall 1. audlti (ae, a) erimus, we shall have been heard have been heard 2. audltus (a, um) eris, you will 2. auditi (ae, a) eritis, you will have been heard have been heard 3. auditus (a, um) erit, he (she, 3. auditi (ae, a) erunt, they will it) will have been heard have been heard Learn these tenses. Practise them, using other fourth conjugation verbs. 384. Translate: 1. Auditum est, finlta sunt, impediti estis, munlta est. 2. Sensum erat, reperta erant, piinltl erant. 3. Sanctum erit, sepelitus eris, custoditi " erunt, vestitus eris. 385. Translate: 1. Frlgus hiemis lumine solis mollitum erat. 2. Ludus novus a pueris repertus est. 3. Milites aqua 150 THE HEART OF ROME impeditl sunt. 4. Labor diel long! finltus est. 5. Praeda ab exsulibus sepellta erat. 6. Socil ad oppidum venerunt sed in pugna nostri vlcerunt. 386. Translate: 1. Has any city been fortified by a wall? 2. The laws have been established by the people. 3. In win- ter a wise woman is well clothed. 4. Flames leaped from the fire. 5. All the leaders perceived the same thing. 6. Who will punish the treacherous envoys? Quiz. — Can you mention some of the English derivatives of fourth conjugation verbs? The Heart of Rome The heart of Rome was the Roman Forum, situated be- tween the Palatine and Capitoline Hills. In that small space the history of the world was made for centuries. There the common people of Rome fought for suffrage, and marked out the course later followed by the common people of England and France, a course now being followed by the Social Democrats of Germany, a course which has produced the Republican Government of the United States. There Roman Religion had its central shrine, and Roman Law, the basis of modern law, was brought to perfection. There Cato thundered his denunciation of Carthage; Marius and Sulla shook the foundations of the Republic with civil war; Cicero, Rome's greatest orator, reached the utmost heights of eloquence, and Julius Caesar held the destinies of the world in his power. To that spot the victorious Roman generals returned from their foreign conquests, and ambas- 151 SUMMARY sadors from the ends of the world came to talk peace with the invincible Republic. Within its limits were the offices of bankers who controlled the money markets of the ancient world. Crowds of people from every quarter of the Mediter- ranean thronged its narrow passages, elbowing and jostling, mixing their foreign languages with the native Latin. There tarried the great Roman poets who loved to dwell on the achievements of Rome. That was the spot which had so great an attraction for Cicero that in his banishment he could hardly endure life away from Rome. In the Forum were centered all those joys of living whose loss through banishment destroyed the genius of so great a poet as Ovid. The Forum was the heart of Rome, and the heart of the ancient world. SUMMARY. FOR THE STUDENT Before proceeding further consider carefully the follow- ing summary of what you should have acquired by this time in your study of the relation of Latin and English. In the field of Grammar you should know — i. The Parts of Speech (except the Interjection). 2. The Sentence: Simple and Compound. Declarative and Interrogative. 3. The Declension of Regular Nouns and Adjectives. 4. The Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs. 5. The Conjugation of Regular Verbs in the Indicative Mood, Active and Passive. 6. The Conjugation of the verb Sum in the Indicative. 7. The Agreement of Adjectives with Nouns. 153 APPLIED LATIN 8. The Agreement of Verbs with their Subjects. 9. The Agreement of Predicate Nouns and Adjectives. 10. The Meanings and Uses of Prepositions. 11. The Following Case Constructions: The Nominative as the Subject. The Genitive ex- pressing Possession. The Partitive Genitive. The Dative of the Indirect Object. The Accusative of the Direct Object. The Accusative of Place to Which. The Accusative of Duration of Time and Extent of Space. The Ablatives of Means, Cause, Accompani- ment, Manner, Comparison, Agent, Time when or within Which, Place in Which and Place from Which. Besides these definite acquisitions in the field of Grammar you should by now have a clear and enthusiastic apprecia- tion of the close dependence of English upon Latin. You should be able to make out the meaning of many English nouns without the aid of an English dictionary. You should have acquired the habit of breaking up unfamiliar compound English words into their various parts and of bringing to bear upon each part the information which this study of Latin has given you. Your study of the material presented in the interchapters should have given you a wider knowledge of the facts of ancient geography and history. You should feel now that the connection between the ancient and the modern world is after all very close, that acquaintance with the facts of modern times only is but a partial education, and that what exists to-day is but the latest development of move- ments which started many centuries ago. 154 THE SENTENCE. COMPLEX XXXIII. THE SENTENCE. COMPLEX A. IN ENGLISH 387. In the first part of this book the sentences you met were either Simple, as "J saw the beautiful garden of the queen") or Compound, as "The general gave tJie command and the soldiers charged." You are now ready to consider the third type of sentence, the Complex. As has been said, the Simple sentence is the form used by young children; the Compound, by older children who have begun to link simple sentences together. The Complex sentence is used by those who have been well educated and have trained minds. Someone has said that the extent of a man's education can be measured by his ability to use the complex sentence correctly. 388. The Complex Sentence. — A Complex sentence is one that contains one independent {principal) statement or clause and one or more dependent (subordinate) statements or clauses. 389. Clause. — A Clause is a group of words (containing a subject and a predicate) that forms part of a sentence. It may be Principal or Subordinate. 390. Examine the following English complex sentences and note especially the italicized parts which mark the dependent clauses. i. Why he went away has never been found out. 2. I asked what he had seen. 3. Mr. Jones called while I was out. 4. We study Latin to give us greater mastery of English. 5. Caesar was so great a military genius that we forget his extraordinary political ability. Each of these sentences is Complex. Each contains one i5S APPLIED LATIN main statement and one subordinate {dependent) statement. The dependent statement may precede or follow the main statement, and contains a subject and a predicate of its own. Kinds of Dependent Clauses 391. A dependent clause may take the place of a noun (noun clause) : I hear that he has gone; or of an adjective (adjectival clause) : The hat which I am holding is mine; or of an adverb (adverbial clause) : When the captain started the soldiers followed. Adverbial clauses are very frequent in English. The fol- lowing words usually precede them: In order that, that, to (purpose). I look to (in order that / may) see. That (result). He ran so hard that he fell down. Because, since (cause). The picnic was postponed be- cause it rained. If, if not, unless (condition). If we win, we shall be happy. Though, although, even if (concession). Although we failed we were not discouraged. After, before, since, until, till (temporal). After the war began all the nations were involved. Adjectival clauses are about as common as adverbial clauses. They are introduced in English by these words: Who, which, what, and that (relative pronouns). The hat which / hold is mine. Where, when, whence, why, whither, while (conjunctive adverbs). I know the place where the violets grow. Noun clauses for the most part follow verbs of saying, knowing, thinking, and perceiving. They are introduced by 156 THE SENTENCE. COMPLEX the conjunctions — that, I say that tlie day is fair; whether, He asked whether we were going to town; if, I shall wait to see if they cross the river. You should have little trouble in telling the kinds of dependent clauses in English sentences, for at the beginning of each clause there regularly stands one of the above in- troductory words which serves to identify the clause. Quiz. — What is a Complex sentence; a clause? How can you tell the different kinds of clauses in English? What are the several kinds of adverbial clauses? In your English reader pick out a number of Complex sentences and identify each clause. Write some complex sentences of your own. 392. Study the following sentences. Tell which are Simple, which Complex, and which Compound. Point out the Subordinate Clauses. Tell which Part of Speech each word is. i. It was often difficult to believe that the day was so near at hand. 2. Is not the Star Spangled Banner inspiring when we hear it played? 3. We started early because we were to visit the mill. 4. In order to reach the town the cavalry made a detour. 5. A merchant must know his neighborhood before he buys his stock. 6. Throw the ball; I will catch it. 7. Our first objective was Troy, which lay to the north. 8. As I entered the main street I saw what froze my heart. 9. So deep was the silence that it seemed menacing. 10. Unless the war is speedily ended the nations will be bankrupt, n. I know his name and the house in which he lives. 12. The physician came late in the day to see his patient. 13. If the river were a little higher, our pasture land would be under water. 14. Go and may God 157 APPLIED LATIN bless you. 15. Let justice be done even if the Heavens fall. 16. 1 continued to bathe while the others were watching the shark. 17. Ask him to wait until all are ready. 18. Before I congratulate the gentleman, I must know whether he will accept the appointment. 19. The Mayor's statement shows that he is alive to his responsibilities, though his words are none too reassuring. 20. When a friend is telling us any- thing except what is very short and simple, we understand most easily if he gives us one step at a time. B. IN LATIN 393. In the first part of this book the Latin sentences were either Simple, as Caesar aciem spectat, Caesar looks at the battle line; or Compound, as Caesar aciem spectat et mflites laudat, Caesar looks at the battle line and praises the soldiers. You are now ready for the Complex sentence. 394. As in English, so in Latin, a Complex sentence contains one independent {principal) statement or clause and one or more dependent {subordinate) statements or clauses. In Latin as in English dependent statements are called subordinate clauses. Clauses have their own subjects and pred- icates, and may take the place of nouns (noun clauses), ad- jectives (adjectival clauses), or adverbs (adverbial clauses). 395. Examine these Complex sentences in Latin and note the underscored words which mark subordinate clauses. 1. Puerum ad flumen ducimus ut aquam spectet. (Pur- pose clause.) We lead the boy to the river that he may see the water. 2. Hostes tarn celeriter veniunt ut Romani fugiant. (Result clause.) The enemy come so quickly that the Romans flee. 158 THE SENTENCE. COMPLEX 3. Dum est vita spes est. (Time clause.) While there is life there is hope. Kinds of Dependent Clauses 396. The kinds of dependent clauses in Latin complex sentences are not difficult to identify, for they can be distinguished in two ways: (1) by the word which intro- duces them; (2) by the mood of their main verb. In dependent clauses the verb is usually a form not of the indicative but of the Subjunctive mood. The introductory words and the subjunctive mood combine to render the identification of most dependent clauses easy. Adverbial clauses in Latin are introduced as follows: Purpose clauses: ut, in order that, ne, in order that — not, lest. Venimus ut spectemus. We come to {that we may) look. Result clauses : ut, so that; ut non, so that — not. Caesar impetum tarn celeriter fecit ut hostes fugerent. Caesar made the attack so quickly that the enemy fled. Temporal clauses: postquam, after, cum, when, dum, while, until, priusquam, before, until. Dum est vita spes est. While there is life there is hope. Venimus priusquam hostes tela iacerent. We came be- fore the enemy could throw their weapons. Conditional clauses: si, if, nisi, if not. Brutus, si Caesarem caedat, regnum capiat. // Brutus should slay Caesar he would usurp the kingdom. Causal clauses: quod, because, cum, since. Proelium vidimus quod a Galba missi eramus. We saw the battle because we had been sent by Galba. 159 APPLIED LATIN Quae cum ita sint, consulem laudamus. Since these things are so, we praise the consul. Concessive clauses: quamquam, although, cum, al- though. Quamquam hanc fabulam audivit, tacebat. Although he heard this story, he was silent. Cum clamaret, avem non terruit. Though he shouted, he did not frighten the bird. Adjectival clauses in Latin are introduced by the relative pronoun, qui, quae, quod, who, which, that. Servus qui equum ducebat curiosissimus erat. The slave who was leading the horse was very inquisitive. Oppidum quod hostes tenebant facile cepimus. We easily captured the town which the enemy were holding. Noun clauses will be taken up in Paragraphs 763-800. Study the words which introduce dependent clauses so that you may be able to identify the clauses quickly. Let these introductory words be your signals. Quiz. — Name the kinds of dependent clauses in Latin. How can you tell them apart? Name the introductory words and the clause which should follow each one. XXXIV. THE VERB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. CLAUSES OF PURPOSE AND RESULT. SEQUENCE OF TENSES 397. In the earlier paragraphs of this book you met forms of the Indicative mood only because the Latin sentences were all statements of fact. For such sentences the Indica- tive (the mood of fact) is the proper mood in all languages. In Complex sentences the main statement of fact (principal clause) takes its verb in the Indicative and the dependent (weaker) clause takes its verb usually in the Subjunctive 160 THE VERB mood. Since the Subjunctive mood (Paragraph 78) lacks the firmness, frankness, and assurance of the Indicative, it is naturally used in most dependent (weaker) clauses.* THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 398. The Subjunctive mood has all the tenses of the Indicative except the future and future perfect. The endings of the Subjunctive in all four conjugations are similar , tense for tense. The endings of all present tenses (except in the first conjugation) are alike. All imperfect tenses have similar endings. When, then, you have learned the Subjunctive of one conjugation you have learned the Subjunctives of practically all conjugations, for the present subjunctive of the First conjugation alone presents difficulties. 399. LAUDO and HABEO— Active Voice— Subjunctive Mood Present Imperfect Present Imperfect Singular Singular 1. laudem laudarem habeam haberem 2. laudes laudares habeas haberes 3. laudet laudaret habeat haberet Plural Plural 1. laud emus laudarem us habeamus ha her emus 2. laudetis laudaretis habeatis haberetis 3. laudent laudarent habeant haberent 400. Learn the conjugation of the present and imperfect subjunctive of the English verb find in Paragraph 824. The Translation of the Subjunctive Mood 401. For the Latin forms which you have just learned we have added no English meanings, for the Latin Subjunc- tive, with a few exceptions, is translated into English * Occasionally the Subjunctive mood is used as the main verb in in- dependent statements. Compare paragraphs 522-535. " 161 APPLIED LATIN exactly like the Indicative. In the English verb find (Para- graph 824) you saw that the Subjunctive in English is made up of a main verb find, combined with the auxiliary verbs may, might, etc. The Subjunctive in English reg- ularly employs these auxiliary verbs, but in Latin they are used in the translation of purpose clauses and of one or two conditional clauses only. Unless specially directed to the contrary, translate the present subjunctive in Latin like the present indicative, the imperfect subjunctive like the imperfect indicative, etc. 402. Identify and translate these verb forms, using in translation the corresponding tenses of the indicative: 1. Amem, clamaret, habeas, tacerent, ornarem, hiceret. 2. Vocent, valeatis, portares, augeremus, crearent, spondeamus. 3. Spectes, maneat, superet, docerem, mtitetis, caveres. 4. Firmemus, deleam, erraretis, faveretis, daremus, studeant. 403. Practise the forms of present and imperfect tenses, using the verbs given in Paragraph 402. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF PURPOSE IN ENGLISH AND LATIN 404. A. Examine these English sentences: 1. I go to school that I may learn {to learn) to live nobly. 2. He swims powerfully that he may not be overwhelmed. 3. We worked hard that we might not be {not to be) defeated. The italicized words in these sentences compose adverbial purpose clauses. Purpose clauses call attention to some- thing which is aimed at or desired. No. 1 above is affirma- tive; Nos. 2 and 3 are negative. Notice in these English purpose clauses the auxiliary verbs may, might, etc. Con- 162 THE VERB struct some sentences containing Adverbial clauses of Pur- pose. Pick out some in your English reader. 405. B. Examine these Latin sentences: i. Puerum ad flumen ducimus ut aquam spectet. We lead the boy to the river that he may see (to see) the water. 2. Galba omnia parat ne hostes exercitum superent. Galba makes every preparation that tlie enemy may not defeat the army. 3. Caesar oppidum munivit ut hostes terreret. Caesar for- tified the town that he might terrify (to terrify) the enemy. 4. Legatus castra movit ne silvestrl in loco maneret. The lieutenant moved camp that he might not remain in a wooded place. The dependent clauses of these Latin sentences denote purpose. Nos. 1 and 3 are affirmative, shown by the particle ut; Nos. 2 and 4 are negative, shown by the particle ne. Note that the auxiliary verbs may and might are employed in translating Latin purpose clauses into English. 406. Rule. — Adverbial Clauses of Purpose. — Purpose clauses are introduced by ut, that (affirmative), and ne, that not (negative), and have their verbs in the present and imperfect subjunctive. 407. Learn the present and imperfect subjunctives active of the other regular conjugations in Paragraphs 827-8-9. These tenses are similar to those of habeo, Paragraph 399. Practise them, using the verbs given in Par. 200, 224, 253. 408. Translate these sentences containing Purpose clauses : 1. Exercitum maximum paramus ut orbem terrarum vin- camus. 2. Clves portas clauserunt ne hostes oppidum sine 163 APPLIED LATIN proelio caperent. 3. Hie servus ad consulem ductus est ut fabulam narraret. 4. Pontem gravioribus ancoris firmabam ne aquae fluminis eum frangerent. 5. Itaque feminae quo- que rosas portaverunt ut templum ornarent. 6. Servl diligentes in conspectu. Galbae militibus bene serviebant, ut se laudaret. 7. Omnes barbarl fossas altas fecerunt ne Caesar terram fertilem suam caperet. 8. Ne impetus aquarum navem frangat, nautae ancoram in mare iaciunt. 9. Et dux et legio eius fugerunt ne hostes totum exercitum delerent. 10. Novis rebus (a revolution) studemus ut im- peratores nostros caedamus. 409. Translate: 1. At Corinth the army fought coura- geously to capture the city. 2. We will bind the treacherous envoy that he may not escape. 3. Are you shouting so that the ravenous birds maybe afraid? 4. A wise general provides an ample supply of grain that his soldiers may be vic- torious. 5. The women brought light garments that they might cover the body of the illustrious commander. Quiz. — What is the nature of the subjunctive mood? What are the meanings of the tenses? Pick out some pur- pose clauses in Paragraph 392. How is purpose expressed? 410. absentia, -ae, absence, f . centurid, centurionis, a centurion, abundantia, -ae, plenty, f. military officer, m. ara, -ae, an altar, f. adventus, -us, arrival, coming, carrus, -I, a cart, m. m. aurum, -I, gold, n. acerbus, -a, -um, bitter. biduum, -1, two days, n. adversus, -a, -um, unfavorable. beneficium, -1, service, n. alienus, -a, -um, strange, foreign. arbor, arboris, a tree, f . amicus, -a, -um, friendly. arx, arcis, a citadel, f. angustus, -a, -um, narrow. augur, auguris, a prophet, m. acriter, sharply, keenly. altitudo, altitudinis, height, f . aliquando, some time, at length. arcus, -us, bow, arch, m. audacter, boldly. cliens, clientis, a retainer, m. adhuc, up to this time. canis, cams, a dog, m. and f. celeriter, swiftly, quickly. 164 THE VERB Study and learn these words. Practise the declensions of the nouns and adjectives. Compare the adverbs. 411. Word Study. — Give the meaning of the following derivatives. Use them in sentences. Add others. absence carryall altitude oriole abundant amity beneficial arc arboretum acerbity accelerate arch auspicious adverse client alienate advent benefice alias beneficent adventitious inaugurate benefit inaugural adversity celerity alien cart alienist canine acid car enmity amiable carriage Quiz. — Tell something about the augur, cliens, centurio. SEQUENCE OF TENSES IN ENGLISH AND LATIN 412. A. In a Complex sentence there are at least two parts: an independent statement or clause and a dependent statement or clause. A Complex sentence must then con- tain at least two verbs: one the main verb, the other the dependent verb. In well- written English Complex sentences care is always taken to have the tenses (time) of these two verbs related to each other in a way that produces sense; that is, the main verb is always followed by that tense of the dependent verb which, combined with it, will produce a sensible sentence. 413. Examine these English sentences: i. He entered because he had paid for his ticket. 2. We ran because a soldier followed us. 3. If we should see an accident we would not laugh. In each of these sentences the main verb is followed by a tense of the dependent verb which produces sense. Replace the verb had paid by pays, ran by run, would not laugh by 16S ' APPLIED LATIN laugh. The sentences now are meaningless. These new tenses of the dependent verbs do not produce sense, for when the main verb is in the present tense, the dependent verb should also be in a present tense; and when the main verb is in a past tense, the dependent verb should be in a past tense. This relation of the tenses in complex sentences is called Sequence of tenses (sequor, to follow). 414. In Latin also you must be very careful to see that the tenses of the main and the dependent verbs are properly related. In Latin as well as in English a main verb in present or future time is followed by a dependent verb in a tense that denotes the same time or time later than that of the main verb, and a main verb in past time by a tense that shows the same point in past time as the main verb or time more remote. Tenses that denote present or future time are called primary, those that denote past time, secondary. PRIMARY AND SECONDARY TENSES 415. In the Indicative mood (the mood of the main verb) the primary tenses are the present, future, and future perfect; the secondary tenses are the imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect. In the Subjunctive mood (the mood of the dependent verb) the primary tenses are the present and the perfect; the secondary tenses are the imperfect and the pluperfect. 416. Rule. — Sequence of Tenses. — When the main verb is present, future, or future perfect indicative, a dependent subjunctive must be put in the present tense if it shows con- tinued action at the same time or time later than that of the main verb, or in the perfect tense to express completed action. 166 THE VERB When the main verb is in the imperfect, perfect, or plu- perfect indicative, a dependent subjunctive must be put in the imperfect tense to express continued action in past or future time, or in the pluperfect tense to express completed action in past time. Diagram Present Future \ Indicative followed by Future Perfect J Imperfect ) f T , . Perfect Pluperfect £5 > Perfect \ Indicative followed by \ p^Werf f Subjunctive. 417. Examine the Latin sentences in Paragraph 408 which contain purpose clauses. All the dependent verbs in those sentences are in the present or the imperfect subjunc- tive. These dependent verbs illustrate the rule for the se- quence of tenses. As the idea of purpose can refer only to actions in future time, the present and the imperfect tenses of the subjunctive only can be used in purpose clauses. 418. Translate: 1. In the broad field were tall trees. 2. The soldiers of Caesar brought plenty of grain to the city that they might hinder the enemy for two days. 3. At length the envoy came to the citadel with the wagons. 4. There was an altar between the arch of victory and the bridge. 5. Who is running quickly to see the approach of the centurion? 6. That dog of yours is in the narrow road. 7. Strange dogs are not always friendly. 8. Up to this time the legion has not moved camp. 9. The king's retainers guarded the narrow place between the town and the forest. Quiz. — What is meant by the Sequence of Tenses? Name the primary and secondary tenses of the Indicative and 167 APPLIED LATIN Subjunctive. What do the tenses of the Subjunctive imply in dependent clauses? What special rule applies to adverbial clauses of purpose? 419. LAUDO and HABEO.— Passive Voice— Subjunctive Mood Present Imperfect Present Imperfect Singular Singular 1. lauder laudarer habear haberer 2. lauderis laudareris habearis habereris 3. laudetur laudaretur habeatur haberetur Plural Plural 1. laudemur laudaremur habeamur haberemur 2. laudemini laudaremini habeamini haberemini 3. laudentur laudarentur habeantur haberentur 420. Learn these forms. Practise the tenses, using the verbs in Paragraphs 294, 314. Note specially the present subjunctive passive of Laudo. 421. The Present and Imperfect tenses of the Third and Fourth Conjugations are similar to those of Habeo, rather than those of Laudo. Learn them in Paragraphs 827-8-9. Practise their forms, using the verbs given in Paragraphs 224, 3 2 9> 37°- 422. For rapidity in identification translate these forms: 1. Amer, clamaretur, superaretur, caveatur, ornarer. 2. Vocenter, habearis, portareris, augeremur, crearentur. 3. Specteris, spondeatur, muteminl, docerer, firmemur. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF RESULT IN ENGLISH AND LATIN 423. A. Examine the following English sentences: 1. He talks so fast that I cannot follow him. 2. His army was so large that the enemy fled. 3. The city was so well fortified that it escaped assault. In these sentences the italicized words compose clauses 168 THE VERB unlike the kind you have already considered. These clauses indicate result, not purpose. The dependent clause in No. i is negative; in Nos. 2 and 3, affirmative. You may feel a little uncertain at first about being able to distinguish between purpose and result clauses, but if you will remember that result clauses are regularly concerned with something which has taken place and purpose clauses with something which is desired to take place, your trouble will disappear. Further, in English complex sentences which contain result clauses the word so (compare the preceding sentences) usually acts as an indicator or signal of the approach of a result clause. Get into the habit of looking for this word so when you are asked to pick out result clauses. 424. Compose some English complex sentences contain- ing adverbial clauses either of purpose or of result. Review the conjugation of the Indicative mood of the verb to find in Paragraph 824. Ask your teacher to explain the meaning of the terms simple, progressive, and emphatic. 425. B. Examine these Latin sentences: 1. Tarn celeriter hostes veniunt ut Romani terreantur. The enemy come so quickly that the Romans are terrified. 2. Bellum tarn tenibile fuit ut totae nationes delerentur. The war was so terrible that whole nations were blotted out. 3. Flumen est tarn latum ut impetum barbarorum non timeamus. The river is so broad that we do not fear the attack of the barbarians. 4. Meus servus tarn accuratus erat ut non erraret . My slave was so careful that he did not make mistakes. 169 APPLIED LATIN The words in the Latin sentences that are underscored compose result clauses; the first two being affirmative, the last two negative. Note that the dependent verbs in these clauses are forms of the present and the imperfect tenses of the subjunctive mood. The introductory particles are ut, 'that, for affirmative result, and ut non, that not, for negative result. Ut and non are frequently separated by one or more words. 426. Just as there appears in English sentences the word so to call attention to the coming of result clauses, in Latin sentences also certain words meaning so (or the like) appear with equal effect. These words are : tam, ita, sic, so. tantus, -a, -um, so great, talis, tale, of such a kind. These words generally precede result clauses but never pur- pose clauses. Make use of them, especially when identifying affirmative purpose or affirmative result clauses. As the introductory particles preceding negative purpose and nega- tive result clauses are different (ne against ut non), negative clauses should not trouble you. 427. Rule. — Adverbial Clauses of Result. — Result is ex- pressed by the subjunctive, usually the present or the imperfect, introduced by the particles ut (affirmative) and ut non (nega- tive). These tenses of the subjunctive are used in accordance with the rule for the sequence of tenses. 428. aequo, loco, aequare, locare, aequavi, locavi, aequatus, locatus, to make equal, to place, locate. probo, privo, pugno, propero, turbo, probare, privare, pugnare, properare, turbare, probavi, privavi, piignavi, properavi, turbavi, probatus, privatus, pugnatus, properatus, turbatus, to prove, approve, to deprive, to fight, to hasten, to disturb. vasto, vastare, vastavi, vastatus, to lay waste, ravage. 170 THE ROMAN FORUM 429. Translate: i. Dux castra tam angusto in locoposuit ut mllites oppidum non viderent. 2. Centuriones virtu tern fortuna aequant ut Caesar vincat. 3. Servl mel tam bene mihi serviunt ut eos semper llberem. 4. Tam celeriter mllites ad provinciam properaverunt ut fines non vastaren- tur. 5. Clamor hostium tantus erat ut ad arcem fuge- remus. 6. Biduum in oppido mansimus ut legatl cum copiis suis vemrent. 7. Adhuc bellum tam terribile fuerat ut totae nationes delerentur. 8. Aurum auguri alieno datum est ut elves fa turn urbis audirent. 9. Manus-ne captlvl vincltis ut eum auro suo prlvetis? 10. Res mllitaris in absentia Caesaris sic turbata est, ut ab omnibus clvibus domum ex Africa vocaretur. 1. At length we saw the citadel and the high altar. 2. There were so many carts in the town that the roads were closed. 3. The immortal gods do not approve the gifts of men so evil that they have no friends. 4. Who hastened to the city to bury the body of his friend? 5. Lest the roses be broken by the heavy winds, the maidens covered them with light garments. Quiz. — What does the word result mean? Name one point of difference between the ideas of purpose and result. How can you distinguish between the particles which in- troduce purpose and result? The Roman Forum Let us take a little closer view of the Heart of Rome. The plan of the Forum shows only a number of black lines lying in a rather narrow enclosure. These lines mark the sites of buildings which were once the joy of all citizens of the 171 APPLIED LATIN Roman Republic. If you were to take a walk through the Forum to-day you would see a mass of ruins that would mean but little to you unless you were acquainted with the story that goes with each of the fallen structures. The impression you would gain would be one of disappointment at the ruins rather than of exaltation at their former grandeur. To-day, however, you would see a great deal more of the Forum than was visible in the Middle Ages, for in those days the dirt and the debris of the centuries following the fall of Rome in 476 A. D. covered the Heart of Rome. While Italy was under the control of foreign kings and Rome no longer the imperial city, the famous buildings of the Forum became the prey of men who used the marble to construct new buildings or burned it for the sake of the lime it con- tained. So, in those years many of the old buildings abso- lutely disappeared and of the others only a few walls and columns remained standing. The Roman of the Middle Ages walked across the Forum, caring little for the ruined buildings and fallen columns. His principal street followed the line of the Sacra Via. All sorts of traffic passed under the Arch of Severus. When interest began to be taken in this spot once more, the dirt of the centuries was removed. What was left of the ruins was carefully treasured and as far as possible was returned to its former condition. As you go through the Forum to-day these ruins appear on every side, and with difficulty can you imagine the grand buildings that once filled the area. Note. — See page 152, and illustration facing page 310. 172 THE VERB XXXV. THE VERB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. CLAUSES OF TIME. COMPOUND VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION 430. LAUDO and HABEO— Active Voice— Subjunctive Mood Perfect Pluperfect Perfect Pluperfect Singular Singular laudaverim laudavissem habuerim habuissem laudaveris laudavisses habueris habuisses laudaverit laudavisset habuerit habuisset Plural Plural laudaverimus laudavissemus habuerimus habuissemus laudaveritis laudavissetis habueritis habuissetis laudaverint laudavissent habuerint habuissent For the forms above no English meanings are added. Translate them as if they were forms of the indicative mood. 431. Learn also the same tenses of the other regular con- jugations in Paragraphs 827-8-9. Practise these tenses, using the verbs in Paragraphs 68, 114, 200, 224, 253. 432. For rapidity in identification name and translate the following forms of the subjunctive mood: vastaverint pugnaverit locavissem pugnavissemus cavisset favissent paruerimus auxerim probaverim prlvavisset turbavissent properaverimus ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME IN ENGLISH AND LATIN. TEMPORAL CLAUSES IN PAST TIME 433. A. Examine these English Complex sentences: 1. After the stranger arrived, the news spread abroad. 2. When the train stopped, we got off. 3. When the parade had passed by, the spectators went home. In these sentences the italicized words compose Temporal (time) clauses. You should have little difficulty in rec- ognizing temporal clauses because the words which intro- 173 APPLIED LATIN duce them clearly indicate time, as, when or after. The clauses above are all laid in past time; cf. dependent verbs. 434. Construct some English sentences containing Tem- poral clauses in past time. Notice what introductory par- ticles you use. Pick out the Temporal clauses in Par. 392. 435. B. Examine these Latin sentences: 1. Postquam exercitum vidimus imperatorem laudavimus. After we saw the army we praised the commander. 2. Cum Caesar Gallos superavisset Roman! provinciam multos annos habebant. When Caesar had overcome the Gauls the Romans held the province for many years. Each of these Latin complex sentences contains a tem- poral clause in past time. Such clauses are regularly intro- duced by the words postquam, after, and cum, when. Post- quam is followed by the indicative mood, usually in the per- fect tense. Cum is followed by the subjunctive mood in the imperfect or the pluperfect tenses. Notice that the action implied in the temporal clauses above is completed before the action of the main verb begins. 436. Rule. — Adverbial Clauses of Time (Past). — Tem- poral clauses in past time are introduced by the words post- quam, after, and cum, when. The perfect indicative usually follows postquam, the imperfect or the pluperfect subjunctive follows cum. 437. Translate: 1. Postquam carrus ad flumen tractus erat exsules aurum in navl posuerunt. 2. Cum Caesar Romae blduum mansisset copiae consulum venerunt. 3. Quis virginem laudabat cum rosas in agro lato peteret? 174 THE VERB 4. Iste filius, centurio,* bene pugnabat cum imperator suus videret. 5. Postquam arbor nobilis cecidisset, arcum victoriae struximus. 6. Postquam dux, Galba,* multos dies mansit ut legiones venlrent, sic territus est ut castra in locum adversum moveret. 7. Cum feminae, regis flliae, portam urbis peterent, omnes elves ad collem properaverunt. 8. Tarn clara vox consulis fuit ut per vias latas audiretur. 9. Captlvos dlligentius custodlmus ne fugiant. 10. Cum clientes venissent consul illustris calamitatem recentem narravit. *Note. — In Nos. 4, 6, and 7 are instances of Apposition. The nouns centurio and Galba refer to the same persons as the nouns filius and dux. Centurio and Galba are in the same cases as the nouns filius and dux and serve to explain them. Such nouns are said to be in apposition with the nouns they explain. 438. Rule. — Apposition. — A noun which explains or iden- tifies another noun and refers to the same person or thing is put in the same case with the noun it explains. 439. Translate: 1. When Caesar, the consul, had over- come the enemy the Romans built a huge arch of victory. 2. Did the slave guard the gold, after he had put it in the tree? 3. When we were looking at the sunset we did not perceive the approach of our friends. 4. Sailors were drag- ging the heavy anchor to the sea that they might throw it into the water. 5. We love horses so much that we never frighten them. Quiz. — What particles introduce temporal clauses in past time? Give several examples of apposition in English. 175 APPLIED LATIN 440. ala, -ae, a wing {of a bird) , f . avaritia, -ae, greed, f. adolescentia, -ae, youth, f. cibus, -i f food, m. biennium, -I, two years' time, n. bracchium, -I, an arm, n. castellum, -I, a redoubt, n. cohors, cohortis, a cohort, troop, f. comes, comitis, a companion, m., f. coniunx, coniugis, a consort, usu- ally a wife, i. consuetudo, consuetudinis, a cus- tom, f . commutatio, commutationis, a conditio, condicionis, a condi- tion, terms, f. cupiditas, cupiditatis, desire, f. ascensus, -us, an ascent, m. cantus, -us, a song, m. apertus, -a, -um, open. argenteus, -a, -um, of silver. aureus, -a, -um, of gold. beatus, -a, -um, blessed. cams, -a, -um, dear. laetus, -a, -um, happy. certe, certainly. circiter, about. continenter, continually. cotidie, daily. change, f. Study and learn these words. Practise the declension of the nouns and adjectives. Compare the adverbs. Word Study. — Explain the meaning of these English de- rivatives. Use them in sentences of your own. Add others. castle commuter biennial chant avarice incantation recant concomitant count cupidity conjugal comity cohort commutation ascendant charm castellated ascent cherish adolescence certain commutator cupid condition 441. LAUDO and HABEO.— Passive Voice— Subjunctive Mood Perfect — Singular i. laudatus (a, um) sim habitus (a, um) sim 2. laudatus (a, um) sis habitus (a, um) sis 3. laudatus (a, um) sit habitus (a, um) sit Perfect — Plural 1. laudati (ae, a) simus habiti (ae, a) simus 2. laudati (ae, a) sitis habiti (ae, a) sitis 3. laudati (ae, a) sint habiti (ae, a) sint Pluperfect — Singular 1. laudatus (a, um) essem habitus (a, um) essem 2. laudatus (a, um) esses habitus (a, um) esses 3. laudatus (a, um) esset habitus (a, um) esset Pluperfect — Plural 1. laudati (ae, a) essemus habiti (ae, a) essemus 2. laudati (ae, a) essetis habiti (ae, a) essetis 3. laudati (ae, a) essent habiti (ae, a) essent 176 THE VERB These tenses are formed by combining the perfect passive participles laudatus and habitus with two tenses of the sub- junctive of the verb sum. The perfect subjunctive of a regular verb contains the present tense of the subjunctive of sum: the pluperfect subjunctive contains the imperfect subjunctive of sum. You should find these two compound tenses as easy as were the compound tenses of the indicative (Paragraph 308). While you are learning these two tenses learn also the sepa- rate conjugation of these two tenses of sum (Paragraph 831). 442. The Perfect and Pluperfect subjunctives of the other regular conjugations are formed like the tenses given above. Learn them in Paragraphs 827-8-9. Practise these tenses, using the verbs in Paragraphs 68, 114, 200, 224, 257. For rapidity in identification name and translate: armatl slmus flrmatus sis mutata sit sepulti sint territl essetis doctae sltis impedltus esses datum sit monstratum esset audltum sit tractl essetis pletum sit ADVERBIAL CLAUSE OF TIME (CONTEMPORANEOUS) IN ENGLISH AND LATIN 443. A. Examine these English sentences: 1. While there is life there is hope. 2. Let us remain at peace as long as we can. The italicized words in these sentences mark temporal clauses. In each case the action of the dependent verb is contemporaneous with, that is, takes place at the same time as that of the main verb. 12 i 77 APPLIED LATIN 444. B. Examine these Latin sentences: i. Dum est vita spes est. While there is life there is hope. 2. Dum flumen altum erat in castris manebamus. While the river was high, we remained in camp. 3. Dum consules ducebant mflites fortes erant. While the consuls were leading, the soldiers were brave. In the sentences above the underscored words mark contemporaneous temporal clauses. The introductory word which regularly begins such temporal clauses is dum, while. There are two constructions with dum, and dum has a separate meaning for each construction. Dum means (1) as long as {all the time that), and connects two periods of time of equal length. Dum est vita spes est. As long as {all the time that) there is life there is hope Dum means (2) while, and indicates a space of time within which an action takes place, which action does not occupy the whole time indicated by the dependent verb. Dum milites in Gallia pugnabant Caesar Romam venit. While the soldiers were fighting in Gaul Caesar reached Rome. Note the difference between these two meanings and uses of the word dum. When dum means as long as, the dependent verb may be in any tense of the indicative, but when dum means while, its verb must stand in the present indicative. 445. Rule. — Contemporaneous Temporal Clauses. — A temporal clause introduced by dum, as long as, takes its verb in any tense of the indicative mood. Dum, while, indicating a space of time during which the action of the main verb takes place, has its verb in the present indicative only. 178 THE VERB 446. Translate: i. Dum cornu exercitus fugit Caesar cohortes suas in hostes mlsit. 2. Avaritia est cupiditas aurl. 3. Virl magna cum virtu te pugnant dum cibum bonum habent. 4. Dum apertis in campis erant, comites ducis auream arborem petebant. 5. Arbor autem in silva densa apud fontem stetit. 6. Dum virgines dels beatls serviebant semper in templo manebant. 7. Dum exercitus Romanus in Africa est, Caesar castella multa cepit. 8. Commuta- tionem fortunae non cupiebamus dum nostrae cohortes superabant. 9. Quae condiciones pads erunt? 10. Eandem consuetudinem biennium tenebas. 447. 1. In the silvery water of the fountain the maiden saw her face. 2. While youth remains, hope is continually fresh. 3. Certainly I will do the task. 4. While the lion was standing near the tree, the maiden fled into an open field. 5. What song do we hear daily? Quiz. — What is the meaning of the word contemporaneous ? Explain the difference between the two types of temporal clauses you have had. Explain castellum, cohors. What can you find out about the Roman army? ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME (FUTURE) IN ENGLISH AND LATIN In the preceding paragraphs you have met with complex sentences containing dependent clauses (temporal) both in past and in contemporaneous time. There is still a further class of temporal clauses, those referring to future time. 448. A. Examine these English sentences: 1. We waited until the parade appeared. 2. He remained at home until the messenger could return. 3. Before they could recover from flight, they were attacked by Caesar. 179 APPLIED LATIN In each of these sentences there is a temporal clause, the time of which is later than the time of the main verb. In the first sentence the action implied in the dependent verb actually takes place; in the second there is an expectation that the action will take place but the sentence does not state whether or not it did take place. In the third sentence the action of the dependent verb is anticipated or expected but it never actually takes place, being prevented or fore- stalled by the rapidity of Caesar's attack. 449. B. Examine these Latin sentences: i. Manebo dum me vocabis. / shall remain until you call me. 2. Manebis-ne dum te vocet? Will you wait until he calls you? 3. Oppidum munivi priusquam hostes venerunt. / fortified the town before the enemy came. 4. Legiones prius fugerunt quam Caesar auxilium mitteret. The legions fled before Caesar could send aid. 5. Impetum non fecit priusquam nuntius veniret. He did not make the attack until the messenger could come. In these Latin sentences the action of the dependent verb takes place or is expected to take place at a time later than that of the main verb. These temporal clauses, then, are laid in future time. In Nos. 1 and 3 the action actually takes place. This is shown by the use of the Indicative mood. In No. 2 there is an expectation that the action will take place but no assurance that it does; in Nos. 4 and 5 the action which is anticipated never takes place. In such sentences as 2, 4, and 5 the idea of expected action or anticipated action is shown by the Subjunctive mood. The introductory part- icles are dum, until, and priusquam, until or before. 180 THE VERB 450. Rule. — Temporal Clauses in Future Time. — Tem- poral clauses in which the action of the dependent verb takes place or is expected to take place at a time later than that of the main verb are introduced by the particles dum, until, and priusquam, until or before. When the action really takes place, the indicative mood is used; when the action is expected or antic- ipated (especially if we know that it was prevented from taking place) , the subjunctive is used, dum being followed by the present or the imperfect tenses, priusquam usually by tlie imperfect. In temporal sentences like those above the subjunctive is often translated with the English auxiliaries can and could. Priusquam may be separated into two parts; cf. sentence 4. 451. Translate: 1. Legatum non vocavl priusquam Caesar venit. 2. Centuriones ipsi sine imperii tore castellum ceperunt priusquam hostes auxilia mitterent. 3 . In templo aureo cotidie sedebimus dum nuntius nos vocabit. 4. Hostes pacem prius petlverunt quam oppida sua munirent. 5. Com- ites fortes regis se armaverunt priusquam ille eos in hostes duxit. 6. Canes celeres non manserunt dum leo venire t. 7. Milites captlvum in castello custodiunt dum exercitus hostium superabitur. 8. Cives portas oppidl non clauserunt priusquam adventum equorum audlverunt. 9. Proelium atrox finltum est priusquam dux auxilia vocaret. 10. Quis vir celeber leonem rapacem cecldit priusquam virginem parvam caperet. 1. I will remain there until you come. 2. You called the slave before he drove away the dog. 3. They fortified the town before they asked for liberty. 4. Who fled before the fire destroyed the house? 5 . That ship was broken by the winds before the anchor could be thrown into the water. 181 APPLIED LATIN Quiz. — How can you distinguish temporal clauses in future time from the other types of temporal clauses ? How may priusquam be otherwise written? COMPOUND VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION 452. In the acquisition of any language, whether ancient or modern, there are two things absolutely essential: an extensive vocabulary and rapidity in its use. Think how dull would be the study of English if your knowledge of English words were limited and you were constantly driven to the use of the English dictionary. Your progress would be so slow that all interest in your work would rapidly vanish. In the building of an extensive vocabulary there are two elements to be considered, the noun and the verb. Of these, the verb is the more important. It has been said that a student who has completely mastered a thousand verbs has already secured a working knowledge of a new language. This statement grows out of the fact that the meaning of a new noun may often be made out from the meaning of the words which surround it, especially from the meaning of the verb with which it is associated. In other words the con- text (surrounding words) often reveals the meaning of new nouns. The acquisition of great lists of nouns is consequently of less importance than the learning of many verbs. Though the learning of a large number of verbs is a serious task, there are ways by which the labor involved may be lightened. Many verbs are compounded of a simple verb and a prefix (preposition). The meaning of a compound 182 THE VERB verb will be easy for you to make out without consulting a dictionary if you know (i) the meaning of the simple verb and (2) the meaning of the prefix employed. In Paragraphs 30 and 40 you met with the most common prefixes used in the making of compound verbs. Review them carefully at this time. In the following pages there will be lists of compound verbs based on the simple verbs which you have learned. 453. Review the first conjugation verbs in Par. 68, 294. 454. Learn these compound verbs: The Clamo, Do, and Paro Groups clamo, clamare, clamavi, clamatus, to shout conclamo (1) * exclamo (1) reclamo (1) cry aloud shout out cry out against do, dare, dedi, datus, to give addo (3) abdo (3) condo (3) add hide put together, found (city) circumdo (1) dedo (3) perdo (3) surround surrender lose prodo (3) reddo (3) dond (1) betray give back present Note that dare changes to dere when the compound verb belongs to the third conjugation. Circumdare is an exception. paro, parare, paravi, paratus, to prepare comparo (1) praeparo (1) separo (1) provide, get ready get ready beforehand prepare apart, separate The prefix se found in separo means apart, aside. 455. Translate: 1. Cum urbs a mllitibus capta esset, omnes elves magno clamore conclamaverunt. 2. Exsules in densas silvas se abdiderunt ut poenas fugerent. 3. Magna in insula urbem condidit ne a copils pedestribus caperetur. 4. Hanc urbem fossa circumdedit. Itaque dux fortis num- * Note that the numeral following each verb indicates the conjugation to which the verb belongs. 183 APPLIED LATIN quam se dedidit. 5. Quae copiae nostras munltiones per- dunt? 6. Prodi ti sumus a legatls ipsls. 7. Caesar pecuniam cap tl vis reddebat . 8 . Frumentum co tidie paramus . 9 . Adhtic omnia comparata sunt. 10. Coniunxne tibi cibum dedit? Certe. n. Cum consul orationem habuisset, elves Iratl reclamaverunt. 12. Omnia mihi addita sunt. 456. Word Study. — Explain these derivatives. Use them in sentences of your own. claim compare apparel proclaim data clamor separate preparation reclamation preparedness reclaim donor apparatus render condition condiment donation perdition date declaim proclamation condone acclaim addition irreparable add repair surrender prepare disclaim 457. Select some English verb, as claim, and give as many compound derivatives of it as you can. Quiz. — What two things are essential in language study? Discuss some ways of learning vocabulary. 458. The Porto, Sto, and Voco Groups porto, portare, portavi, portatus, to carry comporto (1) deporto (1) exporto (1) bring together, collect carry of, lay waste carry away, export importo (1) reporto (1) transporto (1) carry in, import carry back carry over, transport sto, stare, steti, statum, to stand exsisto (3) consisto (3) desisto (3) stand forth take position, consist desist from, stop, cease resisto (3) statuo (3) constituo (3) resist set up, resolve establish, determine Instituo (3) restituo (3) exsto (1) establish, determine restore, reestablish stand out, appear voco, vocare, vocavi, vocatus, to call, summon advoco (1) avoco (1) convoco (1) call to, summon call away call together evoco (1) pro voco (1) revoco (1) call out, challenge challenge call back, recall 184 THE PRINCIPAL BUILDINGS IN THE ROMAN FORUM 459. Translate: i. In absentia Caesaris abundantia f rumen tl comportata erat. 2. Se suaque omnia in vlcina oppida deportabant. 3. Ex Britannia cibus importabatur. 4. Copiae hostium nuper in Galliam transportatae sunt. 5. Multos eorum duces convocavl ne auxilium adinimlcos mitterent. 6. Mllites ab opere ad castellum revocatl sunt. 7. Tarn celeriter hoc bello destitimus ut elves doml terrerentur. 8. Fratrem tuum in locum gratiae et honoris restituebamus. 9. Centuriones legionis impetum fecerunt ut hostibus resis- terent. 10. Multl virl fortes nominatim evocatl erant. 460. Word Study. — Explain these English words. Use them in sentences of your own. portable convoke institution portico existence resistance vocative extant advocate evoke restitution irrevocable porter exporter transportation obstacle consistence imports opportunity vocabulary vocation statute constant insist comport provocation porch persistence desist reporter stability superstition avocation constitution equivocal constable deportation revocation vowel distant The Principal Buildings in the Roman Forum As you look at the map you notice at the left the Tabu- larium, the building in which were kept the state records of the Republic. From this spot, which is rather high, a view of the whole Forum can be had. On the left across the Forum appear the Arch of Severus, the Rostra, the ruins of the Temple of Concord, the remains of the Forum, the Sacra Via, the huge arches of the Basilica Aemilia, the site of the temple erected to Julius Caesar, the Regia, and the site of the Temple of Vesta. On the right appear the columns which mark the Temple of Saturn, the ruins of the Basilica Iulia, and the site of the Temple of Castor. Beyond the limit 185 APPLIED LATIN of the map were the Arches of Constantine and Titus and the famous Colosseum. Here and there in the Forum were streets leading from the center to the outer parts of the city. Of these, the most famous was the Sacra Via, along which the triumphal processions of the Roman generals took their winding course to the Temple of Jupiter on the Capitoline Hill. Through the Forum ran the great sewer, Cloaca Max- ima, which drained the low lying valley of the Forum. You must not think that the Forum and its buildings were all constructed at one time. On the contrary, the Forum had a gradual development, buildings being added at various times. The early buildings were made of any material which could be easily" obtained; the later buildings were faced with marble, giving much splendor to the Forum. XXXVI. THE VERB. SUBJUNCTIVE OF SUM. CLAUSES OF CONDITION AND CAUSE. COMPOUND VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION 461. THE VERB SUM.— The Subjunctive Mood Singular Present Imperfect Perfect Pluperfect sim ess em fuerim fuissem sis esses fueris fuisses sit esset fuerit fuisset Plural simus essemus fuerimus fuissemus sitis essetis fueritis fuissetis sint essent fuerint fuissent Learn these four tenses. You have already met the first two in Paragraph 441. The perfect subjunctive of sum is the same as the future perfect indicative except in the first person singular. The pluperfect has the endings of the imperfect essem with change of e to i before s. 186 THE VERB The same caution is to be taken regarding the transla- tion of the different subjunctive forms of sum as of the sub- junctive forms of the regular verbs. Use as meanings of the subjunctive forms of sum the meanings of the corresponding tenses of the Indicative unless specially directed otherwise. 462. For rapidity of identification name and translate: i. Fueris, slmus, fuissent, essent, fuisses, sltis, fuerit. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES CONTAINING A CONDITION IN ENGLISH AND LATIN A. With the Indicative Mood 463. A. There are many occasions in speaking and writ- ing when we express an idea about which we have some doubt or which can be true only under certain conditions or circumstances. Sentences which contain statements whose truth is affected by some circumstance or other are called con- ditional sentences. Examine the following English sentences : i. If we are well we are happy. 2. If we were well we were happy. 3. If we shall be well we will be happy. The italicized words indicate the two parts of these sentences, one a statement of fact and the other a clause containing a condition or circumstance affecting the truth of the main statement. Each of these dependent clauses is introduced by the word if. Clauses so introduced are con- ditional clauses. The main statement in a sentence con- taining a conditional clause is called the conclusion. Remember, then, that all conditional sentences are made up of two parts, the condition and the conclusion. The con- ditional clause may appear either before or after the con- 187 APPLIED LATIN elusion. You will have no trouble in identifying a condi- tional clause if you will always look for the introductory word if or its negative if not or unless. 464. B. In Latin as well as in English there are many occasions for the use of conditional sentences. Look at the following examples: i. SI valemus laeti sumus. // we are well we are happy. 2 . SI valebamus laeti eramus. // we were well we were happy. 3. SI valebimus laeti erimus. If we shall be well we will be happy. In these sentences, which are Latin translations of the English sentences above, there are two parts, the condition (underscored) and the conclusion. Each of the sentences is named from the kind of condition which it contains. The first is called a Simple Present condition because the condition and conclusion are in present time {present indicative). The second is called a Simple Past condition because both its parts are in past time {imperfect indicative). The third is called a More Vivid Future condition because both its parts are in future time {future indicative). Most conditional sentences in Latin take their verbs in the indicative mood. You will have no difficulty with condi- tions which employ the indicative if you translate the tenses of the indicative accurately. 465. Rule. — Simple Conditions. — Simple conditions in Latin are introduced by the particle si, if {negative nisi, if not or unless). In both condition and conclusion the verbs are in the indicative mood. 188 THE VERB 466. euro, cremo. curare, cremare, curavi, curatus, to care for, provide for. to bum. impetro, impetrare, impetravi, impetratus, to gain a request. paco, pacare, pacavi, purgo, purgare, purgavi, iaceo, iacere, iacui, mereo, merere, merui, lated, latere, latui, deterreo, deterrere, deterrui, pendeo, pendere, pependi, pacatus, purgatus, » meritus, to pacify. to clean, purify. to lie, recline. to deserve, merit. to lie hidden. to frighten of. to hang, be suspended. Learn these verbs. 467. Translate: i. Arbores multas altasque cremamus ne leones in silvls densis lateant. 2. Augurne aurum dlli- genter ciiravit dum filia sua veniret? 3. Cum nuntius fabulam longam narravisset, a consule impetravit. 4. Nisi Caesar in Gallia pugnabit, ilia provincia omnis numquam pacabitur. 5. Si equus nunc in campo lato est, sub arbore iacet. 6. Multis beneficils honorem amplum merebat. 7. Si Galba laetus erat, consules Roman! quoque erant laetl. 8. Si post aedificium angusto in loco latebimus, comites nos ibi numquam petebunt. 9. Quis Romae reget si Caesar caesus erit? 10. Nisi ancora de navl ingentl pendebit, ventl vehementes navem movebunt. 468. 1 . If we shall shout we shall frighten the birds from the trees. 2. The horse was certainly in the field if the gate was shut. 3. I took care of the golden gift while the prophet was cleaning the altar. 4. What shall we deserve if you pacify the nation with our help? 5. When we shall have gained our request from Caesar, we will destroy the letter. 469. Word Study. — Explain these derivatives and use them in sentences of your own. curious curator procure purgative deter pacify sinecure demerit purge suspend independence meritorious 189 impend latent cremation curate pensive adjacent secure crematory APPLIED LATIN B. With the Subjunctive Mood 470. Beside simple conditions with the indicative there are some in Latin which make use of the subjunctive mood in both the condition and the conclusion. Study the follow- ing examples: i. Si valeamus laeti simus. // we should be well we would be happy. 2. Si valeremus laeti essemus. // we were well we would be happy. 3. Si valuissemus laeti fuissemus. // we had been well we would have been happy. These conditional sentences bear the following names: No. 1 is called a Less Vivid Future condition; No. 2 a Contrary to Fact condition in Present time; No. 3 a Con- trary to Fact condition in Past time. The Less Vivid Future condition is merely a weaker form of the Simple Future condition (cf. Paragraph 464) . Instead of using the auxiliary verbs shall and will in the condition and the conclusion, this condition uses the weaker forms should and would. Both verbs are in the present subjunctive. Contrary to Fact conditions contain statements which would be true under just the opposite (contrary) circum- stances to those given in the conditional clause. For ex- ample, "If we were now well, we would be happy," really means we are not now happy because we are not well. "If we had been well we would have been happy," really means we were not happy because we were not well. As you see by reversing the translation " we are not happy because we are not well," the time of the condition is really present, though 190 THE VERB the tense of the subjunctive used in Latin is imperfect. " We were not happy because we were not well" shows that the time of the condition is past though the tense of the subjunctive used in Latin is pluperfect. Consequently the conditions are called present and past contrary to fact. 471. Rule . — Conditions Requiring the Subjunctive Mood. — Less Vivid Future conditional sentences take the present sub- junctive in both condition and conclusion. Present Contrary to Fact conditional sentences take the imperfect subjunctive, and Past Contrary to Fact the pluperfect subjunctive in both the condition and the conclusion. 472. Translate: i. Si fortuna bona sit rex sim. 2. Nisi benefices magnls honorem mererem, hoc in loco nunc non essem. 3. Si frigus hiemis grave sit, ingentem Ignem curem. 4. Si copia friimentl comportata esset, milites cibum certe habuissent. 5. Omnis Gallia, facile celeriterque pacata esset si Caesar prlmo dux fuisset. 6. Hie servus ex manibus mels non fugisset nisi dormlvissem. 7. Hae rosae de ara antlqua semper pendebunt nisi ventl eos frangent. 8. Extra oppidum milites latebant dum ab hostibus pete- bantur. 9. Nisi ntibes densae fuissent, sol clare luxisset. 10. Portas cotldie claudemus dum auxilium a Caesare mittatur. 473. 1. If the ditch had been wide the horses would never have escaped. 2. The women would adorn the temple with roses if the day should be clear. 3. We will praise the general that he may be happy. 4. The task was so easy that we did it in two days. 5. If we were in Gaul we would now be leading our armies against the enemy. Quiz. — Describe the conditional sentences explained in these paragraphs. Make up a number of similar sentences. 191 APPLIED LATIN 474. culpa, -ae, a fault, f. existimatio, existimationis, opin- domina, -ae, a lady, mistress, f . ion, judgment, f . epistula, -ae, a letter, f. expl6rator,expl6ratoris,a.9C0w/,m. dolus, -I, a trick, stratagem, m. census, -us, a rating, census, m. concilium, -i, a council, n. circuitus, -us, circuit, m. caelum, -i, the sky, n. conatus, -us, an attempt, m. deditio, deditionis, surrender, f. confertus, -a, -um, crowded. deprecator, deprecatdris, inter- cotidianus, -a, -um, daily. cessor, m. cunctus, -a, -um, all together. dolor, doloris, grief, m. cupidus, -a, -um, desirous. dictator, dictatoris, a dicta- diligenter, diligently. tor, m. diu, a long time, long* eques, equitis, a knight, m. facile, easily. Study and learn these words. Practise the declension of all the nouns and adjectives. Compare the adverbs. 475. Word Study. — Give the meaning of the following derivatives. Use them in sentences. Add others. council conative census circuitous ceiling condolence facile domineer domesticate dominion diary equipage equestrian diligent deprecate esteem estimation difficult dolorous explorer censor cerulean culpable dominate circuit dictate dictatorial censure doleful reconcile ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF CAUSE IN ENGLISH AND LATIN 476. A. In the following English sentences the words italicized mark a clause expressing cause. i. I looked at the picture because you told me to. 2. Since you have come so early let us now take a walk in the garden. 3 . As the sun has already risen there is nothing to delay us. There are three words commonly used in English to in- troduce dependent clauses which express Cause. These are because (which contains the word cause itself), since, * Note. — Comparison diu, long, diutius, diutissime. 192 THE VERB and as. These words should aid you in picking out causal clauses. Read the main statements in the sentences above. Does not each one seem to demand an explanation? As you read you expect to find out why / looked at the picture and how it happens we can now walk in the garden and why nothing now delays us. When some explanation or reason seems to be demanded by the meaning of the main state- ment be on the lookout for a dependent clause of cause. 477. B. The same facts are true of Latin sentences con- taining causal clauses. Examine these sentences: i. Celeriter veni quod poenam timul. / came quickly because I feared the penalty. 2. Caesar, cum hostes eum terrerent castra movit. Since the enemy frightened Caesar, he moved his camp. The underscored words in these sentences compose causal clauses. In Latin as in English there are introductory words which serve to identify causal clauses. These are commonly quod, because, and cum, since. The dependent verb follow- ing quod is regularly in the indicative mood ; the dependent verb after cum, since, is in the subjunctive. In Latin as in English the main statement often seems to demand an explanation or reason before the sentence can be considered complete. To emphasize this demand and to get us ready for a causal clause the Latins often inserted in the main statement one of the following expressions : Hac de causa, for this reason, qua de causa, for this reason, quam ob rem, for this reason. Example: Hac de causa Caesar impetum fecit quod 13 193 APPLIED LATIN hostes dormiebant. Caesar made an attack {for this reason) because the enemy were asleep. 478. Rule. — Causal Clauses. — Dependent clauses express- ing cause are introduced by the particles quod, because, and cum, since. After the word quod the indicative mood is used; after cum, the subjunctive. When the verb is in the subjunctive, the tenses used follow the regular rule for Sequence. 479. Translate: i. Servi dominam non laudabant quod culpas multas habebat. 2. Hac de causa epistulam non scripsimus quod dolum avium scivimus. 3. Quod depre- cator vir nobilis fuit, Caesar oppidum non delevit. 4. Cum hi viri omnes libertatis cupidi essent, dictator! acriter re- sistebant. 5. Consul, cum pectiniam clvitati dedisset, ab omnibus civibus dhl amabatur. 480. 1. The horsemen led the captives about the town in a long circuit because they feared the attacks of the citizens. 2. We shall conquer easily because the gods will send us aid. 3. We made the ascent quickly because the scouts had shown us the way. 4. What is the judgment of the council? 5. The consuls made a census of the city in order that they might punish the evil citizens. Quiz. — Pick out some causal clauses in your English reader. Tell how you identify them in English and Latin. Compound Verbs of the Second Conjugation The Habeo, Maneo, and Moveo Groups 481. habeo, habere, habui, habitus, to have, hold adhibeo (2) prohibed (2) debeo (2) have at hand, apply, use restrain, prevent nottohave,owe,de-habeo praebeo (2) habito (1) debilito (1) have ready, furnish inhabit weaken, de-habil-ito prae-habed Note that in compound verbs habeo changes to -hibeo. 194 THE VERB maneo, manere, mansi, mansum, to remain permaned (2) remaned (2) to last through, remain remain moved, movere, mdvi, mdtus, to move amoved (2) commoved (2) emoved (2) move away, remove move thoroughly, disturb move out removed (2) prdmoved (2) move back, withdraw move forward Learn these compound verbs. 482. Translate: 1. Ne oppidum caperetur, elves dolos multos adhibuerunt. 2. Virl fortissiml illos equites ab an- gusta via* prohibebant. 3. Gloriam honoremque dictator! debemus quod copiam magnam cibl nobis dedit. 4. Con- sults censum clvium imperatorl praebuerunt ut virl mali de urbe pellerentur. 5. Exsules in Insula habitabant. 6. Con- atibus dollsque legatorum cohortes debilitatae sunt. 7. Caesar castra ex angusto loco* inter montes amovit. 8. Clamoribus captivorum hac de causa facile commotl sumus, quod ctincti pacem dlligenter petebant. 9. Aurum e carro* removl ut in aedificio ponerem. 10. Cum hostes mllites nostros ab oppido prohiberent, Caesar aciem promovit. 483.* In sentences 2, 7, 9, 10, are instances of the ablative with ab, de, or ex expressing the idea of removal or separation. This construction is common after verbs signifying removal or separation. 484. Rule. — The Ablative of Separation. — The ablative with ab, de, or ex is used with verbs signifying separation or removal to express separation. 485. Study these English derivatives. Use them in sen- tences of your own. debilitated permanent promotion inhabitant manse removal prohibition mobile prohibitive momentum commotion mob 195 habit motor remainder emotion manor remote remnant automobile APPLIED LATIN The Pleo, Sedeo, and Teneo Groups 486. pleo, plere, plevi, pletus, to fill compled (2) repled (2) suppled (2) fill completely fill up again fill up, supply sedeo, sedere, sedi, sessum, to sit, be settled circumseded (2) obsided (2) possided (2) sit around, surround sit against, besiege possess praesided (2) resided (2) superseded (2) preside over, watch over remain seated, remain refrain from Note that sedeo becomes -sided in many compounds. In some it appears as -sidd (assldo, sidere, sedi, — ) and these verbs belong to the third conjugation. tened, tenere, tenui (tentus), to hold abstined (2) contined (2) distined (2) abstain from contain, limit, bound hold apart obtined (2) pertined (2) retined (2) hold, obtain pertain, have to do with hold back, retain sustined (2) temptd (1) hold up, sustain try, attempt * Note that tened becomes -tined in most compounds. Learn these compound verbs. 487. Translate: 1. Carros frumento complevi ut multi- tude civium cibum haberet. 2. Tarn multi equites vias ob- sederunt ut legiones nostras ab oppido prohiberent. 3. Galba magnam partem provinciae possidebat. 4. LegatI quod copias hostium in montibus vlderunt proelio abstinuerunt. 5. Fossa aqua completa est ne equites Roman! impetum facerent. 6. Pars magna Galliae fluminibus latissimis mon- tibusque altioribus continetur. 7. Nostri fines ad montes pertinent et ad occasum sob's spectant. 8. Caesar Galbam, socium suum, in concilio retinuit. 9. Diu impetus bar- barorum maxima cum virtute sustinebantur. 10. Quod vias per provinciam exploratores non sciverunt, hostes forttinam belli non temptaverunt. 196 THE USES OF THE BUILDINGS IN THE FORUM 488. Study these English derivatives. Use them in sen- tences of your own. complete replete pertain residuary continence sustain detain implement supersede attempt entertainment retention obsession continent supply assessor resident insidious impertinent contention retentive expletive obtain continuance session abstain reside • temptation assizes president complement besiege possessor supplement subside The Uses of the Buildings in the Forum Now that you have become acquainted with the names of the chief buildings, you should learn something about their uses. As was said, the Tabularium contained the records of the Republic and later of the Empire. The Arch of Severus was erected to recall the glories of the family of Severus which gave to the Empire two important em- perors. The Rostra was the platform from which many of the great Roman orators delivered speeches to the Roman people assembled in the open space before it. As there were no newspapers like ours at Rome, if the ordinary citizen wished to know what was going on, he hurried down to the Forum and there listened to speeches from the Rostra and discussed the news with his fellow-citizens. Before the Roman Senate voted on important policies of the govern- ment, some leading member of the administration often addressed the people from the Rostra. Thus the citizens were early informed of the debates which were to follow inside the senate house. The two Basilicas (Aemilia and Iulia) were the centers of the law courts. In them the legal magistrates of the city used to hold court, and the decisions 197 APPLIED LATIN handed down were not only important at that time, but exist today embedded in the laws of many modern nations. Because these speeches were delivered in the Forum they were called forensics, a term still employed. XXXVII. THE SENTENCE. COMPLEX. CLAUSES OF CONCESSION. TYPES OF RELATIVE CLAUSES. COM- POUND VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF CONCESSION IN ENGLISH AND LATIN 489. In the following English sentences there are ex- amples of Concessive or Adversative Clauses. As you read over each sentence, notice that the idea contained in the italicized clauses contradicts or opposes that contained in the main statement. If the clause is true, the main state- ment must be false. If the main statement is true, how can the facts in the dependent clause be set aside? In such sentences the adverse facts of the dependent clause are passed over (conceded) . The main statement is considered true, with certain concessions. i. Although the day was cloudy, still we went on a picnic. 2. The dog is faithful, although his master abuses him. In the first sentence you would expect to remain at home on cloudy days and you certainly would not go on a picnic. In the second you hardly expect a dog whose master abuses him to be faithful. These adverse or contrary facts must be conceded before the main statements are true. In English, Concessive clauses are shown by the use of the introductory words although or though. Often, the 198 THE SENTENCE. COMPLEX words still or nevertheless are found in the main statement, when the sentence contains a concessive clause. 490. These Latin sentences contain concessive clauses: i. Quamquam puer saepe clamavit tamen agricolae non venerunt. Although the boy often cried out, the farmers did not come. 2. Cum multa tela iaceret, avem non terruit. Though he threw many missiles, he did not frighten tlie bird. 3. Cum opus longum sit tamen epistulam scribam. Though the task is a long one, nevertheless I will write the letter. As you read these sentences you note that each one con- tains a clause, which is opposed to the main statement. You expect the farmers to come; one stone usually frightens a bird; long tasks are often left undone. Such clauses must be conceded (concessive). They are introduced in Latin by the words quamquam, although, and cum, although. The indicative mood (usually the perfect tense) follows quamquam, the subjunctive (tense according to the se- quence of tense rule) follows cum. Tamen, nevertheless, often appears in the main statement. 491. Rule. — Concession. — Concession is expressed in Latin by the indicative (usually the perfect tense) introduced by quamquam or the subjunctive (tense according to the regular rule for sequence) introduced by cum. 492. Translate: 1. Quamquam puerl omnes conclama- verunt aves non territl sunt. 2. Servum non punlvimus cum doll eius pessiml fuissent. 3. Cum nubes densae in caelo 199 APPLIED LATIN essent, sol tamen lucebat. 4. Caesar provinciam Galliae superavit cum ill! virl acerrime pugnavissent. 5. Quamquam carmina laudavistis tamen poetae aurum non dedistis. 6. Cum urbs bene munlta esset, Galba earn maximo impetu cepit. 7. Quamquam milites pacem post deditionem peti- verunt, tamen non impetraverunt. 8. Cum canes pro porta iacerent femina cibum non iacuit. 9. Nautae non commoti sunt cum mare ventis continenter cresceret. 10. Quamquam servus saepe clamavit equus domum ex agro non venit. 493. 1. We did not emigrate from the province though fertile fields were shown to us. 2. Though we served our commander well he never praised us. 3. The runaway slave was caught though he had fled into the mountains. 4. Desire for gold does not now overcome the scout though in youth he indulged this fault. 5. When he had related the terms of peace the Romans sent him to Caesar. Quiz. — What English words are used to introduce clauses of concession, cause, time, purpose, result? 494. figura, -ae, a figure, shape, f. gubernator,gubernat6ris,«^/o/,m. gemma, -ae, a gem, f . exitus, -us, a, going out, end, m. incola, -ae, an inhabitant, m. consensus, -us, consent, m. dominus, -i, a master, m. dexter, dextra, dextrum, right. collum, -1, the neck, n. fegregius, -a, -urn, remarkable. exemplum, -1, example, n. f erax, f eracis, fertile. facultas, facultatis, capacity, f. finitimus, -a, -urn, neighboring. f ortitudo, fortitudinis, bravery, f . f eliciter, happily, fortunately. flos, floris, a flower, m. fere, almost, nearly. furor, furoris, rage, m. forte, perhaps. foedus, foederis, a treaty, n. fortiter, bravely. f ormido, f ormidinis, fear, f . frustra, in vain. Study and learn these words. Practise the declensions of the nouns and adjectives. Compare the adverbs. 200 THE SENTENCE. COMPLEX 495. Word Study. — Give the meaning of the following English derivatives. Use them in sentences. Add others. faculty figured gem collar-bone infuriated federal governor inflorescence ambidextrous formidable configuration egregious florist frustrate furore exemplary consensus government dexterous florid flourish floral exit fortitude confederacy TYPES OF RELATIVE CLAUSES 496. Up to the present time in the treatment of the Complex sentence you have been dealing only with subor- dinate clauses which have modified the main verb (adverbial clauses). There are, however, complex sentences in which the subordinate clause is not adverbial (does not modify the main verb) but is adjectival (modifies some noun in the main sentence). Such clauses are called adjectival clauses. They are introduced by the Relative pronoun who, which, that. This relative pronoun serves to connect or relate the clause which it introduces with some noun in the main sen- tence. This noun is called the antecedent of the clause. Relative Clauses in English and Latin 497. A. Examine these English sentences: i. The man who wore the black hat was the President. 2. We respect the boy who is honest. 3. Caesar sent soldiers who were to cross the bridge. 4. There are some men who think that all they hear is true. In these sentences the italicized words compose relative clauses, introduced by the relative pronoun who, which, and that. This pronoun resembles other pronouns in that it stands for a noun; it differs slightly in that usually it im- mediately follows its antecedent. 201 APPLIED LATIN The relative pronoun in English is thus declined: Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter — Singular and Plural Nominative, who. Genitive, whose. Accusative, whom. The relative clauses in the English sentences above are not all of the same kind. In sentences i and 2 they merely take the places of adjectives (adjectival relative clauses). They add bits of description to their antecedents which could have been done by the use of a single adjective, if there had existed in the language an adjective which meant what the entire clause means. No. 3 not only describes, but also adds an idea of purpose to the antecedent (relative clause of purpose) ; No. 4 expresses a trait or characteristic of the antecedent (relative clause of characteristic). Construct some English sentences containing relative clauses. In your reader pick out some relative clauses. 498. B. Examine these Latin sentences: 1. Servus qui equum ducebat erat curiosissimus. The slave who was leading the horse was very inquisitive. 2. Caesar oppidum quod hostes tenebant facile cepit. Caesar easily took the town which the enemy were holding. Complex sentences containing relative clauses are very frequent in Latin. As in English, such clauses may (1) simply modify their antecedent as adjectives or may (2) add an idea of purpose or characteristic. These two types of rela- tive clauses can be readily distinguished in Latin by the mood of their verbs. Simple adjectival clauses regularly take the indicative mood; the other adjectival clauses take the subjunctive mood. 499. Learn the declension of the relative pronoun qui, quae, quod, who, which, that. 202 THE SENTENCE. COMPLEX Singular M. F. N. Norn ■ qui, quae, quod, who. Gen. cuius, cuius, cuius, whose. Dat. cui, cui, cui, to or for whom. Ace. quem, quam, quod, whom. Voc. > > > . Abl. qud, qua, quo, Plural with, etc., whom. M. F. N. Norn, qui, quae, quae, who. Gen. quorum, quarum, , quorum, whose. Dat. quibus, quibus, quibus, to or for whom. Ace. Voc. Abl. quos, quas, quae, whom. quibus, quibus, > quibus, with, etc., whom. 500. While considering relative clauses we must take up the agreement of the relative with its antecedent. In sentence i the relative qui s masculine singular to agree (as adjective) with its antecedent serous. It is nominative not because serous is nominative, but because qui is the sub- ject of the clause (qui : . . ducebat) in which it (qui) stands. In sentence 2 quod is neuter singular in agreement with its antecedent oppidum. It is accusative in case because it is the direct object of the verb tenebant, the verb of the clause (quod . . . tenebant) in which the quod stands. 501. Rule. — Simple Adjectival Relative Clauses. — Relative clauses which simply add facts of description to their antecedents are introduced by the relative pronoun qui, quae, quod, and take their verbs in the indicative mood. 502. Rule.— Agreement of the Relative Pronoun. — The relative pronoun must agree with its antecedent in gender and number. Its case depends upon its use in its own clause. 203 APPLIED LATIN 503. cerno, cernere, crevi, cretus, to discern, distinguish. colo, colere, colui, cultus, to till, cherish, dwell in. divido, dividere, divisi, divisus, to separate, divide. fundo, fundere, fudi, fusus, to pour forth. gerd, gerere, gessi, gestus, to bear, carry on, wage. prendo, prendere, prehendi, prehensus t to seize, grasp. ruo, ruere, rui, rutus, to fall down, tumble down. stemo, sternere, stravi, stratus, to strew, spread out. tollo, tollere, sustuli, sublatus, to lift up, remove. tribuo, tribuere, tribui, tributus, to assign, allot. relinquo, relinquere, reliqui, relictus, to leave, abandon. disco, discere, didici, , to learn. Learn these verbs. 504. Translate: i. Milites qui bellum gerebant exem- plum egregium fortittidinis praebebant. 2. Num rosas pro porta templl illlus del qui auxilium urbi misit frustra stra- vimus? 3. Virgo quae ex furore leonis fugerat dextram meam prendebat. 4. Venti gubernatorem qui caelum spectabat in mare iecerunt. 5. Quis for titer sed frustra piignabat? 6. Agricola agros feraces, flores, et flumen finitimum amat et colet. 7. Sine consensu sociorum num- quam petivi condiciones pacis quae me a patria dlviserunt. 8. Forte incolae gemmas sub arbore alta abdiderunt. 9. Venti veloces domum quam incolae in insula struxerant fere straverunt. 10. Vinum, quod servi in aedificio condiderant, in flumen dominus fudit. 505. 1. The outcome of the battle took away all hope of surrender. 2. The tree which recently fell broke the dog's neck. 3. In youth we learned many poems which related the fate of our city. 4. By means of a treaty we made peace with the Romans. 5. Fortunately we saw the general who had completed the war. 506. Word Study. — Explain these English derivatives. Use them in sentences of your own. 204 THE SENTENCE. COMPLEX discern decree inculcate derelict ruin reprehend relic effusion street relinquish discreet profuse confusion prostrate colony retribution tributary disciple tribute cult dividend prize comprehend prison delinquent foundry apprehend secretary fund consternation gesture stratum diffuse division discipline Quiz. — What are the types of relative clauses in English? What is meant by the agreement of the relative? 507. ianua, -ae, a door, f. Insania, -ae, madness, f. iustitia, -ae, justice, f . humus, -I, the ground, m* ferrum, -i, iron, n. hospitium, -i, hospitality, n. heres, heredis, an heir, m. iudex, iudicis, a judge, m. iter, itineris, a journey, n. interpres, interpretis, an inter- preter, n. lac, lactis, milk, n. nemo, nemini, no one, m.f lapis, lapidis, a stone, m. consulates, -us, the consulship, m. conventus, -us, a meeting, m. frigidus, -a, -um, cold. impudens, impudentis, shameless. incredibilis, incredibile, unbeliev- able. inermis, inerme, weaponless. infer us, -a, -um, low.% graviter, heavily. hodie, to-day. interdum, meanwhile. item, likewise. Study and learn these words. Practise the declension of the nouns and adjectives. Compare the adverbs. 508. Word Study. — Explain the meaning of the following derivatives. Use these derivatives in sentences. Add others. hospitable host hotel lapis lazuli sane justiciary lapidary humidity exhume humiliate insanity consulate inheritance heredity inhumation frigidity itinerant janitor judiciary humble humor item impudent refrigerator itinerary lactic convention dilapidated credulous gravity judge itemize interpret inferior gravitate *Note: Locative of humus, humi, on the ground. fNote: Nemo usually lacks the genitive and ablative singular. For them nullius and nullo are used. J Note: Comparison of inferus: inferus, inferior, infimus, or imus. 205 APPLIED LATIN RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE AND CHARACTERISTIC 509. Examine these Latin sentences: i . Caesar milites qui pontem frangerent ad flumen misit. Caesar sent soldiers who should (to) break down the bridge. 2. Non idoneus erit qui ad illud oppidum mittatur. He will not be the proper man (who should be sent) to send to that walled town. These two sentences illustrate types of relative clauses which take their verbs in the subjunctive mood. No. i con- tains a clause of purpose; No. 2, a clause of characteristic. Of these the relative clause of purpose is more common. Relative clauses of purpose are the same in form as the ordinary clauses of purpose except that the relative pronoun is used in place of the introductory particle ut. The tenses of the subjunctive employed are the present after primary tenses, the imperfect after secondary tenses. 510. Rule. — Relative Purpose Clauses. — Relative clauses of purpose are introduced by the relative pronoun qui, quae, quod, who, which, that, and take their verbs in the present and the imperfect subjunctive, according to the rule for sequence in purpose clauses. The negative is non. 511. A relative clause of characteristic is used in Latin to call attention to some trait or characteristic of its ante- cedent. The second sentence above illustrates such a clause. Ordinarily clauses of characteristic follow these words: dignus, -a, -urn, worthy. sunt qui, there are those who. indignus, -a, -urn, unworthy. nemo est qui, there is no one who. idoneus, -a, -um, suitable, proper, quis est qui, who is there who? solus, -a, -um, alone, only. unus (solus) est qui, he is the only one who. 206 THE SENTENCE. COMPLEX When these words precede a relative clause you may be sure that the clause is one of characteristic. The verb in such a clause will be in the subjunctive mood and the tense will follow the regular rule for the sequence of tenses. 512. Rule. — Relative Clauses of Characteristic. — Rela- tive clauses of characteristic are introduced by the relative pro- noun qui, quae, quod, who, which, that, and take their verbs in the subjunctive mood according to the rule for sequence. 513. Translate: i. Interdum servl qui aedificia nova struerent a domino rurl relictl sunt. 2. Socil inermes non idonel sunt qui duel fortl tribuantur. 3. Quis est qui pecuniam magnam non amet? 4. Hominem quaeslvimus qui viam Inferiorem monstraret. 5. Sunt qui consulatum propter iustitiam mereant. 6. Item legiones quae a pro- vincia hostes deterrerent hodie missae sunt. 7. Illeindlgnus erat qui impetraret. 8. Quis fabulam incredibilem in conventii narravit? 9. Nemo est qui vel lac frlgidum vel aquam fontis frlgidl aestate non laudet. 10. Mllites qui in provinciam iter fecerunt lapides huml vlderunt. 514. 1. Today we are seeking the hospitality of the judge. 2. This heir is the only one who gives money to his friends. 3. Who is there who would carry on a war in vain? 4. We drove away the men who were to make the attack. 5. I will give my iron and gold to no one. Quiz. — How can you tell the difference between ordinary relative clauses and those of purpose and characteristic? Pick out some examples of each kind in your English reader. 207 APPLIED LATIN Compound Verbs of the Third Conjugation 515. The Ago, Cado, and Claudo Groups ago, agere, egi, actus, to set in motion, drive cogo (3) exigo (3) redigo (3) drive together, force, drive out, exact (taxes) drive back, reduce collect (con-ago) transigo (3) agito (1) drive through, accomplish move, pursue Note that ago becomes -igo in most compounds. cado, cadere, cecidi, , to fall accido (3) concido (3) excidd (3) fall, to happen fall down, collapse fall out Note that cado becomes -cido (i short) in compounds. The perfect is -cidi, not cecidi, in compounds; as accido, accidere, accidi, . Excido has a fourth part, excasum. claudo, claudere, clausi, clausus, to shut, close concludo (3) excludo (3) includo (3) shut around, surround shut out, exclude shut in, confine intercludo praecludo (3) shut of, cut of shut of Note that claudo becomes -cludo in compounds. 516. Translate: 1. Socil Romanorum naves coegerunt. 2. Eodem fere tempore quamquam aestas exacta est Caesar bellum cum hostibus gessit. 3. Dux illustris copias nostras in castra redegit. 4. Haec omnia transacta sunt dum Galba in Gallia est. 5. Tela quae ex inferiore loco iacta sunt graviter acciderunt. 6. Cum impetus fluminis maximus esset pons necessario concidit. 7. AnnI tempore nostrae naves ab aperto marl excludebantur. 8. Exercitus re frumentaria interclusus est, quod consules barbaros flumine quo portabatur non prohibuerunt. 9. Exploratores leones ex silva agitabant. 10. Quae legio idonea est quae interpretes et legatos habeat? 208 THE SENTENCE. COMPLEX 517. Study these derivatives. Use them in sentences. agitate exact transact seclude accident actor clause counteract conclusion casual exclusion enact redactor cogent decadent include conclusive recluse occasional actual deciduous cloister incident exigency preclude 518. The Cedo, Emo, and Fluo Groups cedo, cedere, cessi, cessus, to make a motion concedo (3) decedo (3) excedo (3) retire, yield go away, depart move out, go forth intercedo (3) praecedo (3) recedo (3) go between, intervene go before, surpass go back, recede succedo (3) antecedo (3) discedo (3) go up, approach, succeed go forward, surpass go away, depart procedo (3) go forward, advance emo, emere, emi, emptus, to take, buy adimo (3) eximo (3) interimo (3) take away take away, remove kill redimo (3) sumo (3) consiimo (3) buy back, ransom take on (sub-emo) use up, consume fluo, fluere, fluxi, fluctum, to flow confluo (3) influo (3) profluo (3) flow together flow into flow forth, arise 519. Translate: 1. Caesar, cum proelium male fecisset ab urbe concessit. 2. Tanta militum virtus fuit ut de vallo decederet nemo. 3. Qua de causa Roman! Gallos quoque virtute* praecedunt. 4. Incolae earum regionum omnes Britannos scientia* et cultu* et humanitate* antecedebant. 5. Cum clades atrox fuisset omnis spes victoriae adempta est. 6. Dux audax gratiam et amicitiam militum omnium pecu- nia redemit. 7. Quis consul copias hostlum trans flumen egit cum omnia eorum tela consiimpta essent? 8. Aquae huius fontis in flumen latum Influunt. 9. Hoc flumen pro- fluit ex illo monte altissimo qui in flnibus sociorum est. 10. Haec flumina pro castello confluebant. J 4 209 APPLIED LATIN 520.* In sentences 3 (virtute) and 4 (scientia, cultu, hu- manitate) are four instances of the ablative used to point out exactly or specify the respect in which the action of the main verb is true. This ablative is called the Ablative of Specification. It never takes an introductory preposition. 521. Rule . — Ablative of Specification. — The ablative with- out a preposition is used to express that in respect to which anything is true or is done. 522. Study these derivatives. Use them in sentences. antecedent fluctuate concession influential sumptuous accession recessional consumption . redeem presumptive ancestor precedent precede peremptory incessant successor confluence predecessor reflux processional recede affluent cession fluency superfluous intercede assume coempt exemption exceed The Religion of Rome In the Forum and its vicinity were the centers of the Religious Life of the Romans. The chief temples were situ- ated on the top of the Capitoline Hill. There were the Tem- ples of Jupiter, Juno, and Minerva. In the Forum were the Temples of Saturn, which contained the Bank of the Roman Government, of Castor, of Julius Caesar, and of Vesta. The Temple of Vesta was the most important and the oldest. It was indeed the center of the religion connected with the Home. Just as every house had its particular shrine to the god who watched over its inhabitants and near it the sacred fire, so there was a similar shrine to the divinity who watched over the whole city. This divinity was the goddess Vesta. Her temple was a circular structure which is thought to have reproduced the form (circular) of the early Roman 210 THE VERB house. In this temple labored the twelve Vestal Virgins, whose business it was to keep alive the sacred fire and to attend to the service of Vesta. Near by was the Regia, the home of the Pontifex Maximus, who superin- tended the entire religious life of the citizens. He occupied a place closely resembling the office of the Pope of the Roman Church. There were a number of Colleges, so called, bands of priests who attended to certain clearly defined duties in connection with religion and assisted the Pontifex Maximus. The twelve great Gods of the Romans were Jupiter, father of gods and king of men; Juno, wife of Jupiter and queen of Heaven ; Minerva, goddess of wisdom ; Apollo, god of music, prophecy, the sun, trade; Diana, sister of Apollo, goddess of the hunt; Mars, god of war; Venus, goddess of beauty; Vulcan, god of fire, the arts of the gold- smiths, blacksmiths, etc.; Mercury, messenger of the gods; Vesta, goddess of the hearth and of the family; Ceres, goddess of the harvests and crops ; Neptune, god of the sea. XXXVIII. THE VERB. SUBJUNCTIVE IN EXHORTA- TIONS AND WISHES. THE IMPERATIVE. COM- MANDS AND PROHIBITIONS 523. In your study of the Subjunctive mood you have so far examined its use only in dependent statements or clauses. Being a mood suited to weaker statements, it is most frequently found in subordinate clauses. Still there are some independent statements in which the subjunctive mood is employed. Such sentences are not frank expres- sions of fact, but statements about whose outcome the 211 APPLIED LATIN speaker is uncertain. Independent sentences of this kind comprise Exhortations and Wishes. Exhortations and Wishes 524. A. Examine these English sentences: i. Let us attack the town with courage. 2. Let them not praise the decision of the senate. 3. May you be happy. 4. Would that I were now in Paris. 5. Would that the Great War had never begun. Of these sentences, Nos. 1 and 2 are Exhortations; Nos. 3, 4, and 5, Wishes. The mood employed in each is the subjunctive. Though each makes an independent statement, there lurks about these sentences a feeling of uncertainty. In No. 1 we realize that there is some doubt about the attack being made courageously; in No. 3 we have no assurance that happiness will follow the wish; in Nos. 4 and 5 there is a wish for a change which can never take place. Construct some English Wishes and Exhortations. 525. B. Exhortations and Wishes take the subjunctive mood in Latin also. Examine these sentences; Exhortations 1. Oppidum cum virtute oppugnemus. Let us attack the town with courage. 2. Ne senatum laudent. Let them not praise the senate. Both of these sentences are exhortations. The present tense of the subjunctive is used and the negative is ne. Only the first and third persons singular or plural of the present tense are used. Ordinarily exhortations occur only in the first person plural. 212 THE VERB 526. Rule. — Exhortation. — The first and third persons singular and plural {usually the first person plural) of the present subjunctive are employed to express an exhortation. The negative is ne. 527. Translate: i. Gubernator navem diligenter ciiret ne marl superetur. 2. Ne dominus servum qui bene serviit hodie puniat. 3. Colamus semper llbertatem humanitatemque et nostrl finitiml nos laudabunt. 4. Ne omnes cupidi aurl sint. 5. Cum calami tates veniant virtu tern flrmam fortitu- dinemque retineamus. 6. Clientes laetl beneficia Caesaris semper laudent. 7. Adversls in rebus audax sim. 8. Altitti- dine montis ne terreamur. Ascensus facilis est. 9. Acerbum vlnum aqua bona misceamus. 10. Leones cum furore saeviant. 528. 1. Let the maidens adorn the walls of the temple with roses. 2. If the general has made a mistake let him move his camp. 3. Let us carry on the war courageously. 4. May the winds quickly drive away the clouds. 5. Let the nations of the world seek peace with honor. Quiz. — When may the subjunctive mood be used in independent statements? 529. Study and learn these words. Practise the declen- sion of the nouns and adjectives. industria, -ae, industry, f. mensis, mensis, a month, m. luna, -ae, the moon, f. iuvenis, -is, a young man, m. nota, -ae, a spot, mark, f. mercator, mercatoris, a mer- medicina, -ae, remedy, f. chant, m. medicus, -i, a doctor, m. cultus, -us, civilization, m. Institutum, -1, a custom, n. equitatus, -us, cavalry, m. intervallum, -i, an interval, n. iniquus, -a, -um, unequal, unfair. iudicium, -I, a judgment, n. invitus, -a, -um, unwilling. laus, laudis, praise, f . magnificus, -a, -um, grand, mag- latitudo, latitudinis, width, f. nificent. latus, lateris, a side, flank, n. maturus, -a, -um, early, ripe. lenitas, lenitatis, gentleness, f. liber, libera, liberum, free. liberalitas, liberalitatis, liberal- libenter, gladly, ity, f. 213 APPLIED LATIN 530. Word Study. — Explain the meanings of the follow- ing English derivatives. Use them in sentences of your own. Add any other derivatives that you can. latitude youthful cult iniquity industrious junior laud) mature lateral interval collateral lunar merchandise illiberal medicinal remedy magnificent market mercantile institute merchant lunatic medicated judicious culture laudable magistrate notation equilateral premature lenient commerce juvenile prejudice master Wishes 531. The following sentences express simple wishes in present time. i. Valeas. May you be well. 2. Dies clarus sit. May the day be fair. 3. Ne Galli Romanos superent. May the Gauls not conquer the Romans. These wishes are all made in present time with the hope that they may come to pass in the future. There is no assurance, however, that they will come to pass. In such wishes the subjunctive is used in the present tense. The negative is ne. 532. Rule. — Simple Wishes. — The present tense of the subjunctive mood is used to express a simple wish. The nega- tive is ne. 533. The following sentences express wishes which the speaker knows can never be fulfilled; which, in other words, are hopeless. 1. Utinam nationes pacem nunc facerent. Would that the nations were now making peace. 2. Utinam regem vidissemus. Would that we had seen the king. 214 THE VERB 3. Utinam ne Galli in Germania essent. Would that the Gauls were not in Germany. 4. Utinam ne dominus servum punivisset. Would that the master had not punished the slave. The wishes in these sentences are called Contrary to Fact. They can never be fulfilled. All the facts are against them. For instance, one could wish that the nations were now making peace, but they are not doing so; or that he had seen the king, when he has not. Contrary to Fact {hopeless) wishes in present time take the imperfect subjunctive (Nos. 1 and 2); in past time the pluperfect subjunctive (Nos. 3 and 4). They are regularly introduced by the word utinam, would that. 534. Rule. — Contrary to Fact (hopeless) Wishes. — The imperfect subjunctive introduced by utinam, would that, is used to express a hopeless wish in present time; the pluperfect subjunctive with the same introductory word to express a hope- less wish in past time. The negative is ne. 535. Translate: 1. Mercator sapiens, laetus sis indus- trial magnified. 2. Utinam ne haec proelia cotidiana cultus nationum delerent. 3. Utinam Luna clara nunc hlceret. 4. Domine, utinam ne tarn acerrime servum punlvisses. 5. Utinam artem mediclnae in adolescentia accurate didicis- semus. 6. Servus bonus et utilis multos annos sis. 7. Uti- nam explorator viam in silva apertam nobis monstravisset. 8. Utinam laudes medicls hoc in bello libenter darentur. 9. Utinam ne a copils hostium provincia tarn late deleta esset. 10. Roma, famam maximam gloriamque habeas. 536. 1. Would that the cavalry were now victorious. 2. 215 APPLIED LATIN Would that the body had been buried with honor. 3. May you be free and diligent, dear companion. 4. May the moon shine with clear light. 5. Would that the enemy had not waged an unfair war. Quiz. — Construct some Simple and Contrary to Fact wishes in English. The Sentence. Imperative 537. There are three kinds of sentences: the declarative, the interrogative, and the imperative. Declarative sentences state facts ; interrogative sentences ask questions ; impera- tive sentences voice commands. For imperative sentences there is a special mood of the verb called the Imperative. The Imperative in English and Latin 538. The following English sentences are imperative: 1. Lead the troops against the enemy. 2. Come all ye faithful. 3. Lift up your hearts. Learn the imperative mood of the English verb to find in Paragraph 824. Give the imperatives of the English verbs see, bring, help, do. Write some commands in English. 539. LAUDO and HABEO.— Imperative Mood— Active and Passive Present Active Present Singular Singular 2. lauda, praise (thou) 2. habe, have (thou) Plural Plural 2. laudate, praise (ye) 2. habete, have (ye) Passive Singular Singular 2. laudare, be (thou) praised 2. habere, be (thou) had (held) Plural Plural 2. laudamini, be (ye) praised 2. habemini, be (ye) had (held) 216 THE VERB Learn the imperatives of Laudo and Habeo and also of the other regular conjugations in Paragraphs 827-8-9. Note that the present imperative passive is the same in form as the present infinitive active. The imperative of Sum is es, be thou, este, be ye. U 831. 540. From the paragraphs at the back of the book you see that there is also another tense of the imperative mood, the future. The future tense of the imperative is very rare, being found only in laws, treaties, and the ritual of religion. In English this tense of the imperative can be seen in the sentence, " Thou shalt have no other gods before Me." The future imperative is not included in the work of this book. 541. For practice translate the following imperatives: 1. Cernite, dele, due,* para. 2. Tribue, es, caedite, mane. 3. Saevlte, veni, die,* este. 4. Amate, cape, relinque, favete. Commands 542. The following Latin sentences are imperative: 1. Porta hoc frumentum ad urbem. Carry this grain to the city. 2. Venite laeti. Come ye happy ones. In each of these examples the imperative is used to ex- press a command. Notice that the verb in each case is in the second person. A real command can be given only in the second person. If the first or third is used in English the expressions are mild commands or exhortations (1f 524). 543. Rule. — Commands are expressed by the present imperative. *Note. — The present imperatives of died, ferd, duco, facio, are irregularly die, fer, due, and fac. 217 APPLIED LATIN Prohibitions 544. A command which is put in the negative — as, Don't talk out loud; Boys! Don't make such a disturbance — is called a Prohibition (negative command) . In the expression of Prohibitions the Latins did not use the present impera- tive combined with the negative, as is done in English, but ordinarily used the imperative of the verb Nolo, / am unwill- ing (noli, be unwilling to or don't, singular; and nolite, be unwilling to or don't, plural, followed by the present infinitive of the verb containing the command. 545. Examples of Prohibitions. i. Noli aciem turbare. Be unwilling to (don't) throw the battle line into confusion. 2. Nolite dona mala filiis vestris dare. Be unwilling to (don't) give your sons evil gifts. 546. Rule. — Prohibitions. — The imperative of the verb Nolo (noli, singular; nolite, plural) followed by the present infinitive is commonly used in Latin to express a prohibition. 547. Translate : 1 . Porta te f rumentum ut cibus militibus sit.* 2. Mitte nuntium ne calamitas civitati* sit. 3. Vocate servos ut aedificio* praesidium sit. 4. Dum spes victoriae manet, pugnate acriter. 5. Noli servum punlre quod liber- ty tern petit. 6. Milites, nolite iniquo loco pugnare ! 7. Nautae, nolite latitudinem maris timere! 8. Date deo laudes si auxi- lium mittet. 9. Cum Caesar superetur, tamen este fortes et audaces. 10. Noli pecuniam alienam cuplditate tangere. *Note. — The dative case is often used with the verb sum to indicate the possessor. "Ut cibus militibus sit" means that the soldiers may have food (that food may be to the soldiers). The thing possessed is in the nominative case. 218 THE VERB 548. Rule. — Dative of the Possessor. — The dative case is used with tlie verb sum to denote the possessor. TJie thing possessed is the subject of sum. 549. i. Galba (dat.) had sons and daughters. 2. Praise the industry of the careful slave. 3. Do not send the mes- senger to the redoubt. 4. The young man has a horse. 5. What gifts shall that son of yours have? Compound Verbs of the Third Conjugation 550. The Curro, Duco, and Flecto Groups curro, cuirere, cucurri, cursum, to run accurro (3) concurrd (3) decurro (3) run to run together run down from occurro (3) praecurro (3) run to meet outrun, excel Note: Some verbs, compounds of curro, have the perfect in curri, not cucurri. duco, ducere, duxi, ductus, to lead adduco (3) conduco (3) deduco (3) lead to, induce hire, collect lead away educo (3) indued (3) introduco (3) lead out lead on, influence lead in, introduce perduco (3) produco (3) reduco (3) lead through, construct lead forth, prolong lead back, reduce subdued (3) traduco (3) lead up lead across, cheat flecto, flectere, flexi, flectus, to bend inflecto (3) reflecto (3) bend away, bend back, reflect, think down about 551. Translate: 1. Cum slgnum e tribunal! datum esset mllites concurrerunt. 2. Tarn incredibili celeritate ad flu- men decucurrerunt ut uno tempore et ad silvas et in flumine essent. 3. Clientes omnes quorum magnum numerum habebat ad eundem locum condtixit. 4. Deducamus equos 219 APPLIED LATIN de collibus ad oppidum. 5. Galba cum regni cuplditate in- ductus esset maximas copias coegit. 6. Utinam ne exerci- tum Romanum in fines Gallorum introduxisset! 7. Nonne apud oppidum hostium fossam altam perducis? 8. Cum ferrum se Inflexisset, hac de causa sua tela Gallos ipsos impediverunt. 9. Arbores Inflectebant ut finitimorum equitatum impedirent si ad eos venissent. 10. Caesar suas copias in collem flnitimum subducit. 552. Study these English derivatives from the verbs above. Use them in sentences of your own induction excursion current course conduct cursive introductory adduce The Caedo, Iungo, and Mitto Groups concourse reflex abductor produce deduction deflect cursory duct introduction inflection genuflection discourse precursor 553. occurrence flexible induce occur discursive recourse productivity reduction deduce incur traduce concur reflector currency caedo, caedere, cecidi, caesus, to cut concidd (3) incido (3) occido (3) succido (3) cut down, cut to pieces cut into cut down, kill cut down Note that caedo becomes -cido (1 long) and that the third principal part is -cidi (not cecidi) in compounds. iungo, iungere, iunxi, iunctus, to join adiungo (3) coniungo (3) join to, add join together, unite mitto, mittere, misi, missus, to send admitto (3) admit, commit demitto (3) let down, send away intermitto (3) interrupt, stop, check permitto (3) permit, allow amitto (3) let go, lose dimitto (3) send away, dismiss omitto (3) give up, omit praemitto (3) send in, advance transmitto (3) send across, convey across 220 committo (3) intrust, commit emitto (3) send forth, let go promitto (3) proffer, promise remitto (3) send back, relax, weaken THE ROMAN HOUSE 554. Translate: i. Nostrl magnam partem eorum con- clderunt. 2. Altera filiarum occlsa, altera capta est. 3. Cum frumenta succlsa essent, aedificia quoque milites nostrl de- leverunt. 4. Ea loca flnitimae provinciae adiungemus. 5. Si omnes elves cum legatl copils se coniunxissent, facile hostibus restitissent. 6. Quod frumenta amissa erant; eo tempore cibus els doml non erat. 7. Caesar celeriter con- cilium dlmisit sed virum retinuit. 8. Cum equi ex con- spectu omnium ductl essent, proelium commisit. 9. Quod iter nullam partem diel intermissum est in fines hostium celeriter venit. 10. Magnum numerum captlvorum domum remittamus. 555. Study these English derivatives from the verbs above. Use them in sentences of your own. adjoin committee jointure conjugal omission promissory compromise premise disjoin suicide concise permission incision decide commission surmise excise yoke intermittent remiss homicide pretermit subjoin transmitter juncture commissary subjugation demit emit promise adjunct precise demise intermission remission admission decision admittance joint remit The Roman House You have seen that the Roman Forum was crowded with public buildings and temples, but as yet you have heard nothing of the ordinary house which served the average Roman. Look at the plan below. You see at once that the Roman house consisted of two parts. Each part surrounded a central area or court. The front part of the house was Ro- man and bore Latin names; the rear was adopted from the Greek houses and bore Greek names. The oldest form of the Roman house was probably like the circular Temple 221 APPLIED LATIN of Vesta. It had a low roof with a small smoke hole. Its door was very large. To this early form of Roman house was given the name atrium. From it the later house de- veloped. The hole in the roof was made larger and the door smaller. Beneath the smoke hole there was placed a basin to catch the rain water which fell through the enlarged smoke hole. There were in later houses about this basin (impluvium) : the vestlbulum (where one took off the san- dals), guarded by the ianitor or door-keeper; the atrium or t .[ FT ATRIUM UMPLUVl £j VESTIBULUM Jimpujvium TABLINUM [ - PERISTYLE o o o e I • L Plan of a Roman House large court, entered from the vestibulum ; and several rooms about the atrium used as sleeping rooms or store rooms. Often the room nearest the street was let to a merchant. All connection with the house itself was then blocked up and a special entrance was made from the street. Such a shop was called a taberna (tavern). In the alae (two im- portant rooms at the back of the atrium) were placed the wax images of the ancestors of the family, arranged in such a way that they could be connected by a line, thus revealing 222 THE VERB the family tree or genealogy. In funeral processions these images or masks were removed from the alae and worn by different members of the family, so that the dead person was apparently escorted to the grave by his ancestors as well as his descendants. XXXIX. THE VERB. PARTICIPLE. ABLATIVE ABSO- LUTE. INFINITIVE. COMPLEMENTARY INFINITIVE 556. Besides the regular moods, indicative, subjunctive, and imperative, there are included in a complete conjuga- tion a number of forms, as the participle, the infinitive, the gerund and gerundive, which are partly verbs and partly nouns or adjectives. As an example of a verb used as a noun, consider the word running in the following sentence : Run- ning is good exercise. The word running is a part of the verb to run, but in this sentence it is used as a noun, not as a verb. In the sentence, "The hurrying crowds passed on" the word hurrying is part of a verb used as an adjective. The Participle in English and Latin 557. A. One of the important parts of the verb outside the three regular moods is the Participle. The Participle is in reality a verbal adjective. It is used in agreement with a noun like the ordinary adjective. In the conjugation of the English verb there are two participles in the active voice and two participles in the passive voice. In the verb to jind they are : Active Pres. finding' Pres. being found Perf. having found Perf. having been found 223 APPLIED LATIN Give all the participles of the English verbs send, make, lay, lend. Pick out other instances of the participle in the English reader you are using. 558. Note the italicized words in these sentences: i. A black horse drawing a light wagon won the race. 2. The wagon drawn by the black horse won the race. In these two sentences the italicized words are participles (verbal adjectives). Drawing is a present active, drawn is a perfect passive participle. The participle being a verb may have a direct object (No. i) or adverbial modifiers (No. 2). 559. B. In the Latin verb there are the following parti- ciples : LAUDO and HABEO. — Participles — Active and Passive Active Voice Present laudans (laudantis), habens, habentis, praising having Future laudaturus, -a, -um, habiturus, -a, urn, about to praise about to have Perfect Passive Voice Present Future (laudandus, (habendus, -a, -um, -a, -um, about to be about to be had)* praised)* Perfect laudatus, -a, -um, hav- habitus, -a, -um, ing been praised having been had 560. Learn the participles of the other regular verbs in Paragraphs 827-8-9. Of Sum there is only the future parti- ciple futurus, -a, -um, about to be. Paragraph 831. Parti- ciples are declined like adjectives; the present active like recens, the others like latus. * Laudandus and habendus are usually called Gerundives. 224 THE VERB 561. The following sentences illustrate the use of the participle as an adjective (Attributive participle) : i. Puellae deum laudantes templum ornabant. Maidens while praising the god were decorating the temple. 2. Romani ab hostibus permoti oppidum reliquerunt. The Romans having been thoroughly terrified left the town. 3. Equum nuper captum vidimus. We saw the horse that had been lately caught. In these sentences the participle is used as an attributive (limiting) adjective. As part of a verb, however, it retains its verbal force, taking in the first sentence a direct object, in the second and third adverbial modifiers, ab hostibus and nuper. The participle may be used in agreement with any noun in a sentence. In sentences 1 and 2 it agrees with the subject, in 3 with the object. 562. Translate: 1. Oppidum deletum a clvibus amatum est. 2. Leonem sub arbore sedentem vidimus. 3. Num via illls incolis emigraturls monstrata est? 4. Nos castellum praesidio novo flrmaturl prlmo niintium ad Caesarem mittemus. 5. Spectate solem lucentem. Clarissima luce longe lateque fulget. 6. Donum aquae servo territo placuit. 7. Ne illl portas clausurl adventum legionis timeant. 8. Rem! nautarum impetu maris fracti de navis latere pende- bant. 9. Deditio post proelium facta Iram Caesaris delevit. 10. Quis fabulas a fallaci augure dictas audiet? 563. 1. Let us drive out the enemy from the conquered province. 2. The laughing maiden saw her face in the water. 3. Soldiers who are about to make a charge are often over- come by fear. 4. Speak freely to the man asking the road. 5. Do not fear the victorious leader. 15 225 APPLIED LATIN Quiz. — Pick out some participles in your English reader. mensa, -ae, a table, f. mora, -ae, delay, f. nervus, -i, a sinew, cord, m. iugum, -I, a yoke, ridge, n. maleficium, -i, a misdeed, n. matrimonium, -i, marriage, n. obses, obsidis, a hostage, m. ictus, -us, a stroke, m. lapsus, -us, a slip, m. medius, -a, -um, middle. mirus, -a, -um, marvelous. nonnullus, -a, -um, some, several. mos, moris, a habit, custom, m., nudus, -a, -um, bare. pi., character. mors, mortis, death, f. mulier, mulieris, a woman, i. munitio, munitionis, fortifica- tion, f. nox, noctis, night, f. oppidanus, -a, -um, belonging to a town. mane, early in the morning. male, ill. maxime, especially. minime, least of all. 564. Study and learn these words. Practise the declen- sions of the nouns and adjectives. Compare the adverbs. 565. Word Study. — Explain the meaning of these de- rivatives. Use them in sentences. Add others. moratorium elapse immediate mediator mediocrity immortality denuded minimum morality immoral matrimonial miracle relapse admire ammunition mortgage malefactor lapse yoke malcontent medium enervate mortuary mortify nerve nocturnal maximum equinox collapse maleficent miraculous demoralize malice mortal nude The Ablative Absolute 566. Besides the use of the participle as an attributive adjective there is a construction in which the participle replaces the verb of a dependent clause. This construction is called the Ablative Absolute. 567. Examine these Latin sentences: i. His rebus factis, imperator castra movit. These things having been done (when these things had been done) the commander moved his camp. 226 THE VERB 2. Hostibus atrocioribus, mHites impetum acriorem fe- cerunt. The enemy being rather fierce {because the enemy were rather fierce) the soldiers made a sharper attack. 3. Caesare duce, spes bonas habebimus. Caesar being the leader {if Caesar is the leader) we shall have good hopes. The underscored words in these sentences mark instances of the Ablative Absolute construction. This construction is composed usually of a noun (or pronoun) and a parti- ciple. It gets the name ablative because both the noun and the participle stand in the ablative Case ; the name absolute because it is not grammatically connected with any word in the rest of the sentence. It can be dropped from its sen- tence without spoiling the sense; its noun subject is never the same as the subject, object, or indirect object of the main sentence. From the translations given above you can see that the Ablative Absolute replaces dependent clauses. In No. 1 it replaces a temporal, in No. 2 a causal, in No. 3 a conditional clause. The Latins liked this construction be- cause it enabled them to put the substance of a long de- pendent clause into a very few words. 568. The most common form of this construction is a noun (or pronoun) and a perfect passive participle in the ablative, as in the first sentence. In the Ablative Absolute the only other participle used was the present active. The second and third sentences show the form of this construc- tion when the present participle of Sum was required. In these sentences the noun subject of the construction 227 APPLIED LATIN stands alone, the participle of the verb sum (which did not exist) being understood. In No. 2 the adjective atrociori- bus is a predicate adjective; in 3 the noun duce is a predi- cate noun. (Compare Paragraphs 264, 265.) 569. Rule. — The Ablative Absolute. — A noun {or pro- noun) and a participle, perfect passive or present active, may be put in the ablative case to express the time, cause, condition or other circumstance of an action. Note. — When the participle required would be the present participle of the verb sum, the construction consists of a noun and an adjective, or two nouns in the ablative. 570. Translate: 1. Proelio facto, oppidan! se suaque omnia sine mora dediderunt. 2. Exercitus vester ab hos- tibus pulsus et sub iugum missus est. 3. Equitatus sine tillo maleficio iter per provinciam fecit. 4. His rebus audltls, Galba flliam suam Caesarl in matrimonium dedit. 5. Poeta mortem tristem avis parvl magnifico carmine nar- ravit. 6. Duce fallacl, munitiones nostrae facile captae sunt. 7. Montibus altioribus et fluminibus latioribus, exploratores inimicos munitionibus nostris, facile prohib- ebamus. 8. His rebus niintiatls, obsides medio in oppido mane reliquimus et fugimus. 9. Diu atque acriter pugna- bant. 10. Scutis uno Ictu telorum fractls, tamen multi nudo corpore impetum fecerunt. 571. 1. Let us praise the wonderful judgment of the leader. 2. I have no bad habits and least of all do I com- mit misdeeds. 3. The death of the woman having been announced early in the morning, her father and brother in sadness remained at home during the whole day. 4. Several of the townspeople fortified the town, though hostages had 228 THE VERB been given to Caesar. 5. When the cart had been filled with gold, the slave dragged it into an open field. Quiz. — Explain the Ablative Absolute construction. Why did the Latins like it? The Infinitive 572. The Infinitive is another one of those forms, in- cluded in the conjugation of regular verbs, which are verbal nouns or verbal adjectives. The participle which you have had was a verbal adjective; the infinitive is a verbal noun. As a noun it may be used as the subject or the object of a verb. As a verb it may have its own subject or object and may be limited by adverbial modifiers. It gets its name, infinitive, from in, not, and finio, to end or limit. It is un- limited with respect to the person and number of its subject, that is, the form of the infinitive does not change whether its subject is first, second, or third person, singular or plural. The subject of an infinitive is put in the accusative case. A. The Infinitive in English 573. Examine these English sentences: 1. To see is to believe. Infinitives as subject nominative and as predicate nominative. 2. To see the sun is a treat. Infinitive (with direct object) used as subject nominative. 3. The general ordered the soldiers to take the town quickly. Infinitive (with subject accusative and adverbial modifier) used as direct object {accusative). The preceding sentences show that in English the infinitive is used as a noun (having cases) and as a verb (having adverbial modifiers). Learn the infinitives of the verb to find, Paragraph 824. Give all the infinitives of the English verbs, see, send, 229 APPLIED LATIN play, hope. Pick out the infinitives in the following English sentences: i . When night came the hostages were ordered to depart. 2. If you are sent to aid the troops be sure to fight coura- geously. 3. He is said to have believed the guide's report. 4. We see that the soldiers are about to cross the canal. 5. Who ordered the slave to be punished? B. The Infinitive in Latin 574. LAUDO and HABEO.— The Infinitive— Active and Passive Active Voice Present laudare, to praise habere, to have Perfect laudavisse, to have praised habuisse, to have had Future laudaturus, -a, -um esse, habiturus, -a, -um esse, to be to be about to praise about to have Passive Voice Present laudari, to be praised haberi, to be had Perfect laudatus, -a, -um esse, to habitus, -a, -um esse, to have have been praised been had Future laudatum In, to be about to habitum iri, to be about to be be praised had 575. Learn the forms of the infinitive in all the regular conjugations, 1f 8 2 7-8-9, and of the verb sum, H831. 576. For practice translate the following forms: 1. Servirl, paraturus esse,* egisse, impeditos esse,* sedisse. 2. Verti, moulros esse, punltum In, iussum esse, monere. *Note that the future infinitive active and the perfect infinitive passive are composed of the future active and per- fect passive participles, combined with esse, the infinitive of the verb sum. These participles are really predicate adjectives and must agree with the accusative subject of the verb form esse in gender, number, and case. Examine these Latin sentences: 1. Videre est credere 230 THE VERB To see is to believe. Infinitives used as subject and predicate nominative. 2. Solem videre est bonum. To see the sun is good. Infinitive (with direct object) used as subject. 3. Imperator milites oppidum celeriter oppugnare iussit. Tlte general ordered the soldiers to attack the town quickly. Infini- tive (with subject accusative and adverbial modifier) used as direct object. The Infinitive is often used in Latin to complete the meaning of another verb. When so used, the infinitive is called Complementary, from compleo, to fill out, complete. The Complementary Infinitive (Infinitive without subject) 577. Examine this sentence: Frumentum ad urbem por- tare consuevit. He was accustomed to carry grain to the city. In this sentence the main verb was accustomed, taken by itself, means but little. Nobody would say, I am accus- tomed, without adding what he is accustomed to do. The main verb, then, must have another verb to complete its meaning. In this sentence the infinitive portare, complet- ing the meaning of consuevit, is a complementary infinitive. A complementary infinitive does not have a subject. 578. The Complementary infinitive is often found after: consuesco, consuescere, consuevi, consuetus, to become accustomed. debed, debere, debui, debitus, to owe, ought. contendo, contendere, contend!, contentus, to hasten. cupio, cupere, cupivl, cupitus, to desire. incipio, incipere, incepi, inceptus, to begin. propero, properare, properavi, properatus, to hasten. 579. Translate: 1. Beneficia Caesaris laudare consuesce- bamus. 2. In adolescentia res magnificas facere cupimus. 3. Cum hostes fugissent iter per provinciam facere incepi- 231 APPLIED LATIN mus. 4. Nonnulli qui tela amiserant ad oppidum currere contendebant. 5. Servo liberato dona multa dare debemus. 6. Cum equitatus timeat, nos cum virtute piignare incipia- mus. 7. Mulieres templum del mane ornare consuescebant. 8. Quod iuvenes famam gloriamque petunt eos laudare debemus. 9. Fliimine vehement!, imperator castra movere contendit. 10. Incipite fossas sine mora facere. 580. 1. We were least of all accustomed to conquer. 2. Who ought to be happy? 3. We ought not to punish our commander. 4. Who was accustomed to carry grain to the city? 5. We began to bind the captive's hands. Quiz. — Describe the uses of the Infinitive. Give the infinitives of the verbs in H578. Compound Verbs of the Third Conjugation 581. The Premo, Peto, and Pello Groups premo, premere, press!, pressus, to press, oppress comprimo (3) deprimd (3) exprimo (3) restrain, repress depress, sink press out, extort imprimo (3) opprimo (3) reprimd (3) press into, engrave crush, oppress press back, repress peto, petere, petivi, petitus, to seek appeto (3) repeto (3) suppeto (3) seek for, strive after seek again, repeat be at hand, be available pello, pellere, pepuli, pulsus, to drive, push compello (3) depello (3) expello (3) drive together, compel drive away, avert drive out, expel propello (3) impello (3) repello (3) drive forward, propel drive on, impel drive back, repel appello (1) call, name Learn these compound verbs: 582. Translate: 1. Num Caesar exercitum quern hostes in Gallia habent facile opprimet? 2. Oppidis captls, tamen fugam Gallorum reprimere non cupiunt. 3. Te consule, amicitiam populi Roman! cupidissime appetimus. 4. In- 232 THE VERB iurils atrocissimls exercitus ab his oppidanls poenas bello repetlvit. 5. Maximum numerum carrorum pleverunt ut in itinere copia frumentl suppeteret. 6. Copiae imperatoris celeriter ex loco, Inferiore in flumen compulsae sunt. 7. Milites, multls telis iactls, vallo scuta depellere incipiebant. 8. Num oppidanos qui in illo oppido habitabant sine mora expulistis? 9. Galli a ducibus impulsl bellum cum populo Romano diu gerebant. 10. Concursu et telis mllitum re- pulsi hoc conatu destitimus. 583. Study these English derivatives of the verbs above. Use them in sentences of your own. compress impetus compel expression appetite pressure depression repelling repulsive dispel repress depressing petition competent competition printer propulsion oppression impulsive express compulsory irrepressible impetuous competitor impression repetition expel appellation compulsion inexpressible 584. The Pond, Rego, and Solvo Groups pond, ponere, posui, positus, to place, put compono (3) depono (3) dispono (3) put together, construct, put aside, set aside put apart, arrange, dis- compose pose expono (3) impono (3) interpono (3) put forth, explain put upon, impose put between, interpose praepono (3) propono (3) put in charge of put forward, propose rego, regere, rexi, rectus, to rule, direct corrigo (3) dirigo (3) erigo (3) reform, correct direct, guide raise up, make erect pergo (3) surgo (3) keep straight along, go » raise, rise (sub-rego) on (per-rego) Note that rego becomes -rigo in compounds. solvo, solvere, solvi, solutus, to loosen, release absolvo (3) dissolvo (3) persolvo (3) resolvo (3) free, acquit set free, dissolve return thanks, pay a loosen, resolve, penalty cancel 233 APPLIED LATIN Learn these compound verbs. 585. Translate: i. Impedimenta trans fiumen deposita sunt. 2. Hoc opere facto, praesidia disponamus et castra muniamus. 3. Atque copias hostium in omnibus collibus expositas et armatas vldit. 4. Captlvus oratione Caesaris adductus proposuit quod an tea tacuerat. 5. Haec animalia cum concidissent se maxima cum difhcultate erexerunt. 6. Qua re nuntiata, legiones ad castra medio in colle laetae per- gunt. 7. Hi prlncipes inimlcl Caesarem sine clvium auxilio occiderunt. 8. Ita slve casu slve consilio deorum immortal- ium ea natio poenas persolvit. 9. Num nautae tantas naves facile regunt? 10. Cohortibus nostrls late dispositls, tamen multl barbarl post proelium fiigerunt. 586. Study these derivatives. Use them in sentences. solvent deposit resurrection repose regal opposition dissolution resolute decompose solution incorrigible rectangle regicide ' insolvent postpositive opponent positive preposition absolution composure disposition transpose posture insurgent resolution impose deposition erect surge suppose proposition absolute component interposition soluble exponent indissoluble insurrection exposition reign Modern Conveniences in the Roman House At the rear of the Roman part of the house was the tab- linum, in which the £ater f amilias {father of the family) held private conversations with his friends or transacted im- portant private business. The tablinum was his office. Beyond the tablinum lay the Greek part of the Roman house. The land upon which this part was placed had been originally a grass plot or a garden, and the tablinum was perhaps the shed under which the family cattle found refuge. At any rate the Peristyle, or Greek part of the 234 MODERN CONVENIENCES IN THE ROMAN HOUSE house, seems to have replaced such a grass plot, for in it was usually a pretty garden surrounded by Greek columns. Around this central garden (hortus) were a number of rooms devoted to the more intimate life of the family. Here were rooms set apart for sleeping purposes (cubicula), dining rooms (cenacula), the kitchen (cuiina), the library (bibliotheca) , the picture gallery (pinacotheca) , and a num- ber of lounging rooms. In Roman houses there were no extensive cellars and no great furnaces. The climate of Italy was such that the houses could be heated by small fires that were carried in braziers from room to room. Fur- nace pipes and furnaces as we know them were not in use among the Romans. There was water service in some Roman houses, for pipes for carrying water have been found in the ruins at Rome and elsewhere. Fresh water was brought from the country by great aqueducts, the remains of which are still to be seen in the neighborhood of Rome. Most Roman houses had but one story, though some have been found that had a second story above the atrium to which scalae (stairs) led. In the more thickly inhabited parts of the city a number of houses were joined together to make what resembled our tenement houses. These were called insulae (islands), because they were surrounded on all sides by streets as an island is by water. The upper stories of Roman houses were built of sun-dried bricks and wood. After heavy rain storms these stories were rendered so weak and insecure that they often plunged down into the narrow streets and so were constantly a menace to people in the streets. 235 APPLIED LATIN XL. THE VERB. GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. PERI- PHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS. SUPINE The Gerund in English and Latin 587. A. Among the forms included in the conjugation of a regular verb is the Gerund. Like the infinitive, the Gerund is a verbal noun. In the following sentences the italicized words are instances of the Gerund in English : i. I prefer reading to writing, for writing tires me. 2. I dislike your coming late. 3. We learn to write by writing. The forms of the Gerund are identical in spelling with that of the present participle of the active voice. Both end in the letters -ing. Though you may have difficulty in distinguish- ing between these forms, keep in mind that the participle is a verbal adjective and the Gerund a verbal noun. In the preceding sentences all the uses of the Gerund are shown. In Nos. 1 and 2 there are instances of the Gerund as subject and object; in No. 3 of the gerund as object of a preposition. The present participle being an adjective could be used in none of these constructions. 588. B. In Latin as in English the Gerund is a verbal noun of neuter gender. The Gerund in Latin is declined only in the singular and lacks the nominative case. This case is replaced by the present infinitive, a verbal noun. The Gerund is found only in the active voice. 589. LAUDO and HABEO.— The Gerund— Active Voice Norn. (laudare), praising (habere), having Gen. laudandi, of praising habendi, of having Dat. laudando, to or for praising habendo, to or for having Ace. laudandum, praising habendum, having Voc. All. laudando, by praising habendo, by having 236 THE VERB 590. Learn the Gerunds of the other regular verbs in Paragraphs 827-8-9. 591. For practice translate the following forms: 1. Regendi, movendo, capiendum. 2. Torquendum, serviendi, ornando. 3. Pacando, portandum, audiendl. 592. Examine these sentences: 1. Videre est credere. Seeing is believing. 2. Cicero artem dicendl didicit. Cicero learned the art of speaking. 3. Caesar locum pugnando idoneum monstravit. Caesar pointed out a place suitable for fighting. 4. Nos milites ad pugnandum misit. We sent soldiers to fight. 5. Galba ce- dendo numquam vicit. Galba never conquered by retreating. These sentences illustrate all the cases of the Gerund. The genitive and the accusative are the most common. In No. 1 the present infinitive is used in place of the missing nominative of the Gerund. Uses of the Gerund 593. A. The genitive of the Gerund is used (1) with the word causa, for the sake of, to express purpose. pugnandi causa, for the sake of fugiendi causa, for the sake of ftee- fighting. ing. Note that the word causa is the ablative singular of causa, a cause. It always follows the gerund it modifies. (2) As a simple limiting genitive following a noun. ars dicendi, the art of speaking amor habendi, the love of having {oratory). {avarice). B. The accusative of the Gerund is very common. It is one of the neatest ways of expressing purpose in Latin. This case is always introduced by the preposition ad, to. 237 APPLIED LATIN ad pugnandum, for fighting, to ad spectandum, for looking, to look, fight. 594. Of the other cases the dative is used after certain adjectives which are followed by the dative, No. 3. The ablative is used as an ablative of means or of cause, No. 5. Notice that in none of the sentences above is the Gerund used with a direct object. When such a construction would be called for, the Latins commonly used the Gerundive (Paragraph 600). Keep this fact well in mind when using or translating the Gerund. 595. Translate: 1. Puerl sapientes artem pugnandi discere cupiunt. 2. Quis orator illustris scientiam dicendi docere consuescebat? 3. Nonne in loco pugnando idoneo dux sagax castra ponet? 4. Dona amore dandi saepe dantur. 5. Puer doml dormiendi causa mansit. 596. 1. To conquer is to overcome. 2. Some men learn to rule by obeying. 3. For the sake of learning let us be diligent. 4. By yielding Galba never defeated his foes. 5. By serving well the slave gained his request. Quiz. — Is the Gerund used with a direct object? 597. dra, -ae, the shore, f. Cicero, Ciceronis, Cicero, m. penna, -ae, a feather, f. metus, -us, fear, m. patria, -ae, native country, fath- par, paris, equal. crland, f. creber, crebra, crebrum, fre- oceanus, -i, the ocean, m. quent. meritum, -I, a reward, merit, n. sinister, sinistra, sinistrum, left, mendacium, -i, a lie, n. evil. negotium, -i, business, n. paratus, -a, -um, ready. obsidio, obsidionis, a siege, f. pauci, paucae, pauca, few. occasio, occasionis, an occasion, f . modo, lately, just now. opinio, opinionis, an opinion, i. mox, soon. ordo, ordinis, rank, order, m. nondum, not yet. 6s, oris, the mouth, n. nonnumquam, sometimes. os, ossis, a bone, n. olim, formerly, once. 238 THE VERB 598. Study and learn these words. Practise the declen- sions of the nouns and adjectives. Compare the adverbs. 599. Word Study. — Explain the meaning of these de- rivatives. Use them in sentences. pen oral impair patriot ordinance occasional disparage negotiate paucity orifice pencil ordinary parity opinionated peer apparatus ossify meritorious interoceanic pair order par simster patriotism pinion The Gerundive or Future Passive Participle 600. The Gerundive is a verbal adjective. It occurs only in the passive voice, and is declined like the adjective latus. As a verbal adjective it is often included among the parti- ciples as the future passive participle. It is taken up at this point because its uses are the same as those of the Gerund. The Gerundives of the regular conjugations are: First laudandus, -a, -um, to be praised. Second habendus, -a, -um, to be had. Third ducendus, -a, -um, to be led. " capiendus, -a, -um, to be captured. Fourth audiendus, -a, -um, to be heard. Uses of the Gerundive 601. The common uses of the Gerundive are the same as those of the Gerund: (i) the genitive, either limiting or with causa to express purpose; (2) the accusative, with ad to express purpose; (3) the ablative to express means or cause. As was said in Paragraph 594, the Gerundive is regularly used in place of the Gerund with a direct object. In order that you may be able to use the Gerundive when- 239 APPLIED LATIN ever the Gerund would take a direct object let us see how this change from the Gerund to the Gerundive works out. Gerund {i. pacem petendi causa, to seek peace. 2. ad petendum pacem, to seek peace. 3. pacem petendo, by seeking peace. Gerundive ' pacis petendae causa, the Latins said: \ ad pacem petendam. . pace petenda. In the first group are examples of the Gerund with direct object, a construction which the Latins rarely used. In the second group are the uses of the Gerundive, which took the place of the Gerund. In changing from the Gerund to the Gerundive note (1) that the Gerundive is put in the case of the Gerund it replaces, (2) that the direct object {of the Gerund) is made to agree with the Gerundive in case, (3) that the Gerun- dive (adjective) agrees with the direct object in gender, number, and case. 602. Now that you have had both the Gerund and the Gerundive and have noticed how nearly alike they are you may feel a little uncertainty about being able to distinguish between them. Remember, however, that the Gerund is a verbal noun, neuter in gender, never declined in the plural, and rarely found with a direct object; while the Gerundive is an adjective, has all three genders, both numbers, never stands alone, but always near the noun it modifies. 603. Translate: 1. Leones ad flumen ad aquam haurien- dam venerunt. 2. Pauci oram Ocean! navium videndarum causa petunt. 3. Patria ab omnibus civibus op timis amatur. 4. Fines Gallorum ab his fluminibus ad montes et earn par- 240 THE VERB tern OceanI quae est ad Hispaniam pertinent. 5. Oppidani omnes ad negotium faciendum paratl sunt. 6. Obsidione flnlta, occasio pads petendae ab incolis capta est. 7. Cicero orationem ad populum pro lege nova habuit. 8. Mox ossa corporis omnia dlscemus. 9. Nos ad carmina poetae audienda nonnumquam concurrimus. 10. Cum esset Caesar in Gallia, crebrae epistulae ad eum a nuntiis missae sunt. 604. 1. The mouth is one part of the face. 2. Their left hands were encumbered with shields. 3. Caesar once col- lected ships to destroy the fleet of the enemy. 4. Did fear take possession of the ranks of the soldiers when the signal for fighting was given? 5. They all shouted to frighten us. 605. We have not spoken of the Gerundive in English be- cause properly the English verb has no Gerundive form, the Gerund being used with or without a direct object. In the following sentences the Gerund in English is used with direct object: 1 . I walked abroad for the sake of seeing the country. 2. Basketball is a splendid game for testing one's endurance. 3. By sailing the boat skilfully we reached land. Quiz. — What replaces the Gerund with direct object? How can you tell the Gerund from the Gerundive? The Periphrastic Conjugations 606. Before leaving the subject of the Participles and the Gerundives we should consider two special conjugations in which these two forms are used. The future active Participle and the Gerundive (future passive participle) combined with certain forms of the verb sum make up two conjuga- tions called the Active and the Passive Periphrastic. Do not let this long word periphrastic confuse you, for it merely 16 241 APPLIED LATIN means a roundabout way of speaking. The forms of these conjugations are made up of two verbs rather than of one. The Active Periphrastic 607. The Active Periphrastic is composed of the future active participle combined with the verb sum. LAUD O.— The Active Periphrastic Indicative Pres. laudaturus, -a, -um sum, / am about to praise. Imp. laudaturus, -a, -um eram, / was about to praise. Fut. laudaturus, -a, -um ero, / shall be about to praise. Per. laudaturus, -a, -um fui, / was {have been) about to praise. Plup. laudaturus, -a, -um fueram, / had been about to praise. Futp. laudaturus, -a, -um fuero, / shall have been about to praise. Subjunctive Pres. laudaturus, -a, -um sim. Imp. laudaturus, -a, -um essem. Perf. laudaturus, -a, -um fuerim. Plup. laudaturus, -a, -um fuissem. Infinitive Pres. laudaturus, -a, -um esse, to be about to praise. Perf. laudaturus, -a, -um fuisse, to have been about to praise. These are all the forms of the active periphrastic, there be- ing no imperatives, participles, etc. This conjugation is used when one wishes to speak of an action as about to take place. Its underlying idea is the expression of intention or futurity. 608. Learn the other active periphrastics in Par. 830. 609. For practice translate the following forms: captiirus ero ornatura esses visurum fuisse moturl fuerint victim fuissemus habiturl fueris Note that the participle being really a predicate adjective must agree with the subject of the forms of sum. 610. Translate: 1. Feminae templum del ornaturae sunt. 2. Quis servus equum captiirus est? 3. Ne tuam oplnio- 242 THE VERB nem mutaturus sis. 4. Epistulam scrlpturus sum. 5. Viatores viam monstraturl fuerunt. 1 . Caesar was about to change his lines of battle. 2. What oration is Cicero about to deliver? The Passive Periphrastic Conjugation 611. Just as the Future active participle was used in the formation of the Active Periphrastic, so the Gerundive (future passive participle) is used in the formation of the Passive Periphrastic conjugation. The underlying idea ex- pressed by the forms of this conjugation is that of obliga- tion, necessity, or duty. LAUDO.— The Passive Periphrastic Indicative Prcs. laudandus, -a, -urn sum, / am to be praised, must be praised. Imp. laudandus, -a, -um eram, / was to be praised. Fut. laudandus, -a, -um ero, / shall have to be praised. Perf. laudandus, -a, -um fui, / have had to be praised. Plup. laudandus, -a, -um fueram, / had had to be praised. Futp. laudandus, -a, -um fuero, / shall have had to be praised. Subjunctive Pres. laudandus, -a, -um sim. Imp. laudandus, -a, -um essem. Perf. laudandus, -a, -um fuerim. Plup. laudandus, -a, -um fuissem. Infinitive Pres. laudandus, -a, -um esse, to be about to be praised, must be praised. Perf. laudandus, -a, -um fuisse, to have been about to be praised. 612. Learn the other Passive Periphrastics in Par. 830. 613. For practice translate these forms: laudandl fuerint ducendl eritis vincendum fuerat gerendum est regendus sum vocandl sumus 614. Translate: 1. Rex iustitia laudandus est. 2. Via ab lllls incolls* qui frumentum portabant quaerenda fuit. 243 APPLIED LATIN 3. Si victim sumus, bellum Caesarl* cum fortitudine ger- endum est. 4. Oratio pro meo amico Ciceroni* habenda erit. 5. Si negotium bene finlvero meis amicls laudandus ero. 615. *Rule. — Dative of Agent. — With the Passive Peri- phrastic the dative case is employed to express the personal agent instead of the ablative with a (ab) . The dative shows the person upon whom the duty or obligation rests. 616. 1. I must praise Cicero's oration. (Cicero's oration must be praised by me.*) 2. You must love your native country. 3. He will have to punish the soldier. 4. Will the general have to change his opinion? 5. The siege will have to be given up. Quiz. — How are the Periphrastic Conjugations formed? What idea underlies each? 617. potentia, -ae, power, f. pulvis, pulveris, dust, m. pictura, -ae, a painting, f. sumptus, -us, expense, m. puella, -ae, a girl, f. portus, -us, a port, m. oculus, -I, an eye, m. plenus, -a, -um, full. nihil, nothing.^ pristinus, -a, -um, former, earlier. otium, -i, leisure, n. privatus, -a, -um, private. pabulum, -i, fodder, n. propinquus, -a, -um, neighbor- ovis, ovis, a sheep, f. ing, near. palus, paludis, a swamp, f. publicus, -a, -um, public.% pastor, pastoris, a shepherd, m. partim, partly. pondus, ponderis, a weight, n. postridie, next day. prex, precis, a prayer, f. pridie, the day before. pudor, pudoris, shame, m. prope, almost. 618. Study and learn these words. Practise the declen- sions of the nouns and adjectives. Compare the adverbs. 619. Word Study. — Explain the meaning of these Eng- * Reverse the order of words in the other sentences of 616. f Nihil is an indeclinable noun, that is, its form does not change to show cases. It is often followed by a partitive genitive. % Res publica — the Republic, the State. 244 THE VERB lish derivatives. Use them in sentences of your own. Add any others you can. pastoral depict prayer ewe potential publicity approach propinquity impudent pabulum port republic plenary picturesque powder otiose negotiate deprivation pristine privation power sumptuous imprecation impotent pulverize pound annihilate nihilist ponderous oculist The Supine 620. The last of the forms included in the conjugation of a regular verb is the Supine. Like the Gerund, the Supine is a verbal noun. It was originally a fourth declension noun, declined like casus, Paragraph 234, but in the course of time all its forms disappeared except the accusative and the ablative singular. 621. LAUDO— The Supine— Active Voice Ace. laudatum, to praise. Abl. laudatu, in praising. Learn the supines in Paragraphs 826-7-8-9. The Uses of the Supine in Latin 622. The Accusative case was used after verbs of motion to express purpose. Examine these sentences: 1. Spectatum veniunt. They came to look. 2. Nos militem calamitatem nuntiatum misimus. We sent a soldier to report the disaster. The accusative of the Supine enabled the Latins to ex- press purpose without being forced to the constant use of a subordinate clause introduced by ut. The Ablative case was used chiefly with certain adjectives to draw attention to a condition or quality. The Supine 245 APPLIED LATIN was used with: facilis, -e, easy, as, facile factu, easy in the doing {to do); mirus, -a, -um, wonderful, as, mirum dictu, wonderful to relate; mlrabilis, -e, remarkable, as, mlrabile visu, remarkable to see; horribilis, -e, dreadful, as, horribile auditu, dreadful to hear. Thus: ■ i. 1111 homines — horribile dictu — suds filios occiderunt. Those men — horrible to relate — slew their own sons. 2. Pastor ingens — mlrabile visu — montem to turn quatie- bat. The huge shepherd — wonderful to see — was shaking the whole mountain. 623. Compound Verbs of the Third Conjugation The Rumpo, Scribo, and Struo Groups rumpo, rumpere, rupi, ruptus, to break, burst abrumpo (3) corrumpd (3) erumpd (3) interrumpo (3) break off corrupt burst forth break through scribo, scribere, scrips!, scriptus, to write circumscribo (3) conscribo (3) describo (3) confine, limit enroll, levy write down, describe inscribo (3) praescribo (3) write upon, inscribe prescribe, direct struo, struere, striixi, structus, to pile up, arrange destruo (3) exstruo (3) instruo (3) destroy build up, construct arrange (troops), plan obstruo (3) build against, barricade Learn these compound verbs. 624. Translate: 1. Postea signo dato ex castrls prlstina virtu te potentiaque erupuerunt. 2. Puella parva oculos magnos bracchiaque gracilia habuit. 3. Pastores ovibus ni- hil pabuli in paliidibus repperiunt. 4. Deus haec otia nobis fecit. 5. Postrldie legio nova in provincia a Caesare con- scripta est. 6. Videbasne pulverem in ea parte quam in 246 THE VERB partem mllites iter fecerant? 7. TurrI prope exstructo, barbarl ex muro oppidl rlserunt. 8. Equitatus in sinistra parte aciel Instruebatur. 9. Ex omnibus partibus partim castra altiore vallo munlre partim portas obstruere incipient. 10. Inter propinquas nationes Galba magnum numerum equitatus suo sumptu conscrlbebat. 625. Study these derivatives. Add any others you know. abrupt describe disrupt prescription ascribe interrupt instrument rupture transcribe scripture inscription subscribe instruction destroy bankrupt construction rescript subscriber destruction conscription obstruct corruption circumscribe eruption scribe 626. The Tango, Tendo, and Traho Groups tango, tangere, tetigi, tactus, to touch attingo (3) contango (3) redintegro (1) touch, reach touch, happen {of good renew, restore {red-in- jortune) (dat.) tegro) Note that tango becomes -tingd in most compounds. The third prin- cipal part of the -tingd verbs is -tigi (not tetigi). tendo, tendere, tetendi, tentus, to stretch contends (3) intendo (3) ostendo (3) praetendo (3) struggle with, contend, stretch out, strain show, disclose hold forth hasten The third principal part of tendo compounds is -tendi. traho, trahere, traxi, tractus, to draw 'contraho (3) detraho (3) extraho (3) draw together, collect draw off, rob (dat.) draw out retraho (3) abstraho (3) draw back, recall draw away Learn these compound verbs. 627. Translate: 1. Haec terra quam nuper Galll possi- debant fines Romanorum attingit. 2. Paucis post diebus portus capiendi causa proelium redintegraverunt. 3. IllI fere cotldianls proelils cum Gallls contendunt qui in sociorum 247 APPLIED LATIN finibus bellum gerunt. 4. Oculis nostrorum mentibusque ad pugnam intentis, illae cohortes celeriter ad nostras munl- tiones pervenerunt. 5. Naves multas in unum locum con- tractus legatls tribuit. 6. Caesar, scuto mlliti detracto, in proelium processit. 7. Quis equum fugitivum retrahet? 8. Omnes oppidan! mantis ad Caesarem tendunt? 628. Study these derivatives from the verbs above. attack tangent attendant portray distend pretentious detract ostensible tangible attend extend intensive portend retrace attractive extensive contiguous entreaty portentous extract attention abstract extent intend treaty redintegration subtract contract ostentatious tractable integer contingent intact tractor tension distract contact intangible trait entire 629. rapina, -ae, robbery, f. regina, -ae, a queen, f. ripa, -ae, a river bank, f. pagus, -I, a district, m. plumbum, -I, lead, n. pomum, -i, an apple, n. praemium, -I, a reward, n. pes, pedis, the foot, m. pieces, plebis, the common peo- ple, m. possessio, possessionis, owner- ship, f. potestas, potestatis, power, f. praetor, praetoris, an official, praetor, m. princeps, principis, a chieftain, m. profectio, profectionis, a depar- ture, f. principatus, -us, chieftainship, m. planities, -el, a plain, f. pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum, beautiful. qualis, quale, of what sort. quantus, -a, -um, how much. reliquus, -a, -um, remaining. quam, than* rursus, again. repente, suddenly. satis, enough.^ potius, rather. 630. Study and learn these words. Practise the declen- sions of the nouns and adjectives. Compare the adverbs. 631. Word Study. — Explain the meanings of the English derivatives; use these words in sentences of your own: * Quam is often used after a comparative to denote a comparison. t Satis is often followed by a partitive genitive. 248 THE OCCUPATIONS OF THE ROMANS rapine riparian pagan plebeian pomegranate pedal principle principality pretorian principal impediment satisfy plain quality relic princess pulchritude plumb rapture premium rapacious quantity plumber possessor plummet quadruped explain insatiable saturate disqualify The Occupations of the Romans In the Forum men of all ranks of society met and lounged about. This spot was the favorite place in Rome for all kinds of meetings and was always crowded with people. Romans thronged the streets leading to the Forum and elbowed and jostled one another upon the Sacra Via. On the steps of the temples, in many cases broad and expansive, the loungers sat conversing or playing at games like back- gammon. A great deal of business other than that connected with the government was transacted in the Forum. Along the Sacra Via were many small shops of the more expensive kinds. Here were the shops of jewelers and money changers. On the little streets leading to the Forum were shops in which almost anything desired could be purchased. Among the men who patronized these shops many trades were represented. The common people were banded into trades unions at an early time, and these unions or guilds made their importance felt on many occasions.* There were two groups among the working people, those whose trade required dexterity and skill, as doctors and architects, and those who did the commoner forms of labor, as carpenters, goldsmiths, fullers, shoemakers, etc. The unions of these workers were * Compare the opening scene in Shakespeare's "Julius Caesar." 249 APPLIED LATIN organized originally to maintain their traditions and to preserve the worship of the divinities who were the special protectors of the individual trades. No Roman citizen at first entered these professions because the pursuit of busi- ness was considered beneath his dignity and there was little respect for labor. From early times business and pro- fessional activities were carried on by slaves or freedmen; slaves who had bought their freedom or for special services had been freed by their masters. Later the Romans did enter upon such work, but there always remained the same idea that occupation in labor for which wages were paid was beneath the notice of the real Roman citizen. XLI. THE PRONOUN AND ADJECTIVE. INDEFINITE 632. In the first part of this book you learned a number of pronouns, such as hie, iste, ille, Idem, etc., which were called demonstrative pronouns because they pointed out definitely the person, place, or thing for which they stood. Then there came the relative pronouns, the personal pro- nouns, and the reflexive pronouns. Besides these there are in all languages certain pronouns which refer not to definite persons or things but to some person or thing but slightly known, indefinite, or referred to only in a general way. These pronouns being general are called Indefinite Pronouns. The Indefinite Pronouns in English and Latin 633. Examine these English sentences: i. Somebody sent me these flowers. 2. Did anybody ring the bell? 3. Each sought the first place for himself. 250 THE PRONOUN AND ADJECTIVE. INDEFINITE The words italicized are indefinite pronouns. Other Indefinite Pronouns in English are: Some, some- one, any, anyone, one, any, other, another, jew, many, none, all, more, most, certain. Construct English sentences containing these pronouns. Be careful to note that these indefinite pronouns imme- diately become indefinite adjectives if made to modify a noun, as, any man, jew books, certain ideas. Construct some sentences also using these words as indefinite adjectives. Pick out some instances of the use of indefinite pronouns or adjectives in your English reader. 634. The Indefinite pronouns in Latin are: M. and F. N. quis, quid, anybody, anything {used only with si, nisi, ne, num). aliquis, aliquid, someone, something. quisquam, quicquam, anyone, anything {no plural). M. F. N. quidam, quaedam, quiddam, a certain one or thing. qui vis, quaevis, quidvis, any one {you wish), anything. quisque, quaeque, quidque, each one, each thing. 635. When these indefinite pronouns are joined to a noun in agreement they become indefinite adjectives, as follows: M. F. N. qui, qua (quae), quod, some, any {used only after si, nisi, ne, num). aliqui, aliqua, aliquod, some. quidam, quaedam, quoddam, certain. qui vis, quaevis, quodvis, any. quisque, quaeque, quodque, each. These words, when pronouns, are regularly declined like the interrogative pronouns quis, quid ; when adjectives, like the relative pronoun qui, quae, quod, except that the in- 251 APPLIED LATIN definites qui and aliqui have qua and aliqua in the feminine singular nominative. Learn the declensions of quis and aliquis in Paragraph 823. 636. Translate: 1. Aliquis mihi hos flores misit. 2. Si quis plumbum his in montibus repperiat, Respublica prae- mium det. 3. Quale regnum huic reginae fuit? 4. Inter Romanos quldam praetores potestatem Inslgnem possed- erunt. 5. Quisque prlnceps sibi prlncipatum petebat. 6. Poma ex arbore apud fluminis ripam in aquam repente ceciderunt. 7. Quaedam planities pulchra ad fines huius pagi pertinet. 8. Ne quisquam profectionem plebis qui novls rebus studet rursus laudet. 9. Si quis satis frumentl possidebit, praetor qui copiam frumentl curat id capiet potius quam alius quern plebes non iussit. 10. Quid prae- mium maius quam id quod a plebe mihi datum est nunc cupio? 637. 1 . The rest of the fruit we will carry to the house of our chief. 2. If anyone should deprive the praetor of his power the common people would arm themselves. 3. What sort of feet has the horse? 4. Let each man take care of his own possessions rather than those of another man. 5. Some trees are higher than others. XLII. THE INTERJECTION. NUMERALS The Interjection in English and Latin 638. Up to the present time you have met with all the parts of speech except the Interjection. This part of speech is not very common; still it occurs enough times to make its acquaintance important. The Interjection, as its name shows (inter, between, iacio, to throw), is a word inserted at some point in a sentence to produce a certain effect. Inter- 252 THE INTERJECTION. NUMERALS jections reveal the feeling of the writer or speaker. They may indicate sorrow or joy, happiness or depression. They have no grammatical connection with the sentence in which they occur, and may be dropped without spoiling the sense. 639. The commonest interjections in English are: hurrah, alas, hollo, lo, behold, pst. In Latin the commonest interjections are: O (oh); en (lo); ecce (behold); ehem (hem); id (hurrah); heu (alas); heus (hey); st (hist). The Numerals 640. The Numerals are words which name numbers (numerus, a number). As parts of speech, numerals are either adjectives or adverbs. The following kinds of numerals exist in English and Latin: Cardinal numerals, as unus, one; duo, two; tres, three; etc. Ordinal numerals, as primus, first; secundus, second, etc. Distributive numerals, as singuli, one at a time; bini, two at a time; etc. Numeral Adverbs, as semel, once; bis, twice; etc. 641. Learn the numerals given in Paragraph 822. 642. In English the numerals are not declined; in Latin the Cardinal numerals up to three, and hundreds from two hundred up to one thousand, are adjectives with all three genders. The Ordinals and Distributives are declined like latus. Distributives are found only in the plural. 643. Learn the declensions of unus, duo, tres, and mllle. Paragraph 819. 644. The following numeral words are important: 253 APPLIED LATIN simplex, simplicis, one fold, simple, duplex, duplicis, two fold, double, triplex, triplicis, three fold, triple, quadruplex, quadruplicis, four fold, quadruple, quincuplex, quincuplicis, five fold, quintuple. These numeral adjectives are declined like felix. 645. Translate: i. Tertio die duae cohortes legionis iter tria milia passuum facile fecerunt. 2. Acie triplice mstructa, quadringentl ex hostibus occlsl sunt. 3. Heu! Nonne leonem rapacem inter oves videmus? 4. Ecce homo quern htimanitate itistitiaque omnes et liberi et servi amabant. 5. Io! Tres aves pulcherrimas in silva extra urbem hodie cepimus. 6. Cum blnae et ternae naves sin- gulis circumstetissent, milites maxima cum virtute eas delere contenderunt. 7. Luna semel duodetrlginta diebus plena est. 8. Cum servus clare bis vocatus esset, tamen non celeriter venit. 9. Qulnque filii et quattuor flliae olim fuerunt regl qui nationes Britanniae regebat. 10. Cum haec urbs in duas partes flumine divideretur, alteram partem Gallis concessit, alteram ab his relictam cohortibus duodecim attribuit. 646. 1. We sent the first letter today. 2. Lo ! three trees were standing on the hill. 3. Hist! The Praetor is coming with forty clients. 4. When a double line of battle has been drawn up let us begin the battle. 5. Does each legion have ten cohorts? 647. Study these English derivatives. primer tertiary quinquennial bicycle unify unicycle disunited combine second sextet millennium single simple prime universal double university binocular trio duplicity secondary uniform singular duplicate duet quaternary primitive unity quartette mile unique primate sexennial 254 duodecimo dual THE INTERJECTION. NUMERALS 648. rota, -ae, a wheel, f. scelus, sceleris, a crime, n. ruina, -ae, a ruin, collapse, f. senex, senis, an old man, m.* sententia, -ae, an opinion, f. paries, parietis, a house wall, m. radius, -i, spoke {of wheel), ray, m. meridies, -ei, midday, m. punctum, -i, a point, n. rusticus, -a, -um, rustic, belong- pilum, -i, a javelin, spear, n. ing to the country* pretium, -i, price, n. saevus, -a, -um, savage, cruel. radix, radicis, a root, f. summus, -a, -um, highest. robur, roboris, timber, n. tacitus, -a, -um, silent. ratio, ratidnis, a reason, plan, f. separatim, separately. reditio, reditidnis, a return, f. simul, at the same time. salus, salutis, safety, f. tandem, at length. 649. Study and learn these words. Practise the declen- sions of the nouns and adjectives. Compare the adverbs. 650. Word Study. — Explain these English derivatives: rotary radius corroborate tacit pungent salubrious senile rusticate rotund irrational 651. Compound Verbs of the Third Conjugation The Capio, Quatio, Rapid Groups capio, capere, cepi, captus, to take, capture accipio (3) excipio (3) praecipio (3) receive, accept receive, take tip advise, warn recipio (3) suscipio (3) occupo (1) receive, betake oneself widcrtake seize, capture Note that capio becomes -cipio in compound verbs. quatio, quatere, quassi, quassus, to shake concutio (3) excutio (3) percutio (3) recutio (3) shake up, shatter shake ojf smite shake Note that quatio becomes -cutio in compounds. rapid, rapere, rapui, raptus, to snatch up corripio (3) diripio (3) eripio (3) iisurpo (1) snatch up, pull apart, plunder snatch away, save seize for use, use press on Note that rapid becomes -ripio in compounds. * Senex is irregularly declined — Sing., senex, senis, seni, senem, senex, sene; PL, senes, senum, senibus, senes, senes, senibus. 255 summit prize sententious robust eradicate savage ray sum depreciate radical salutary parietal radiator meridian radiance APPLIED LATIN 652. Translate: i. Cuique carro quattuor rotae erant. 2. Pills missis, decern mllia ex legionibus novls salute m in fuga petebant. 3. Reliquum spatium quod non amplius pedum sescentorum est continet mons magna altitudine, ita ut radices montis ex utraque parte ripas fluminis contingant. 4. Illo punctti temporis mirabile visu arbor, robore fracto, rulna magna cecidit. 5. Id maxime ea ratione fecit quod hostes agros Gallorum occupaverant. 6. Tandem spe do- mum reditionis sublata, senes rusticl propter scelera in silvas densas se receperunt. 7. Simul quisque tacitus urbem separatim reliquit et ne caperetur se eripuit. 8. Ilium qui Galbam pllo percussit hostes saevl scutis protexerunt. 9. Ne hanc rem suscipiamus. 10. Galll celeriter ex con- suetudine sua, acie facta, impetus pllorum excipiebant. 653. 1 . The savage lion betook himself to the mountains. 2. The wall of the house fell with a heavy crash. 3. Finally a price was set by the old man. 4. Each wheel has twelve spokes. 5. How great and of what sort were the slave's crimes? 654. Study these derivatives from the verbs above. accept acceptable principle repercussion rapacious captious receptacle inception recipient exceptionable susceptible preceptor receipt percussion precept 655. Compound Verbs of the Third Conjugation The Facio, Iacio, and Specio Groups facio, facere, feci, factus, to make, do conficio (3) deficio (3) interficio (3) accomplish, complete fail, give out kill, do to death praeficio (3) satisfacio (3) reficio (3) put at head of, put in appease, satisfy {dat.) make over, repair command (dat.) iacio, iacere, ieci, iactus, to throw, hurl conicio (3) deicio (3) proicio (3) hurl, throw throw down, cast down hurl forward, abandon reicio (3) iacto (1) throw, hurl back throw, toss 256 THE INTERJECTION. NUMERALS specio, specere, spexi, spectus, to look circumspicio (3) conspicio (3) despicid (3) look around, look over catch sight of, behold look down on, despise perspicio (3) suspicio (3) exspecto (1) see through, see clearly, look under, suspect look for, await understand Learn these compound verbs. 656. Translate: 1. Milites, este fortes, pila conicite, deicite hos saevos viros de muro ! 2. Ad has res conficiendas triduum sumamus. 3. In Gallia legiones Caesaris milia mllitum interfecerunt. 4. Ob eas causas Galbam legatum el munltionl quam fecerat praefecit. 5. Item si hostes Romanls satisfaciant Caesar cum els pacem faciat. 6. Cum res frumentaria eos deficeret, concilio convocato quisque domum contendit. 7. Tela missa excipiant seque ex labore reficiant. 8. Cum hos legatos in castris conspexisset, se in fugam dedit. 9. Cum unus pagus facile victus sit, ne Caesar ob earn rem aut victoriam suae magnopere virtuti tribuat aut hostes despiciat. 10. Si omnes idem sentient et probabunt nuntium exspectent. 657. 1. When the grain supply failed all hope of re- turning home was taken away. 2. In a space of three days the war with the slaves was completed. 3. What leader slew those three brave centurions? 4. The leader whom we put in command of the fortification was despised by the enemy. 5. The old men were forced to leave the wall. 658. Study these derivatives. Add any others you know. Use them in sentences of your own. affection refectory respectable project conjecture adjective defeat sufficient proficient efficacious circumspect acceptance subject perspective prefect despise faction counterfeit object defect inspector aspect affect projection suspicion perfect inject abject expectation disjection surfeit species infection facilitate confectionery 17 257 applied latin Some Tools Used by the Romans Almost any sort of a workman at Rome was called a Smith (faber). To distinguish the individual trade the name of the material with which the man worked was added. With some exceptions the same tools were used at Rome which are used now universally. The hammer (malleus) and anvil (incus), axe (securis), tongs (forceps), bellows (follis), and adze (ascia) of to-day were used two thousand years ago. Other implements, as the saw (serra), file (lima), plane (runcina), chisel (scalprum), mallet (malleolus), lathe (tornus), and boring instruments (terebrae), were common. Among instruments for ensuring accuracy were the com- passes (circinus) and square (norma). For the spirit level the libella was used. This consisted of three pieces of wood forming an A with the exact center of the cross-bar marked. A string with a plummet attached hung from the apex so that the plummet would touch the central mark when the legs rested on a level surface. All the simple mechanical powers were used, as the lever (vectis), the inclined plane, and the pulley (trochlea). There was also an instrument like a derrick for lifting heavy weights by means of a windlass. As Roman buildings were rarely of wood there was little employment for the carpenter. Carpenters were mostly con- cerned with the making of ships and wagons (carpenta), from which word comes the name. The mason was more important than the carpenter, for stone and cement were universally employed in building. The mason's trowel was called trulla. The use of cement in building construction 258 THE VERB. DEPONENTS was the greatest contribution of the Romans to the art of building. The cement (caementum) manufactured by the Romans was much stronger than the cement we use to-day. Many of the cement constructions of the Romans have lasted in first-rate shape to the present day. Even now Roman cement can hardly be broken up by modern picks. XLIII. THE VERB. DEPONENTS. SEMI-DEPONENTS. COMPOUND VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION 659. In the work so far you have met with regular verbs only, sum excepted. Before we pass to verbs which are irregular in the majority of their forms, certain verbs must be considered which are regular in forms, but irregular in translation. These verbs are called Deponents, from deponere, to cast aside. They have cast aside all the forms of the active voice (except one or two) but retain their pas- sive voices in full. The passive forms of Deponent verbs have active meanings. It is a little difficult at first to get into the habit of translating passive forms as if they were active. The forms in themselves do not cause trouble, for learning the forms of a deponent verb is like learning the passive voice of a regular verb alone. There are deponent verbs in all the four conjugations. 660. Examples of Deponent verbs: First conjugation, cdnor, conari, conatus sum, to try. Second conjugation, vereor, vereri, veritus sum, to fear. Third conjugation, sequor, sequi, secutus sum, to follow. " " patior, pan", passus sum, to bear, endure. Fourth conjugation, potior, potiri, potitus sum, to seize. 661. Learn the conjugation of conor and vereor in Para- 259 APPLIED LATIN graph 835. Notice especially these forms of the active voice which are included in the conjugation of deponent verbs: 1. The future infinitive, as conaturus, -a, -um, esse. The Latins did not like the form of the future infinitive passive because it was a little unwieldy and bungling. This infinitive form is often lacking even among the regular verbs. Whenever possible the Latins avoided it, and in deponent verbs they easily replaced it with the future active infinitive. 2. The present and future participles ; conans, conaturus. As the passive voice of the ordinary verb showed only the perfect participle, the Latins, in order to complete the parti- ciples of Deponent verbs, added these two participles from the active voice. Thus the active present participle (as conans) and the future participle (as conaturus) are included in deponent verbs, each retaining its active meanings. Be care- ful never to translate the perfect participle of a deponent verb with a passive meaning. Conatus means having at- tempted, not having been attempted. This is perhaps the most common error in the use of the Deponent verbs. 662. Some common deponent verbs of the first and second conjugations are: First Conjugation arbitror, arbitrari, arbitratus sum, to think. cohortor, cohortari, cohortatus sum, to exhort, encourage. hortor, hortari, hortatus sum, to urge. mlror, mirari, miratus sum, to admire. moror, morari, moratus sum, to delay. testor, testari, testatus sum, to be a witness. populor, popular!, populatus sum, to devastate. vagor, vagari, vagatus sum, 260 to wander. THE VERB. DEPONENTS Second Conjugation fateor, fateri, fassus sum, to say, admit. polliceor, polliceri, pollicitus sum, to promise. intueor, intueri, intuitus sum, to gaze at. 663. Translate: i. Caesar, equls remotis ut spem fugae tolleret, suos cohortatus proelium commlsit. 2. Viatoresne altitudinem montis et latitudinem fluminis mlrabantur? 3. Servi fugitlvl quattuor dies in illls flnibus moratl ad socios suos se receperunt. 4. Oratione habita, Cicero deos ifnmortales testatus est. 5. Qui nostras urbes pop_ulaban- tur? 6. Ea quae pollicemur mox faciemus. 7. Unus ex omnibus nihil earum rerum faciebat sed trlstis, capite demisso, terram intuebatur. 8. Meos centuriones cotldie cohortarl consuesco. 9. Manibus impetii fluminis impedltis, media in aqua morarl inceperunt. 10. Quis dona maxima clientibus pollicebatur? 664. 1. Marvel at the works of poets. 2. Those leaders, having devastated my fatherland, killed my son. 3. Let the citizens refrain from praising the man who promises Caesar a crown. 4. We delayed one day to finish the business. 5. Gaze upon the beautiful moon. 665. Word Study. — Study these English derivatives: arbitrate intestate depopulate professor confess vagabond exhortation protest admire vagrant 666. Stella, -ae, a star, f. testis, testis, a witness, m. tuba, -ae, a trumpet, f. timor, timoris, fear, m. toga, -ae, the toga, a garment, f. timidus, -a, -um, timid. sonus, -i, a sound, m. urbanus, -a, -um, belonging to responsum, -i, reply, n. the city. studium, -i, a pursuit, study, n. validus, -a, -um, strong, vigorous. solum, -I, the ground, n. vastus, -a, -um, empty, vast. servitus, servitutis, slavery, f. verus, -a, -um, true. socer, soceri, a father in law, m. ultra, beyond. sanguis, sanguinis, blood, m. una, together with (with cum). scriptor, scriptoris, a writer, m. vix, scarcely. sors, sortis, a lot, f . undique, on all sides. 261 APPLIED LATIN 667. Study and learn these words. Practise the declen- sions of nouns and adjectives. Compare the adverbs. 668. Word Study. — Explain these derivatives. Use them in sentences of your own. Stella constellation stellar verisimilar person study ultramarine consonant responsive urban convalescence valid testament invalid student timid suburb sort urbane sangfroid sonorous intimidate ulterior testify testimony veracity timorous verify sole (noun) servitude attest sound studious sanguinary avail 669. The commonest third conjugation deponents are: adgredior, adgredi, adgressus sum, to attack. morior, mori, mortuus sum, to die. nascor, nasci, natus sum ., to be born. labor, labi, lapsus sum, to slip. loquor, loqui, locutus sum, to speak. obliviscor, oblivisci, oblitus sum, to forget. proficiscor, proficisci, prof ectus i sum, to set out. queror, queri, questus sum, to complain. ulciscor, ulcisci, ultus sum, , to take vengeance on. utor, uti, usus sum, to use, enjoy. 670. Learn the conjugation of the third conjugation deponent verb sequor, in Paragraph 835. 671. Translate: 1. Nonnumquam stella ardens ex caelo in oceanum labitur. 2. Omnia uno tempore erant agenda; slgnum tuba dandum, ab opere milites revocandi, acies instruenda est. 3. Civis qui togam gessit, loco nobill natus est. 4. Una cum socero meo Roma Athenas ad studium dlcendi incipiendum prof ectus sum. 5. Poeta vera del responsa male narrabat. 6. Sine vestro sanguine hostes superavi. 7. Virl liberi servittitem et commuta- tionem fortiinae semper queruntur. 8. Nos, testes huius sceleris, vix praetorem urbanum retinebamus. 9. Scrip tores Roman! antiqui sortibus vix crediderunt. 10. Qua in re 262 THE VERB. DEPONENTS Caesar et publicas et privatas iniurias ultus est, quod haec natio patrem eius soceri interfecerat. 672. i. Our army attacked the enemy without fear. 2. Timid wayfarers never set out to the lands beyond the mountains. 3. Concerning the responses of the god we spoke gladly. 4. Were you born in noble station? 5. On the third day many of the captives died, for few were accustomed to endure slavery. ■ 673. Word Study. — Explain these derivatives. Use them in sentences of your own. aggressive oblivion querulous moribund egress nation collapse natural interlocutor innate passive relapse progress renaissance mortuary native digress ingress utensil elocution patient nascent use congress impassive 674. The commonest fourth conjugation deponents are: expenor, mentior, metior, molior, orior, partior, experiri, mentiri, metiri, moliri, oriri, partiri, expertus sum, mentitus sum, mensus sum, molitus sum, ortus sum, partitus sum, to lest, try. to lie. to measure. to build, attempt. to arise, begin. to divide. 675. Learn the conjugation of the fourth conjugation deponent verb potior, in Paragraph 835. 676. Translate : 1 . Nisi quid auxill in Caesare populoque Romano erit, nos quoque una cum Gallls eventum for- tiinae experiemur. 2. Puerl bonl numquam mentiuntur. 3. Quodam die Caesar militibus f rumen turn mensus erat. 4. Haec pars Galliae ad orientem solem pertinet. 5. Prius- quamplures civitates inter se conjungerent Caesar exercitum ad bellum gerendum partitus est. 677. 1. They fortified their town that they might not experience the same bad fortune. 2. When Caesar had measured out the grain for the soldiers he encouraged each 263 APPLIED LATIN man separately. 3. When the sun had risen, light filled the whole temple. 4. Divide the army and conquer the enemy without delay. 5. We have cast you from the city because you were attempting evil deeds. Semi-deponents 678. In the preceding paragraphs you met with the most common deponent verbs of the four conjugations. There are beside these a few which are called Semi-deponents, because some of their forms are from the active voice and some passive. The commonest semi-deponents are: audeo, audere, ausus sum, to dare {Complem. Infin.). confldo, confidere, confisus sum, to trust firmly (Dat. of Per- sons, Abl. of Things). diffldo, diffidere, difflsus sum, to distrust {Abl. of Things). gaudeo, gaudere, gavisus sum, to rejoice {Abl. of Cause). soleo, solere, solitus sum, to be accustomed {Complem. Infin.). 679. Translate: 1. Adventum leonis virgo timida exspec- tare ausa est. 2. Dux noster hunc regem rebus suls diffl- dentem erexit. 3. Gaudent quod occasio sui purgandl data est. 4. Sonum tubarum et equorum currentium audire sole- bant. 5. Quis validus sine precibus mori audet? 680. 1. Dare to tell a true story without shame. 2. Men who trust their own ability overcome many evils. 3. Before a fight the Romans were wont to draw up their line of battle. 4. Did you rejoice when the tricky leader gave the crown to Caesar? 5. Some men dare to attack any savage animal. 681. Word Study. — Explain these derivatives; use them in sentences of your own : experience partition demolish perfidy bipartite audacity fidelity order rejoice compassion mete gay 264 passion mensuration diffident compatible orient confidence originate insolent THE VERB. DEPONENTS 682. Compound Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation The Salio, Sentio, and Venio Groups salio, salire, , , to leap desilio (4) resilio (4) salto (1) Insulto (1) resulto (1) leap down leap back dance leap upon leap back sentio, sentire, sensi, sensus, to perceive adsentio (4) consentio (4) dissentio (4) agree, assent think with, agree feel different, disagree praesentid (4) feel before, look before venio, venire, veni, ventum, to come advenio (4) convenio (4) circumvenid (4) come to, approach come together, assemble come around, surround evenio (4) invenio (4) pervenio (4) come out, happen come upon, find come through, arrive, (by chance) reach prdvenid (4) come forth, turn out (well, ill) 683. Translate: 1. Desillte, mllites! Ne ducem hostibus prodamus. 2. Feminae saltabant et aedificium cantibus complebant. 3. Concilio convocato, prlncipes qui undique convenerant cum legatis Romanis consenserunt. 4. Quem exitum habuit consilium Galbae et eorum qui dissentiebant? 5. Hostes nostros mllites a latere aperto adgressl circum- venire conabantur. 6. Ea res legionl feliciter eveniat. 7. Eo in loco naves XXVIII Instrtictas invenit. 8. Haec pars sociorum mllitibus legionis nonae et decimae forte obven- erat. 9. Cum id niintiatum esset, legatus iter per provin- ciam celerrime fecit et Romam pervenit. 10. Veni Caesarem laudatum non sepultum. 684. 1 . Let us agree with these men who have established the custom. 2. We have with us the soldiers who have lately assembled from the province. 3. By chance Caesar met Galba together with twelve cohorts. 4. We found the town situated near the banks of the river. 5. The general was killed while he was coming to his son. 265 APPLIED LATIN 685. Word Study - -Explain these English derivatives, Use them in sentences of your own : desultory adventitious exult inventory assent assailant dissent provenience insult presentiment convent prevention sensitive salient convention intervention advent consensus convenient contravene dissenter resilient circumvent revenue sally sense event convene consent assault eventual avenue result sentence invention Skilled Workmen Among the Romans The Architects (architect!) were an important group of workmen. As their (Greek) name implies, they were usually Greeks, not Romans. Assisting the architects were the sur- veyors (finitores) who, besides the work usually done by surveyors, also laid out the lands for colonists and the camps for armies. The Romans found a great deal of employment for the Painter (pictor). As there was not much furniture, few tapestries, and no framed pictures in the ordinary house, the Romans had to depend for ornamentation on pictures painted on the walls. Ordinary rooms were whitewashed by a workman called a dealbator (albus, white). He used a trowel (trulla) and worked on a scaffold (machina) . Show rooms were decorated by a real artist (pictor parietarius, paries, an interior wall). The painter of wall decorations used a pencillus or brush. The walls of rooms often pre- sented scenes from outdoor life, as landscapes, gardens, harbors, fountains, etc. The Potter was in great demand at Rome and throughout the ancient world as well. So extensive was the use of pot- 266 THE VERB. IRREGULAR tery that the manufacture of earthenware was carried on at any large estate where the proper kind of clay (argilla) could be found. The potter (figilus) made vessels both by hand and with the potter's wheel (rota figularis). Clay vessels, after being turned on the wheel, were baked in an oven (fornax, furnace). The Goldsmiths and Silversmiths knew about the same processes then as to-day. Works of gold and silver were very highly prized. Gem cutters were very skilful, as the ancient cameos we now possess easily show. Makers of perfumery and ointments carried on a thriving trade. Their products were sent to all parts of the world in dainty little vases of many shapes. Probably the "alabaster jar of precious ointment" was manufactured by one of the expert perfumers of that day. XLIV. THE VERB. IRREGULAR Void, Nolo, Maid. Ed, Fero, Fio. Compounds of Sum 686. There are in all languages verbs whose forms are irregular. Many are only slightly irregular, as do, dare, dedi, datus, to give. This verb belongs to the first conjuga- tion, except the perfect dedi, which is really a third conjuga- tion form. Maneo is a second conjugation verb, except the perfect mansi, which belongs to the third conjugation. Among the Latin verbs that are specially irregular are those mentioned at the head of this paragraph. These verbs, as their meaning will show you, are very common, not only in Latin but in all other languages. Words that are 267 APPLIED LATIN especially common have a tendency to become irregular. Think for a moment of the English verb to be. It has forms derived from four different verbs, be, is, am, was. 687. The principal parts of volo, nolo, malo, are: volo, velle, volui, , to wish. nolo, nolle, nolui, , to be unwilling. malo, malle, malui, , to prefer. Nolo and malo are compounds of volo. Nolo equals non volo, / do not wish; malo equals magis, more, volo, / wish more, I prefer. All three verbs are similar in conjugation. In nolo and malo the presence of non and magis causes some irregulari- ties not found in volo itself. 688. The conjugation of volo is — Indicative Pres. volo, vis, vult, volumus, vultis, volunt. Imp. volebam, volebas, etc. Fut. volam, voles, etc. Perf. volui, voluisti, etc. Plup. volueram, volueras, etc. Futp. voluero, volueris, etc. Subjunctive Pres. velim, veils, velit, velimus, velitis, velint. Imp. vellem, velles, vellet, vellemus, velletis, vellent. Perf. voluerim, volueris, etc. Plup. voluissem, voluisses, etc. Infinitive Participle Pres. velle, Pres. volens, -ntis. Perf. voluisse. 689. Learn the conjugations of nolo and malo in Para- graph 833. Note also Paragraphs 544-546. 690. For practice translate these forms: 1. Vis, malls, nollet, voluisti, nolet . 2 . Nolle, volentes, ma vult , non vis, vel- lemus, noli. 3 . Voluisse, mallent, nolumus, malle, voluissent. 268 SOME IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES 691. Translate: i. Postrldie Caesar priusquam se hostes ex terrore et fuga reciperent proelium committere voluit. 2. Vlsne me venire? 3. In llbertate permanere malumus quam Romanorum servitutem patl. 4. Qua de causa elves ora- tiones Ciceronis malebant? 5. Si nos a flumine discedere nolimus, hostes celeriter fugiant. 6. Nolite servum piinire sine causa vera. 7. Num ille omnes esse llberos volebat? 8. Malimus pugnare potius quam fugere. 9. Domi manere maluissem nisi consul me vocavisset. 10. Utinam ne femi- nae ludos Romanorum spectare voluissent. 692. 1. Those who were willing to make the journey assembled from all sides. 2. Who does not prefer honor rather than gold? 3. I shall be unwilling to attack our allies. 4. Don't write the letter. 5. Let us be willing to try all the fortunes of war. SOME IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES 693. Most of the adjectives which you have met up to the present time have been regular in inflection and com- parison. There are a few adjectives, irregular in com- parison, which are not only very common in Latin, but have a host of derivatives in English. The most important of these are : exterus, outward, exterior, outer, extremus (extimus) , farthest. Inferus, below, inferior, lower, infimus (Imus), lowest. posterus, following, posterior, later, postremus (postumus), last. superus, above, superior, higher, supremus (summus), highest. (in, in), interior, inner, intimus, inmost. (pro, before), prior, earlier, primus, first. (prope, near), propior, nearer, proximus, nearest. (ultra, beyond), ulterior, further, ultimus, farthest. Note that in the last four the missing positive degree is supplied by means of a preposition or an adverb. 269 APPLIED LATIN 694. Translate: i. Hi fines ad Inferiorem partem flu- minis pertinent. 2. Ab eo loco collis nascebatur, passus circiter ducentos Innmus apertus, ab superiore parte silves- tris. 3. Postero die castra ex eo loco summo mota sunt. 4. Locls super ioribus occupatls, itinere exercitum nostrum prohibere conabantur. 5. Legatus aestate missus est qui duas legiones novas in interiorem Galliam deduceret. 6. Cum quisque sibi primum itineris locum peteret profectio similis fugae erat. 7. Prima luce, clamore audi to, omnes fugerunt. 8. Proxima nocte obsides convenlre iussit. 9. In ulteriorem Galliam properemus ad haec conficienda. 10. Num exercitum in ultimas terras mittemus? 695. Word Study. — Explain these English derivatives: infernal superior inferiority intimacy prior supernal posthumous interne ultimo primordial exterior primate ultimatum posterior external proximity prime supreme ulterior extremity 696. unda, -ae, a wave, f. saxum, -I, a rock, n. subsidium, -1, aid, n. suffragium, -I, a ballot, n. triduum, -1, three days' time, n. vadum, -i, a ford, n. verbum, -1, a word, n. vinculum, -I, a bond, chain, n. uxor, uxoris, a wife, f . Learn these words. Practise the declensions. 697. Word Study. — Explain these English derivatives: vesper, vesperis, evening, m. voluntas, voluntatis, will, wish, f . vulnus, vulneris, a wound, n. ver, veris, the spring, n. Veritas, veritatis, the truth, f. victor, victoris, a victor, m. vis (vis) , force, pi., strength, I* vetus, veteris, old. inundate veracious verbatim vulnerable vespers volition invulnerable verity verb undulate victorious victory vim involuntary verbal veracity suffragette adverb voluntary suffrage volunteer verdant redound inveterate subsidiary *The declension of vis is: Singular, vis, (vis) — , vim, vis, vi; Plural, vires, virium, viribus, vires, vires, vlribus. 270 THE VERB. IRREGULAR E6, Ferd, Flo 698. The principal parts of these irregular verbs are: Ed, ire, ii (ivi), itum, to go. Ferd, ferre, tuli, latus, to bear, carry. Fio, fieri, factus sum, to become, happen. Of these verbs the last two are quite irregular. As you can see from the principal parts, the verb fero is apparently composed of the forms of three distinct verbs. In this it is like the verb to be in English and Sum in Latin, which are made up of four separate verbs. Fio is the verb which, as has been already mentioned (Paragraph 357), the Latins used in place of some tenses of the passive of the verb facio, to do, make. 699. Learn the conjugations of these three verbs in Paragraphs 836-7-8. 700. For practice identify the following forms: 1. Is, fers, fls, feras, eas, fias. 2. lens, ferens, fieri, Ibunt, ferrl, laturus esse. 3. Flet, flat, eundo, ferris, fertis, fierent. 701. Translate: 1. IllI vl coactl nos per suos fines Ire passl sunt. 2. Turn saxa magnl ponderis ad murum lata sunt. 3. Acies tertia ab imperii tore nostrls* subsidio* missa erat. 4. Equitatus sociorum hoc in proelio impedlmento* hostibus* erat. .5. Ferte magnam copiam f rumen tl quae auxilio* duel* sit. 6. Flat iustitia. 7. Ad vesperum centurio vulneribus confectus interfectus est. 8. Eamus ad oppidum ut praesidio* oppidanls* slmus. 9. El qui trans vada ierant suls auxilium ferre ausl sunt. 10. Poeta veterem calamitatem popull RomanI et prlstinam virtu tern Gallorum narrabat. *In sentences 3, 4, 5, and 8 there are instances of two datives used with the verb sum. These two datives com- 271 APPLIED LATIN pose the Double Dative construction. One dative is a dative of indirect object (nostrls, 3; hostibus, 4; duel, 5; oppidanis, 8) ; the other dative indicates the purpose for which some- thing serves (subsidio, 3; impediments, 4; auxilio, 5; prae- sidio, 8). Translate sentence 3, were for an aid to our men. 702. Rule. — Double Dative. — Two datives are often used with sum in Latin, one {of reference) indicating the person affected, the other {of purpose) showing that for which a thing serves. 703. 1. The cavalry was sent as an aid to the army. 2. Who hastened to go to the bridge? 3. The shields were a hindrance to the soldiers while righting in the waves. 4. The huge rocks were a fortification for the camp. 5. In the spring beautiful flowers bloom. 704. The Ed and Fero Groups eo, ire, ii, (ivi), itum, to go adeo exeo ineo pereo transeo go to, visit go out go into perish, be lost go across fero, ferre, tuli, latus, to bear, carry adfero confero differo bring to, bring news bring together, collect, bear apart, differ, post- compare pone effero infero offerd bear out bear against, wage bring before, offer perfero praefero profero bear through, endure, bear before, prefer bring forward, extend announce refero transfero bear back, report carry over, transfer For principal parts of fero compounds consult vocabulary. 705. Translate: 1. Neque enim quisquam praeter mer- catores illas urbes adiit, neque ill! ipsi quicquam praeter oram ocean! vlderunt. 2. Facile erit, cum virtu te omnibus 272 THE VERB. IRREGULAR praestemus, de finibus nostrls cum omnibus copiis exire. 3. Vere inito, cum multl periissent, tamen hostes pontem in provinciam nostram translre conatl sunt. 4. Cum esset Caesar in ulteriore Gallia, crebrae ad eum epistulae affere- bantur. 5. Copia maxima frumentl in oppidum sine Caesaris voluntate confertur. 6. Hi omnes lingua, Institutis, legibus, inter se differunt. 7. Nonne quisque trium mensium cibum domo efferet? 8. Cum tridul viam processisset cum omnibus copiis ad urbem occupandam contendit. 9. Altitudo fluminis erat circiter trium pedum. 10. Refer has res ad senatum. 706. 1. After they had proceeded a journey of five days, they saw the enemy drawn up on the hills. 2. Carry away from home food for (of) two months. 3. Though the depth of the river was about (of) eight feet, the knights crossed without delay. 4. I will report these affairs to the senate. 5. If all nations differ in laws and customs there is no com- mon civilization. 707. Word Study. — Explain these English derivatives. Use them in sentences of your own : initial conference ambition proffer confer circuit preference translation initiation dilate transference relation deference offertory transient collation transitory exit elated inference different transit reference obituary defer COMPOUNDS OF SUM 708. In English the verb to be is very common. It is used in almost all relations and can be associated with almost any sort of idea. For instance, we can say 7" am away from town ; / was present at the meeting; my equipment is lacking with respect to a top coat; / am able to write and to read. In such statements the English verb is followed by a group of words 18 273 APPLIED LATIN introduced by a preposition. In Latin the preposition is often attached to the verb Sum, making a Compound Verb. The Important Compounds of Sum are: absum, abesse, afui, to be away, absent (a (ab) with abl.) . adsum, adesse, adfui, to be present (dat.). desum, deesse, defui, to be lacking (dat.). intersum, interesse, interful, to be between, present (dat.). praesum, praesse, praefui, to be in charge of, be head of (dat.). possum, posse, potui, to be able (complem. infin.). supersum, superesse, superfui, to be left, survive (dat.). Most of these verbs are conjugated like the verb sum with- out irregular forms. Possum, to be able, a compound of potis, pote, an adjective meaning able, has some irregular forms brought about by the difficulty in combining potis with the forms of sum. Compare pot-fui, potui, perfect of possum. 709. Learn the conjugation of possum in Paragraph 837. 710. For practice name and translate the following forms: 1. Potes, supersunt, praeest, deesse, poterit. 2. Interest, adsit, possimus, interfuit, potuerit. 3. Praefueramus, potuisse, aberunt, poterat. 711. Translate: 1. Harum omnium gentium fortissimae sunt iiltimae quod a cultu. et humanitate provinciae longissime absunt. 2. Hac oratione habita, omnes qui aderant precibus trlstissimis auxilium a Caesare petere con- abantur. 3. Rebus in adversls fortuna etiam duel optimo nonnumquam deest. 4. Ilia pars hostium quae rlumen oppidi capiendl causa transierat domum redire non potuit. 5. Utinam ill! prlncipes qui summo magistratul praeerant suos clientes rapina prohibere potuissent. 6. Quis precibus captivorum resistere potest? 7. Proelio facto, paucl super- fuerunt. 8. Nonne manus servi fallacis vinculls vinclre potes? 9. Dux barbarus qui nunc oppido praeest nuntium 274 EXERCISES IN DERIVATIVES. SUFFIXES ad Caesarem de pace mittere non poterit. 10. Ponte in flumine facto ut reliquas copias sequi posset, Galba exer- citum tradiixit. 712. i. I am able to tell the truth without shame. 2. He made so great a bridge that the whole army was able to cross in one day. 3. Those who were present praised the oration of Cicero. 4. Because those who were in charge of the town were unwilling to close the gates our men were able to break in quickly. 5. Sometimes words fail an orator. • XLV. EXERCISES IN DERIVATIVES. SUFFIXES 713. Your work so far with the derivation of English words from Latin words has been devoted especially to explaining the meanings of words by separating prefixes (prepositions) from root words. Before finishing this part of the work you should know something of the various suffixes that appear in Latin and later in English and be able to tell what they mean. Some Common Suffixes 714. A. Many Latin words end in -tor (masc.) and -trix (fern.), which indicate agency. Victor, one who conquers (masc); victrix, one who conquers (fern.); administrator, one who manages (masc.) ; administratrix, one who manages (fern.). Similarly, pastor, rector, curator, executrix. B. Many Latin words end in -men, which indicates the thing accomplished : lu-men, the result of the sun's shining, carmen, the result of the poet's singing; agmen limen. C. Many Abstract words are formed in Latin by the end- ings -tia, -tas, and -tudo, denoting qualities and conditions. 275 APPLIED LATIN amicitia, friendliness; civitas, the state; latitudo, breadth. D. The Endings of many adjectives mean pertaining to or connected with. Examples: Rom-anus connected with Rome, Roman. mflit-aris " the soldier, military. fer-tilis " fero, to bear, fertile. eques-ter " a knight, equestrian. loqu-ax " loquor, to speak, full of talk fac-ilis " facio, to do, easy, do-able. aur-eus ' ' " aurum, gold, golden. When trying to make out the meanings of adjectives separate the verb or noun from the suffix and then use the ordinary English adjective which is based on the mean- ing of the root word, as: Publi-cus (populus, people), public, popular; frigi-dus (frigus, cold), cold, frigid. 715. In English nouns, agency is indicated by the suffixes -er or -or ; as, carrier, conductor. Abstract nouns have the suffixes -ness; as, goodness, fulness: -ship; as, apprentice- ship; -hood, as childhood; and -dom, as freedom. Adjec- tives have many suffixes, all meaning pertaining to; as waxen, harmful, stormy. 716. Word Study. — Examine the word lists at the end of this book, Topic LIII, for words with suffixes. Collect some representative examples of each kind. Quiz. — What is a suffix? What Latin suffixes denote agency; result of action? Why is pertaining to a compre- hensive meaning for adjectival suffixes? Can you name any more suffixes common in English nouns or adjectives? Consider -ist, -age, -ance, -y, -ure, -ent, -ous. Pick out the Latin derivatives in the following extract: 276 EXERCISES IN DERIVATIVES. SUFFIXES 717. Mr. Attorney-General had to inform the jury that the prisoner before them, though young in years, was old in treasonable practices, which claimed the forfeit of his life. That this correspondence with the public enemy had been continuous. That it was certain the prisoner had been in the habit of passing and repassing between France and England, on secret business of which he could give no honest account. That if it were not in the nature of traitor- ous ways to thrive, the real wickedness and guilt of his ways might have remained undiscovered. That Providence, how- ever, had put it into the heart of a person who was beyond fear and beyond reproach, to ferret out the nature of the prisoner's schemes and, struck with horror, to disclose them to his Majesty's Chief Secretary of State and most honor- able Privy Council. That this patriot would be produced before them. That his position and attitude were on the whole sublime. That he had been the prisoner's friend, but at once in an auspicious and an evil hour detecting his in- famy, had resolved to immolate the traitor he could no longer cherish in his bosom on the sacred altar of his coun- try. That, if statues were decreed in Britain, as in ancient Greece and Rome, to public benefactors, this shining citizen would assuredly have had one. That virtue, as had been observed by the poets, was in a manner contagious; more especially the bright virtue known as patriotism. That the lofty example of this immaculate and unimpeachable wit- ness for the crown had communicated itself to the prisoner's servant and had engendered in him a holy determination 277 APPLIED LATIN to examine his master's table drawers and pockets and secrete his papers. — Dickens' " Tale of Two Cities." XLVI. THE SUBJECT. CONSTRUCTIONS THAT RE- PLACE A NOUN AS SUBJECT. INFINITIVE. NOUN CLAUSE 718. In the preceding paragraphs of this book you have met with sentences in Latin which have followed the ordi- nary sentence structure, that is, noun, subject, noun, object, and verb with adverbial modifiers. If in actual speech or writing sentences should follow this form exactly, every sentence would be like every other sentence. Reading or speaking would be very monotonous. To guard against this eternal sameness the Latins often used an infinitive or a clause in place of a noun as either the subject or the object of a verb. In the following pages we shall take up some of these variations of the subject and the object. The Infinitive as Subject, with Sum 719. In Paragraph 572 you learned that the Infinitive is partly a noun and partly a verb. As a noun the infinitive may be used as the subject of a sentence, especially with the verb sum. This is true both in Latin and in English. Examine these English sentences: 1. To see is to believe. 2. To see the sun is pleasant. In the first sentence to see is an infinitive used as the sub- ject of the verb which is a part of the verb to be. To believe is an infinitive used as a predicate noun. In the second sen- tence to see the sun is the complete subject of the verb is. In this case the words the sun compose the direct object of the 278 THE SUBJECT Infinitive. The object of an infinitive stands in the accu- sative case, unless the verb requires some case other than the accusative for its object. 720. Compose some English sentences in which the infini- tive, with and without an object, is used as the subject. 72 1 . Examine these Latin sentences : i. Videre est credere. To see is to believe. 2. Solem videre bonum est. To see the sun is good. From these sentences you see that the infinitive may be used in place of a noun as subject, in Latin as it is in English. 722. Rule. — Infinitive as Subject. — The Infinitive with or without a subject or object may be used as the subject of a verb, especially the verb sum. The Infinitive as Subject of Impersonal Verbs 723. The verb sum as used in the preceding Paragraph is an Impersonal Verb, but the name impersonal is usually restricted to a certain class of verbs which occur only in the third person singular and always have neuter subjects. Such verbs are called impersonal because they have neuter (impersonal) subjects. The infinitive or a clause, because neuter in gender, is often the subject of such neuter verbs. 724. The following impersonal verbs commonly take the infinitive or a clause as the subject : licet, licere, licuit (licitum es It), it is permitted (dat.) oportet, oportere, oportuit, it is necessary. decet, decere, decuit, it is jilting. praestat, i praestare, praestitit, it is better. constat, constare, constitit, it is agreed. libet, libere, libuit, it suits (dat.). placet, placere, placuit ( placitum • 279 est) ,it is pleasing (dat.). APPLIED LATIN 725. Learn the conjugation of the impersonal verb licet given in Paragraph 834. As you have noted from the conjugation of licet these verbs have but one form, the third person singular, of each tense. When these verbs have a subject expressed it is regularly an infinitive either present or perfect. 726. For practice translate the following forms: Licet, oportebat, constitit, libere, placuit, praestabit. A Clause as Subject of Impersonal Verbs 727. The following verbs usually take a clause intro- duced by ut, that, with the subjunctive present or imperfect as their subjects. additur and accedit, it is added. accidit, it happens. restat, it remains. contingit, it happens. fit, it happens. sequitur, it follows. 728. Rule. — The Infinitive or a Clause as Subject. — Many impersonal verbs take the infinitive or a clause as their subjects. 729. Translate: 1. Eadem nocte accidit ut luna esset plena. 2. Nobis sine maleficio iter per provinciam facere liceat. 3. Caesarem satis frumenti ad exercitum mittere oportebit. 4. Patriam amare omnes elves optimos decet. 5 . Gallorum quam Romanorum servitutem perf erre praestat. 6. Nobis ad castra Ire libet neque hanc occasionem negoti bene gerendi amittere. 7. Plurimas naves in ilium locum ubi Caesarem primum bellum gesturum esse constabat celeriter coegerunt. 8. Sequitur ut colles et flumina huius terrae tibi monstrem. 9. Contigit ut illo die a senatii abessem. 10. Quam ob rem factum est ut bellum in Gallia gereretur. 730. 1 . It is now possible for me to lead my horse to the 280 • THE OBJECT bridge. 2. It will be necessary for us to (we must) make peace. 3. On the same day it happened that the sun shone with clear light. 4. It happened that Caesar was at Rome on that day. 5. It is agreed that the enemy will betake themselves home. Translation. The Creation of the World 731. Caelum et terram intra sex dies Deus creavit. Primo die lucem fecit. Secundo die fecit firmamentum, quod caelum vocavit. Tertio die aquas in unum locum coegit et e terra plantas et arbores eduxit. Quarto die solem et limam et Stellas fecit. Qulnto die aves quae volitant in aere, et pisces qui natant in aquls; sexto die omnia ani- mantia, postremo hominem fecit; et die septimo quievit. For unfamiliar words in the translation exercises consult the general vocabulary. XLVII. THE OBJECT IN ENGLISH EXPRESSED BY THE GENITIVE IN LATIN 732. The regular case of the direct object of a verb is the accusative. This is true both in English and in Latin. In English there are few, if any, exceptions to this rule. In Latin some verbs, which in English govern an accusative as object, may be followed by some other case. In Latin a genitive, dative, or ablative may replace an English accu- sative. Latin Verbs that take a Genitive 733. A. Verbs of Memory or Forgetfulness. memini, meminisse, , to keep in mind remember. oblivlscor, oblivisci, oblltus sum, to forget. Memini is a defective verb ; that is, only a few of its forms 281 APPLIED LATIN exist. Memini, though perfect tense in appearance, is used as a present; thus, memini means / remember, memineram, / was remembering, etc. 734. Examine these sentences: i. Ciceronis memini. / keep Cicero in mind, I remember Cicero. 2. Iniuriarum omnium obliviscor. I forget all injuries. 735. B. Impersonal Verbs. pudet, pudere, puduit, it shames. piget, pigere, piguit, it grieves. paenitet, paenitere, paenituit, it repents. taedet, taedere, taeduit, it bores. miseret, miserere, miseruit, it pities. 736.' Examine these sentences: i . Tuarum rerum me miseret. / pity your ajfairs (it pities me of your affairs) . 2 . Sui sceleris se paenitebit. He will repent his wickedness. Each of these verbs is impersonal. They are accompanied by an accusative of the person who feels the emotion indicated by the verb, and the genitive of the cause of the emotion. Latin Adjectives followed by the Genitive 737. In like manner there are some Latin adjectives which are followed by an objective genitive. plenus, -a, -um, full of. inscius, -a, -um, unconscious of. particeps, participis, sharing in. memor, memoris, mindful of. peritus, -a, -um, skilled in. oblitus, -a, -um, forgetful of. imperitus, -a, -um, unskilled in. expers, expertis, devoid of. cupidus, -a, -um, desirous of. avidus, -a, -um, desirous of. 738. Translate : i . Omnes gentes antlquarum iniuriarum meminerint. 2. Calami tatis relpublicae obllvisci non pos- sum. 3. Galba peritissimus rel mllitaris erat. 4. Me sceleris nuper fact! paenitet. 5. Omnes carrl qui nunc in ilia via 282 THE OBJECT manent plenl frumentl sunt. 6. Me scelerum nonnumquam pudet. 7. Dum nos inter hos elves manebimus consuetudi- num eorum memores slmus. 8. Roman! praeter omnes gentes avidi laudis fuerunt. 9. Numquam me amlcitiae tuae paenitebit. 10. Verborum huius consulis me semper taedet. 739. 1 . I will remember the words of the leader for many years. 2. I am disgusted with the story. 3. We do not praise leaders who are unskilled in military affairs. 4. In the spring the rivers are full of water. 5. We pity your grief . Translation. Joseph and His Brethren 740. Iacobus habuit duodecim filios, inter quos erat Iosephus. Hunc pater prae ceteris amabat, quod senex eum genuerat. IllI togam textam e fills varii coloris dederat. Quam ob causam Iosephus erat suls fratribus invlsus, prae- sertim postquam els duplex somnium narravit, quo futura eius magnitude portendebatur. Ilium tantopere oderant ut eum amice loqul non possent. Haec porro erant Iosephi somnia. "Ligabamus," inquit, "simul manipulos in agro. Ecce manipulus meus surgebat et rectus stabat. Vestrl autem manipuli circumstantes meum venerabantur. Postea, in somnis solem, lunam, et undecim stellas me adorantes vldl." Fratres igitur el invidebant, et pater rem tacitus con- slderabat. Quodam die cum fratres Iosephi greges procul pascerent, ipse doml remanserat. Iacobus eum ad fratres mlsit. Qui Iosephum venientem videntes consilium illius occidendl ceperunt. u Ecce," dicebant, u somniator venit. Occldamus ilium et in puteum proiciamus. Dlcemus patrl, 'fera devoravit Iosephum.'" 283 APPLIED LATIN XLVIII. THE OBJECT IN ENGLISH EXPRESSED BY THE DATIVE IN LATIN 741. Many verbs in Latin are followed by the dative, which in English are followed by an accusative. Consider these examples: i . I envy the successful general. 2. He pardoned the offenders without exacting any penalty. 3. The army threatened the fortified town. In each of these sentences the English verb is followed by the accusative case. If, however, you will consider what is meant by the verb, you will see that the direct object is really included in the verb itself. What appears in English as the direct object is in reality the indirect object. "/ envy the general" means I feel envy for the general. "He pardoned the offenders" means he gave pardon to the offenders. "The army threatened the town" means the army made a threat to the town. Thus you see why the Latins used the dative after such verbs. The commonest verbs which take the dative are: faved (2), to favor. imperd (1), to command. placed (2), to please. pared (2), to obey. displiced (2), to displease. resistd (3), to resist. fidd (3), to trust. repugnd (1), to resist. diffidd (3), to distrust. invided (2), to envy. credo (3), to believe. igndscd (3), to pardon. persuaded (2), to persuade. pared (3), to spare. noced (2), to harm. servid (4), to serve. studed (2), to desire. minor (1), to threaten. Learn the principal parts of these verbs in the general vocabulary. 284 THE OBJECT 742. In like manner certain Latin adjectives are followed by the dative. These are : acceptus, -a, -um, acceptable aequalis, aequale, equal to. to. idoneus, -a, -um, suitable for. par, paris, equal to. amicus, -a, -um, friendly to. dispar, disparis, unequal to. invisus, -a, -um, hateful to. 743. Translate: i. Fortuna fortibus favet. 2. Quam ob rem el placuit ut ad ducem legatos mitteret. 3. Huic fabulae libenter credidissem si mihi narrata esset. 4. Hostes nobis facile nocere non possunt. 5. Num haec dona maxime accepta Caesarl fuerunt? 6. Haec causa his rebus omnibus repugnabat quod obses nobilis amicus populo Romano erat. 7. Si pacem petent nos his sceleribus Ignoscemur. 8. Flnitiml nostrl nobis inimlcl sunt et nostrae virtuti invident. 9. Legatus cuplditate adductus novls rebus studebat. 10. Locum pugnando idoneum monstrabant. 744. 1. We believe the words of our friends. 2. Spare those nations which are friendly to your fatherland. 3. What commander unskilled in military affairs dares to issue commands to us? 4. No oration can be found equal to his courage. 5. The other centurions envied Galba. Translation. Joseph Sold into Egypt 745. Ruben, qui erat natu maximus fratres a tant5 scelere deterrebat. " Nollte," inquiebat, " puerum inter- ficere. Est enim frater noster. Demittite eum potius in hanc foveam." In animo habebat Iosephum ex eorum manibus llberare et ilium extrahere e fovea atque ad patrem reducere. His verbis ad mltius consilium deductl sunt. Ubi Iosephus ad fratres suos pervenit el togam detraxerunt qua indiitus erat et eum in foveam detriiserunt. Deinde cum conse- dissent ad sumendum cibum, conspexerunt merca tores qui 285 APPLIED LATIN Aegyptum cum camells varia aromata portantibus pete- bant. Ulis in mentem venit Iosephum illls mercatoribus vender e. Qui Iosephum vigintl nummis argentels emerunt eumque in Aegyptum duxerunt. Tunc fratres Iosephi tinxerunt togam eius in sanguine haedi quern occiderant, et earn ad patrem cum his verbis miserunt: " Invenimus hanc togam." Quam cum agnovisset, pater exclamavit, "Toga fllii mel est. Fera pessima Iosephum devoravit." Deinde vestem scldit. Omnes fllii eius convenerant ut dolorem patris lenlrent sed Iacobus consolationem accipere noluit dlxitque, "Ego maerens cum filio meo in sepulchrum de- scendam." XLIX. THE OBJECT IN ENGLISH EXPRESSED BY TWO ACCUSATIVES IN LATIN Two Accusatives in Latin and English 746. Often verbs in both Latin and English are followed by two objects, each of which is in the accusative case. Examine these English sentences : i. They called him king and father of his people. 2. The American voters elected Mr. Wilson President. 3. I appoint you superintendent. *7A*7. In each of these examples there are two accusatives following the verb. Such a construction is common after verbs of electing, choosing, calling, nominating, as : appello, appellare, appellavi, appellatus, to call, name. creo, creare, creavi, creatus, to create, elect. dico, dicere, dixi, dictus, to say, appoint. nomino, nominare, nominavi, nominatus, to nominate, name. facio, facere, feci, factus, to make. duco, ducere, duxi, ductus, to lead, consider. habed, habere, habui, habitus, to hold, regard. 286 THE OBJECT 748. Rule. — Two Accusatives. — Two nouns in the accu- sative may be used as the objects of verbs meaning to elect, choose, call, nominate. 749. Translate: i. Caesarem patrem appellemus. 2. Cum Galli aliquem regem creavissent, scuto eum sustule- runt. 3. Tune Ciceronem praetorem nominavistl? 4. Cives laeti me consulem rursus facient. 5. Quis orationes Gal- bae egregias ducit? 1. I consider you an enemy of the republic. 2. We will elect these two men praetors. 3. I was elected king by the chieftains of Gaul. Two Accusatives. A Noun and an Infinitive 750. In Paragraph 719 you learned that the infinitive, being a noun, could be used as a subject or as a predicate noun. The infinitive is also frequently used as an object. Study these English sentences: 1. I order you to bring (the bringing of) the book. 2. He forbids them to leave (the leaving of) the table. In each of these examples the infinitive is used as the object of the main verb. 751. These Latin verbs are followed by an object Infini- tive with noun subject. iubeo, iubere, iussi, iussus, to order. veto, vetare, vetui, vetftus, to forbid. patior, pati, passus sum, to permit. cogo, cogere, coegi, coactus, to compel, force. Examine these Latin sentences: 1. Iubeo te scutum portare. I bid you carry the shield. 2 . Coegit eos obsides dare. He forced them to give hostages. This construction is often called the Object Infinitive. 287 APPLIED LATIN The nouns te and eos are subjects of the infinitives portare and dare. Remember that the subject of an infinitive regularly is put in the accusative case. Do not confuse this construction with the Complementary Infinitive. The Object Infinitive regularly has a subject; the Complemen- tary Infinitive has none. 752. Eule. — Object Infinitive. — An infinitive, with sub- ject in the accusative, may be used after the verbs mentioned in Paragraph 751 as an object. 753. Translate: 1. Omni spe reditionis sublata, dux eos trium mensium cibum efferre iussit. 2. Caesar ab opere singulos legatos discedere vetuerat. 3. Ne eos per nostros fines Ire patiamur. 4. Suls moribus captivum ex vinculls dlcere coegerunt. 5. Oppido cap to, Caesar milites praedam caper e vetuit. 754. 1. Did you order the citizens to elect this man a praetor? 2. The Romans forced the enemy to send messen- gers concerning peace. 3. I will not permit you to free this slave. Translation. The Birth of Moses 755. Mulier Hebraea f Ilium peperit. Quern cum elegan- tem videret, servare voluit. Quare eum tribus mensibus abscondit, sed cum eum diutius occultare non posset, fiscel- lam scirpeam sumpsit quam bitumine ac pice linivit. Deinde Infantulum intus posuit et eum inter arundines rlpae fluminis exposuit. Secum tinam comitem, sororem pueri, habebat, quam stare procul iussit ut eventum rei exploraret. Mox filia Pharaonis ad flumen venit ut corpus ablueret. Fiscellam in arundinibus haerentem prospexit 288 THE OBJECT unamque e famulabus suls illuc mlsit. Aperta fiscella, cernens parvulum vagientem, illlus miserata est. " Iste est," inquit, " unus ex infantibus Hebrae6rum. ,, Tunc soror pueri, accedens, "Vlsne," ait, " ut mulierem Hebraeam accessam quae parvulum nutriat" et matrem vocavit. Cui filia Pharaonis puerum alendum promissa mercede dedit. Itaque mater puerum nutrivit et adultum reddidit filiae Pharaonis quae ilium adoptavit et Mosem, id est, servatum ab aquls nominavit. L. THE OBJECT IN ENGLISH EXPRESSED BY THE ABLATIVE IN LATIN The Ablative after Certain Verbs 756. A number of verbs which in English are followed by the accusative case in Latin govern an ablative. Examine these English sentences: i. They used the skins of animals for clothes. 2. We have enjoyed a long period of prosperity. 3. The barbarians ate all kinds of meat. In these sentences the objects of the verbs are in the accusative case. In Latin these same verbs are followed by the ablative case. 757. utor, uti, usus sum, to use. fruor, frui, fructus sum, to enjoy. fungor, fungi, functus sum, to do one's duty, perform. potior, potiri, potitus sum, to seize, to get possession of. vescor, vesci, > to eat. 758. Rule. — The Deponent verbs utor, fruor, fungor, potior, vescor, and their compounds are followed by the abla- tive case. 19 289 APPLIED LATIN The Ablative after Certain Adjectives 759. Certain Latin adjectives govern the ablative case. dignus, -a, -urn, worthy. indignus, -a, -um, unworthy. contentus, -a, -um, content with, fretus, -a, -um, relying on. praeditus, -a, -um, endowed with. 760. Translate: i. Galli eodem consilio usi sua oppida aedificiaque omnia incenderunt. 2. Eos quos laude dlgnos ducimus semper laudemus. 3. Si vos libertate content! fuissetis, numquam regem ex aliena gente creavissetis. 4. Omnibus in vita rebus fruuntur una cum els quorum se amicitiae dederunt. 5. Freti virtu te eastern's hostium celeriter potiamur. 6. Poetae sunt homines arte egregia, fabularum dlcendarum praeditl. 761. 1. While we are in the country let us enjoy all the flowers. 2. Be content with small things. 3. The inhabi- tants of this island used lead and gold. 4. When Galba seized a town he forbade the soldiers to injure the towns- people. Translation. Crossing the Red Sea 762. Post paucos dies multitudo Hebraeorum ad lltus maris rubrl pervenit ibique castra posuit. Brevi tempore regem paenituit quod tot mllia hominum dimisisset et ingenti exercitu collecto eos persectitus est. Hebrael cum vldissent ex una parte se marl interclusos esse, ex altera parte Pharaonem cum omnibus copils Instare magno timore correptl sunt. Tunc Deus Mosi: " Protende," inquit, " dexteram tuam in mare et divide aquas ut illae Hebraeis gradientibus iter siccum praebeant." Fecit Moses quod iusserat Deus. Cum manum super mare extensam teneret aquae divisae sunt, et intumescentes hinc et inde pendebant. 290 THE OBJECT. NOUN CLAUSES Flavit etiam ventus vehemens quo alveus exsiccatus est. Tunc Hebrael in mare siccum ingressl sunt : Erat enim aqua tamquam murus a dextra eorum et laeva. Rex quoque Aegyptius Hebraeos gradientes Insecutus mare qua patebat cum universo exercitu ingredl non dubitavit. Cum Aegyptil in medio marl progrederentur Dominus eorum currus sub- vertit et equites deiecit. Metu percussl Aegyptil fugere coeperunt at Deus MosI dixit, " Extende rursus dextram in mare ut aquae in locum suum revertantur." Paruit Moses et statim aquae refluentes Aegyptios et eorum currus et equites obruerunt. Uni versus exercitus Pharaonis in mediis fluctibus deletus est nee unus nuntius tantae cladis super- fuit. LI. THE OBJECT. NOUN CLAUSES A. Clauses of Purpose 763. In the preceding Paragraphs you have seen that certain cases other than the accusative are employed in Latin to translate expressions which in English appear as the direct object of the verb. In Paragraph 572 you found that the infinitive could be used as the subject or the object of a verb. These cases are sufficient to show that Latin does not follow unvaryingly the normal structure of noun {subject), verb {predicate), and noun {object). We must now take up some examples of the direct object replaced by a clause (noun clause). The Object Clause of Purpose 764. Examine these English sentences: 1. I advise him to act {that he act) as mediator. 291 APPLIED LATIN 2. Caesar persuades Galba to send {that he send) aid. 3. Cicero urged Catiline to depart (that he should depart). In each of these sentences the part in italics composes a Clause. These clauses are noun clauses because they take the place of a single noun, as in 1, his acting as mediator, in 2, the despatch of aid, in 3, Catiline's departure. If you will consider these noun clauses accurately you will see that in each case the clause represents something which would naturally take place in the future. Object clauses of this kind include also an idea of purpose or expectation. They are consequently Object Clauses of Purpose. They are introduced by the regular purpose particles ut (affirmative) and ne (negative), and are followed by the present or im- perfect subjunctive according to Sequence. 765. Object Clauses of Purpose often follow these verbs : moneo, monere, monui, monitus, to advise, warn (ace.)* mando, mandare, mandavi, mandatus, to enjoin, command (dat.). hortor, hortari, hortatus sum, to urge (ace). impetro, impetrare, impetravi, impetratus, to gain a request (a(&b)withabl.). persuaded, persuadere, persuasi, persuasus, to persuade (dat.). permitto, permittere, permisl, permissus, to permit (dat.). impero, imperare, imperavi, imperatus, to command (dat.). oro, orare, orayi, oratus, to plead (ace). peto, petere, petivi, petitus, to seek (a (ab) with abl). rogd, rogare, rogavi, rogatus, to ask (ace). * These verbs are accompanied by a dative, accusative or ablative of the person directly affected. The subjunctive mood in the present and imperfect tenses is employed in object clauses of purpose as in the ordinary clause of purpose. 292 THE OBJECT. NOUN CLAUSES 766. Rule. — Object clauses of purpose take the present and imperfect subjunctive introduced by ut, that {affirmative), ne, that not {negative). 767. Translate: i. Caesar legatum monuit ut omnes centuriones a legione discedere vetaret. 2. Huic mando ut, omnibus rebus vlsls, ad me celerrime revertatur. 3. Gallo cuidam persuasum est ut ad hostes translret. 4. Mllites longiore oratione cohortatus ne animo perturbarentur proell committendl slgnum dedit. 5. A flnitimis suls impetra- verunt ut per fines obsides Ire paterentur. 6. His explora- toribus imperavit ut omnes clvitates adlrent et hortarentur ut populi RomanI fidem sequerentur. 7. Galll petuntur sibi concilium totlus Galliae in diem certum vocare liceat. 8. His mllitibus permittamus ut oppido potiantur. 9. Eo tempore oravit ne quid Caesar gravius in fratrem statueret. 10. Cum rogarent ut eius voluntate sibi iter facere liceret impetraverunt. 768. 1. I urge you not to send aid to our enemies. 2. Who warned Caesar to fear the consuls at Rome? 3. We will order these men to send grain to the city. 4. He asked his brother not to lead the cavalry. 5. They sought the right to occupy the plain. Translation. The Birth of Samson 769. Cum Hebrael in potestate Philistaeorum et ab illis affllgerentur, Samson, futurus ultor hostium, natus est. Puer crevit; intonsam habuit barbam. Incredibili corporis robore fuit. Obvium leonem mami interfecit. Samson adultus Philistaeos multls cladibus affecit. Cepit trecentas vulpes quarum caudls accensas lampades alligavit et in hostium agros immlsit. Tunc forte messis matura erat; 293 APPLIED LATIN ita facile incendium fuit. Omnes segetes vineae et oleae exustae sunt; nee inimlcam gentem varus incommodls vexare destitit. Traditus Philistaeis rupit vincula quibus constrictus erat; et maxilla aslnl arrepta hoc telo quod casus dederat, mllle hostium prostravit. Quodam die Samson urbem Philistaeorum ingressus est, ibique pernoctaturus videbatur. Philistaei occasionem cap- tantes portas obserari iusserunt ne quis exlret. Per totam noctem silentes expectabant ut Samsonem mane exeuntem interficerent. At Samson media nocte surrexit, et ad portam urbis venit quam cum clausam invenisset humerls cum posti- bus et serls sustulit atque in verticem montis vicini portavit. Tandem Philistaei qui Samsonem comprehendere non potuerant illius uxorem pecunia corriiperunt ut ea virum proderet. Mulier viro persuasit ut sibi causam tantae vir- tutis indicaret; et ubi vires sclvit eius in capillis sitas esse, caput dormientis totondit atque ita eum Philistaeis tradidit. IllI effosls oculis vinctum in carcerem deiecerunt dhlque ludibrio habuerunt. Sed spatio temporis crinis acclsus crescere et cum crlne virtus redire coepit; iamque Samson recepti roboris conscius iustae ultionis tempus opperiebatur. Erat Philistaeis mos, cum dies festos agerent, Samsonem prodiicere quasi in pompam publicam capt que Insultare. Die quodam cum publ cum convlvium celebraretur Sam- sonem adducl iubent. Domus in qua omnis populus et principes Philistaeorum epulabantur subnlxa erat duabus columnis mirae magnitudinis. Samson adductus inter col- 294 THE OBJECT. NOUN CLAUSES umnas statuitur. Turn ille occasione utens columnas con- cussit et turba omnis rulna domus obruta est simulque Samson ipse cum hostibus non inultus occubuit. Quiz. — How many words in Paragraph 803 can you ex- plain and use? B. Clauses of Fearing 770. Just as there are object clauses after certain verbs which express the purpose or intention of the verb, so there are noun clauses following verbs and other expressions which involve the idea of Fearing. In such an English sen- tence as this : We fear (that the enemy may make an attack) the part enclosed in the parenthesis, though an entire clause, is really the direct object of the verb fear. This whole clause could have been expressed by a single noun. For instance, what we really feared was a fear, thus, we fear (a fear). If, however, any one were to speak thus without telling at the same time what his fear was, no one would pay much atten- tion to the utterance. Consequently it is necessary always to enlarge upon the idea which would be contained in the noun fear. From this comes the origin of the object clause of fearing. Such a clause being in reality the enlargement of a single noun is called a noun clause. 771. Object Clauses of Fearing follow these Latin verbs: timed, timere, timui, to fear. vereor, vereri, veritus sum, to fear. metuo, metuere, metui, to fear. 772. Examine these Latin sentences: 1 . Veremur ne hostes impet um faciant. We fear that the enemy will make an attack. 295 APPLIED LATIN 2 . Veremur ut hostes impetum f aciant. We fear that the enemy will not make an attack. The underscored words in each case compose an Object Clause of Fearing. Notice that these clauses are introduced by the particles ne and ut. In such clauses the word ne introduces a clause expressing a positive fear; the word ut a negative fear. In the other uses of ut and ne you have ob- served that ut has introduced affirmative statements, ne, negative. In fearing clauses these words have a reverse sig- nification. You may feel some uncertainty about being able to tell the difference between the clauses which employ ut and ne. Always note carefully the verb which precedes the clause. The verbs of fearing, vereor, timeo, etc., will always serve as a signal, a veritable red flag, to prepare you for the approach of an object clause of fearing. 773. Rule. — Object clauses following verbs or other ex- pressions of fearing take their verbs in the subjunctive, intro- duced by the particles ne {affirmative) and ut {negative). The tenses of the Subjunctive used follow the regular rule for Sequence. 774. Translate : i . Vereor ne dux suum exercitum trans flumen tradiicat. 2. Timebat ut milites iter facerent. 3. Quis veritur ne obsides fugiant? 4. Verentur ne vulnera multa a sociis suls accepta sint. 5. Itaque veritus ut oppi- dum capl posset Caesar impetu. destitit. 6. Timeo ne Galba milites obsides interficere iusserit. 7. Metuebat ut acies in loco ptignando idoneo Instructa esset. 8. Verebatur ut nos legatos de pace ad se mitteremus. 9. Timeo ut tibi haec dona dare possim. 10. Metuebamus ne castra ab ils viderentur. 296 THE OBJECT. NOUN CLAUSES 775. i. I fear that he will command the soldiers to cross the river. 2. Who fears that the sun will not shine to-day? 3. They feared that they would not have sufficient grain. 4. Having feared that the enemy would flee without a battle Caesar ordered his cavalry to hasten. 5. I fear that you will not praise my poems. Translation. David and Goliath 776. Secutum est bellum cum Philistaels. Cum acies in conspectti essent, Philistaeus quldam, nomine Goliathus, vir mlrae magnitudinis, ante ordines progressus est et unum ex Hebraels ad singulare certamen saepe provocabat. Lorica squamata induitur. Ocreas in cruribus aereas habe- bat ; cassis aerea caput eius operiebat et clipeus aereus humeros tegebat. Turn Saul magna praemia et filiae niiptias el promisit qui provocantis spolia retulisset. At nemo contra ilium exlre audebat et Goliathus suam Hebraels ignaviam cum irrlsu ac ludibrio exprobrabat. David Igno- minia popull sul commotus se sponte ad piignandum obtulit. Itaque adductus est ad Saulem qui eius aetate conslderata ptignae diffidebat. " Non poteris," inquit, " adolescentulus cum viro robustissimo pugnare." Respondit David, a N6lI timere, O rex. Cum oves patris mel pascerem leo gregem invasit ovemque corripuit. Ego ilium persecutus occidl et ovem e faucibus illlus eripul. Ursum pariter interfeci. Deus qui me a leone et urso defendit me quoque a Philistaeo isto defendet." Turn Saul, " Abl," inquit, "cum ista flducia Deus te adiuvet." Saul ipse sua iuvenl arma accomodare voluit. Galeam 297 APPLIED LATIN capitl eius imposuit, lorica pectus circumtexit, latus gladio accinxit. David vero iis impeditus armls quibus non erat assuetus vix incedere poterat. Quare onus incommodum deposuit. Sumpsit autem pedum pastorale quo uti con- sueverat et fundam cum qulnque lapidibus in sacculo. Sic armatus adversus Philistaeum processit. Accedebat ex adverso Goliathus qui viso adolescente, " Num," inquit, " me canem esse putas qui me cum baculo adgrediaris? " Cui David respondit, " Tu venis ad me cum gladio et hasta et clipeo, ego autem venio in nomine Domini exercituum quern probrls lacessere ausus es." Tunc lapide funda misso, Philistaeum in fronte percussit et hum! prostravit currensque suum iacenti gladium detraxit quo caput ill! praecidit. Ea re perculsi Philistaei in fugam vers! sunt et victoriam Hebraeis concesserunt. Quiz. — How many words in Paragraphs 804, 805, can you explain and use? C. Indirect Questions 777. Look back for a moment to Paragraphs 258-260. In those paragraphs you learned to distinguish the Interrog- ative sentence: that is, the sentence which asks a question. The particles ne, nonne, num, served then to indicate this type of sentence. You had no difficulty in recognizing a direct question because of the presence of these words. Sometimes it becomes necessary to repeat a question which has already been asked. Repeated questions are called Indirect Questions. Examine these English sentences: 298 THE OBJECT. NOUN CLAUSES i. Mr. Jones to Mr. Smith: "Hello! Smith, what do you think of the war?" 2. Mr. Smith later to Mr. Brown: " Jones asked me to- day what I thought of the war" In the first sentence Mr. Jones put a direct question to Mr. Smith; in the second Mr. Smith repeated the question indirectly to Mr. Brown. The words " What I thought of the war" compose an Indirect Question. Notice that in English the direct question is followed by a mark of inter- rogation, the indirect question merely by a period. An indirect question is really a noun clause in that it takes the place of a single noun. This will be apparent if you supply instead of the clause " What I thought of the war " the word question. 778. How are you to recognize the noun clause contain- ing an indirect question? In the first place indirect ques- tions can be recognized by the fact that they are always introduced by an interrogative word. The most frequent introductory words are: quis, quid, who, what. cur, why. qui, quae, quod, who, which, what, utrum, whether, an, or. qualis, quale, what sort of. sive . . . sive, whether . . . or. quantus, -a, -um, how much. si, if, whether. quando, when. num, whether. In the second place the nature of the verb upon which the indirect question depends is an indication of the kind of clause to be expected. Indirect questions usually follow (i) verbs which themselves ask a question, as — quaero quaerere, quaesivi, quaesitus, to ask (a (ab) with abl.). rogo, rogare, rogavi, rogatus, to ask {ace). posco, poscere, poposci, to demand (a. {ah) with abl.). 299 APPLIED LATIN (2) verbs which mean to consider, deliberate, wonder, as- certain, and doubt. With each of these verbs there is an idea of interrogation implied. cognosco, cognoscere, cognovi, cognitus, to know. constituo, constituere, cdnstitui, constitutes, to determine. exspecto, exspectare, exspectavi, exspectatus, to expect, await. intellego, intellegere, intellexi, intellectus, to understand. 779. Examine these sentences: 1. I ask what he is doing. Rogo quid faciat. 2. I asked what he was doing. Rogavi quid faceret. 3. I asked what he had done. Rogavi quid fecisset. 4. I asked whether he was victorious or was defeated. Rogavi utrum vinceret an vinceretur. In these sentences notice first that the verb in the indirect question is in the subjunctive ; second, that the tense of the subjunctive used depends upon the regular rule for the sequence of tenses ; and third, that the clause is, in each case, introduced by an interrogative word. In the fourth sen- tence there is an example of the double indirect question. In such a sentence there are two interrogative clauses, each introduced by an interrogative word, the first by utrum {whether), the second by an, or. Two other words similarly used are : sive . . . sive, whether . . . or 780. Rule. — Indirect questions regularly have their verbs in the subjunctive mood and their tenses follow the rule for the sequence of tenses. 781. Translate: 1. Rogavi cur mea carmina laudavisset. 2. Quaero unde milites frumentum porta verint. 3. Popo- scerunt a captlvis quantae copiae hostibus essent. 4. Ro- 300 THE OBJECT. NOUN CLAUSES gavimus utrum illl amid an inimlcl essent. 5. Non scivistis slve exercitus vlcisset slve victus esset. 6. Cognoscere volul quanto in periculo urbs esset. 7. Constituere non possum num equitatus hodie Romam perveniat. 8. Hostes exspec- tabant si nostri hanc paliidem translrent. 9. Intellegere volumus quales copiae missae sint. 10. Nuntius qui missus erat nobis narravit quae res factae essent. 782. 1. I do not know whose horse this is. 2. Ask the captives from what direction the enemy have come. 3. We waited (to see) if the cavalry would cross the marsh. 4. Let us ask what has been done. 5. He could not deter- mine who had taken the gold. Translation. David and Absalom 783. Absolon, fllius Davidis, paternum regnum affec- tavit. Multitudine imperita concitata adversus patrem rebellavit. Id ubi cognovit, David excessit Hierosolyma veritus ne, si ibi remaneret, Absolon cum exercitu veniens urbem regiam obsideret, eamque ferro et Igni vastaret. Absolon, profecto patre, Hierosolymam ingressus est, ibique aliquamdiu moratus est; quae res sahitl DavidI fuit; nam interim David copias collegit seque ad bellum comparavit. lam aderat Absolon cum exercitu et proelium mox erat committendum : Sul comites regl suaserunt ne certaminl interesset. Quapropter David Ioabum suls copiis praefecit seque in urbem vlclnam contuHt. Abiens autem Ioabo ceterlsque ducibus praecepit, ut AbsolonI parcerent sibique fllium incolumem servarent. Acriter utrimque pugnatum est: sed Deo favente victoria penes Davidem fuit. Terga verterunt Absolonis mllites e 301 APPLIED LATIN quibus vlginti duo mllia ceciderunt. Absolon fugiens mulo Insldebat. Erat autem promisso et denso capillo. Dum praecipitl cursu subter densam quercum fertur, coma eius ramis implicata est, et ipse suspensus adhaesit, mulo in- terim praetereunte et cursum pergente. Stabat interea David ad portam urbis, expectans even- turn pugnae et maxime de filii salute sollicitus. Cum eventus proeli ill! nuntiatus esset, Absolone interfecto, non modo non laetatus est de victoria sed maximum quoque dolorem ex morte filii cepit. Inambulabat in cenaculo maerens, et in has voces identidem erumpens: " Fill mi,* Absolon, Absolon, fill mi; utinam pro te moriar, Absolon, fill mi, fill mi, Absolon." Quiz. — How many words in Paragraphs 806, 807, can you explain and use? D. Indirect Statements in English and Latin 784. In the preceding paragraphs you have seen that the direct object in English (a noun in the accusative) may be replaced in Latin by other cases and other constructions in accordance with the nature of the Latin verb with which it is associated. The verb, then, is the important word. Verbs of fearing took an object clause, verbs of interrogation took an indirect question clause, etc. In like manner verbs of saying and thinking often take an object clause expressed by the accusative and the infinitive in English and in Latin. 785. A. Examine these English sentences : * Vocative singular of filius meus. 302 THE OBJECT. NOUN CLAUSES i. I believe him to be an honest man. 2. We know them to be men of ability. 3. Who thinks that all he hears is true. 4. I perceive that the opinions of men differ. Each of these sentences contains a statement put indi- rectly. This construction is called Indirect Discourse. It is common after verbs of saying and thinking in English and Latin. The accusative and the infinitive compose a noun clause. Let us examine this noun clause a little more closely. Suppose that to-day you were thinking as follows: The day will be cloudy. If to-morrow you should wish to repeat the thought of to-day, you would say, Yesterday I thought the day would be cloudy. The words the day would be cloudy are really the direct object of the verb thought. They re- place the single noun thought contained in the verb itself. Yesterday I thought a thought (that the day would be cloudy). Since this construction really replaces a noun it is a noun clause. 786. Construct some sentences containing Indirect state- ments (noun clauses) after the verbs to say, think, know, perceive. 787. B. Examine these Latin sentences: 1. Servus clamat. The slave is shouting. Present Time. In direct discourse after a primary tense (pres., fut., or fut. perf.) this sentence would be: dfcrf, Iservumclamare. He [will say } Routine™ * dixerit, J [ will have said J ** 303 APPLIED LATIN After a secondary tense it would be: f^ 1 ,- - tj \ w % sayin Z I that the slave was dixit, servum clamare. He said ^ dixerat, J I had said J a 2. Servus clamabat. The slave was shouting. Past Time. In indirect discourse, after a primary tense, this sen- tence would be: elicit (dicet, dixerit) servum clamavisse. He says {will say, will have said) that the slave was shouting. After a secondary tense it would be: dicebat (dixit, dixerat) servum clamavisse. He was saying (said, had said) that the slave was shouting. 3. Servus clamabit. The slave will shout. Future Time. In indirect discourse, after a primary tense, this sentence would be: dicit (dicet, dixerit) servum clamaturum esse. He says (will say, will have said) that the slave will shout. After a secondary tense it would be: dicebat (dixit, dixerat) servum clamaturum esse. He was saying (said, had said) that the slave would shout. From these sentences you see that the tense of the infinitive in Indirect discourse is the same as the tense of the main verb used in the direct statement; present, if the direct statement was in present time; perfect, if it was in past time; future, if it was in future time. To determine what tense of the infinitive to use be sure to turn the indirect statement back to its direct form. Then use the tense of the infinitive which re- produces the time (present, past, or future) of the original direct statement. 788. Rule. — Indirect Discourse. — After verbs of saying and thinking a quoted statement is put in the infinitive with 3°4 THE OBJECT. NOUN CLAUSES subject in the accusative. The tense of the infinitive is present, perfect, or future according to the time, present, past, or future, in which the direct statement was made. The subject must al- ways be expressed. If the subject of the indirect discourse infinitive is the same as the subject of the verb of saying, the reflexive pronouns me, te, se, nos, vos, se must be used as the subject of the infinitive. i. Died me aquam videre. / say that I see the water. 2. Dixit se aquam videre. He says that he sees the water. If the subject of the infinitive is a person other than the subject of the verb of saying, eum or ilium (not me, te, se, etc.), should be used to show the contrast. Servus elicit eum aquam videre. The slave says that he {someone not the slave) sees the water. If the original direct statement contained a verb in the passive voice the tense of the passive infinitive indicated by the time of the verb of the direct statement must be used. 789. The commonest verbs of saying, thinking, knowing, perceiving, in Latin are: died, dicere, dm, dictus, to say. scio, scire, scivi, scitus, to know. puto, putare, putavi, putatus, to think. sentio, sentire, sensi, sensus, to perceive. Other verbs followed by the same construction are: arbitror, arbitrari, arbitratus sum, to think. nuntio, nuntiare, nuntiavi, nuntiatus, to announce. nego, negare, negavi, negatus, to deny. responded, respondere, respond!, responsus, to reply. exlstimo, existimare, existimavi, existimatus, to think. cognosco, cognoscere, cognovi, cognitus, to learn. audio, audire, audivi, auditus, to hear. video, videre, vidi, visus, to see. intellego, intellegere, intellexi, intellectus, to understand. 20 305 APPLIED LATIN 790. Translate: i. Dlcimus nos venturos esse. 2. Nonne scivisti hostes profugisse? 3. Arbitramur haec carmina optima esse. 4. Nuntius, cum Galbam montem cepisse re- spondisset, abiit. 5. Omnes conclamaverunt cum temp- lum ornatum esse audivissent. 6. Non negavl orationem illo die habitam esse. 7. Cum intellexissent Caesarem in Italiam prof ec turn esse hostes domum se receperunt. 8. Puto me iter per hanc provinciam facturum esse. 9. Num dixit se coronam Caesarl dare voluisse? 10. Sentio omnes elves libertatem amare. 791. 1. Did you not know that you were in great peril? 2. They thought that the town had been taken. 3. We hear that Galba has crossed the river. 4. Who replied that Caesar had a crown? 5. Did you say that the enemy would set out early in the morning? Translation. The Judgment of Solomon 792. Duae mulieres in eadem domo habitabant. Utraque eodem tempore puerum peperit. Unus ex his puerulis post diem tertium nocte mortuus est. Mater puerum alterius mulieris dormientis subripuit et in huius loco fllium suum mortuum supposuit. Orta inter duas mulieres gravi alter- catione, res ad Solomonem delata est. Difficilis erat atque perobscura quaestio, cum ntillus testis esset. Rex autem ut exploraret latentem veritatem, " Dividatur," inquit, " puer de quo controversia est, et pars una tini mulieri, altera alter! detur." Iudicio assensit falsa mater, altera vero ex- clama\it, "Noli," quaeso, "puerum occidere, O Rex. Ista totum habeat." Turn rex ait, "Res est manifesta. Haec vere est mater pueri." Et huic ilium adiudicavit. 306 THE OBJECT. NOUN CLAUSES Quiz. — How many words in Paragraphs 808, 809, can you explain and use? E. Dependent Clauses in Indirect Statements 793. In the preceding paragraphs you learned that the infinitive (with subject accusative) is used as the direct object of verbs of saying, thinking, knowing, and perceiving. When a Simple or a Compound sentence is to be transferred from the direct to the indirect discourse this construction is not difficult. If, however, the direct statement is a Com- plex sentence (one containing dependent clauses), trans- ference is a little troublesome because the form which the dependent clause will take in the indirect statement is affected by the rule for sequence of tenses. 794. A. Examine this English sentence: The men, who are defending the town, are brave. If this is to be put into indirect discourse following a primary tense its form would be : Caesar says that the men who are defending the town, are brave. After a secondary tense it would be : Caesar said that the men who were defending the town, were brave. In the first sentence both the tenses of the infinitive and the dependent verb are the same as they were in the direct statement. In the second sentence both the infinitive and the dependent verb change to past tenses because of the time of the main verb. In English, then, after secondary tenses one has to be very careful to maintain the correct sequence. 795. Compose some sentences in direct discourse in 307 APPLIED LATIN English and change them to the indirect discourse after both primary and secondary tenses. 796. B. The same situation arises in Latin in connection with the translation of complex sentences. Examine the following Latin sentences: Direct i. Viri qui oppidum defendunt fortes sunt. The men who are defending the town are brave. Indirect 2. Caesar dicit viros qui oppidum defendant fortes esse. Caesar says that the men who are defending the town are brave. 3. Caesar dixit viros qui oppidum defenderent fortes esse. Caesar said that the men who were defending the town were brave. 797. In Indirect discourse after a primary tense the verb of the dependent clause is put in the subjunctive mood in the present or perfect tense. If the infinitive of the indirect discourse, even after a primary tense, is perfect, the depen- dent verb is put in the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive. In Indirect discourse after a secondary tense the verb of the dependent clause is put into the subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect. Cf. sentence 3, H796. 798. Rule. — Dependent clauses in Indirect discourse regularly take their verbs in the subjunctive. If both the verb of saying and the infinitive are primary tenses, the verb of the dependent clause will be in the present or the perfect sub- 308 THE OBJECT. NOUN CLAUSES junctive. If either the verb of saying or the infinitive is a secondary tense, the verb of the dependent clause will be in the imperfect or the pluperfect subjunctive. 799. Translate: i. Dlcit montem quern a Galba occu- parl voluerit ab hostibus tenerl. 2. ArbitratI sunt illos qui montem occupavissent mansuros esse. 3. Caesar negat se expulisse Gallos qui ea loca incolerent. 4. Caesar negat se expellere Gallos qui ea loca incolant. 5. Caesar negavit se expulsurum esse Gallos qui ea loca incolerent. 6. Galll putaverunt prlncipes, quod intellegerent quantam calami- tatam clvitatl intulissent, in Britanniam profugisse. 7. Nunc video nullum subsidium fuisse quod submittl posset. 8. Hostes dlxerunt se ex hominum mllibus LX vix ad quln- gentos qui arma ferre possent redactos esse. 9. Caesar dixit se id quod antea fecisset facturum esse. 10. Cogno- vimus hostes agros quos armls possedissent tenere voluisse. 800. 1. Galba thinks that the soldiers who have occupied the mountain are brave. 2. I perceive that the slaves fled because they were severely punished. 3. They heard that the enemy would cross the bridge which had recently been made. 4. I deny that I praised the oration which was de- livered by Cicero. 5. Who thought that the townspeople would seek peace after the town had been taken? Translation. Joshua Stops the Sun 801. Reges coniunctls vlribus progressl sunt ad versus Hebraeos. At Deus dixit " Iosue; noli timere eos; tua erit victoria." Iosue igitur magno impetu illos adortus est; qui subita formldine correptl fugerunt. Cum autem dies in vesperum incllnaret, re nondum confecta, Iosue iussit solem consistere et vero stetit sol et diem produxit donee hostium exercitus deletus fuisset. 309 APPLIED LATIN Quiz. — How many words in Paragraph 810 can you ex- plain and use? LII. SELECTION FOR TRANSLATION Caesar. Gallic War. Book I, Chapters i-8 802. 1. Gallia est omnis dlvlsa in partes tres; quarum unam incolunt Belgae, aliam Aquitani, tertiam qui ipsorum lingua Celtae, nostra Galli appellantur. Hi omnes lingua, Institutls, legibus inter se differunt. Gallos ab Aqultanis Garumna flumen, a Belgis Matrona et Sequana dividit. Horum omnium fortissiml sunt Belgae, propterea quod a cultii atque humanitate provinciae longissime absunt, mini- meque ad eos mercatores saepe commeant atque ea quae ad effeminandos animos pertinent important; proximique sunt Germanis qui trans Rhenum incolunt, quibuscum con- tinenter bellum gerunt. Qua de causa Helvetil quoque reliquos Gallos virtute praecedunt, quod fere cotldianis proelils cum Germanis contendunt, cum aut suls finibus eos prohibent aut ipsl in eorum finibus bellum gerunt. Eorum una pars, quam Gallos obtinere dictum est, ini- tium capit a flumine Rhodano ; continetur Garumna flumine, Oceano, finibus Belgarum; attingit etiam ab Sequanls et Helvetils flumen Rhenum ; vergit ad septentriones. Belgae ab extremis Galliae finibus oriuntur; pertinent ad Inferio- rem partem fluminis RhenI; spectant in septentrionem et orientem solem. Aqultania a Garumna flumine ad Pyre- naeos montes et earn partem OceanI quae est ad Hispaniam pertinent; spectat inter occasum solis et septentriones. 310 SELECTION FOR TRANSLATION 2. Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus fuit et dltissimus Orgetorlx. Is, M. Messala et M. Plsone consulibus, regnl cupiditate inductus coniurationem nobilitatis fecit, et clvi- tati persuasit ut de finibus suis cum omnibus copils exlrent : perfacile esse, cum virtute omnibus praestarent, totlus Galliae imperio potlrl. Id hoc facilius els persuasit, quod undique loci natiira Helvetil continentur : una ex parte rlumine Rheno latissimo atque altissimo, qui agrum Helvetium a Germanls dlvidit; altera ex parte monte Iura altissimo, qui est inter Sequanos et Helvetios; tertia, lacu Lemanno et rlumine Rhodano, qui provinciam nostram ab Helvetils dlvidit. His rebus flebat ut et minus late vagarentur et minus facile flnitimlsbellumlnferrepossent; qua ex parte homines bellandl cupidl magno dolore adficiebantur. Pro multitu- dine autem hominum et pro gloria belli atque fortitudinis, angustos se fines habere arbitrabantur, qui in longitudinem mllia passuum CCXL, in latitudinem CLXXX patebant. 3. His rebus adductl et auctoritate Orgetorigis permotl constituerunt ea quae ad proficlscendum pertinerent compa- rare, iumentorum et carrorum quam maximum numerum coemere, sementes quam maximas facere, ut in itinere copia friimentl suppeteret, cum proximls clvitatibus pacem et amlcitiam conflrmare. Ad eas res conficiendas biennium sibi satis esse duxerunt; in tertium annum profectionem lege conflrmant. Ad eas res conficiendas Orgetorlx deligitur. Is sibi lega- tionem ad clvitates suscepit. In eo itinere persuadet Castico, 3ii APPLIED LATIN Catamantaloedis fllio, Sequano, cuius pater regnum in Sequanis multos annos obtinuerat et a senatu populi RomanI amicus appellatus erat, ut regnum in civitate sua occuparet, quod pater ante habuerat; itemque Dumnorlgl Haeduo, fratri DlviciacI, qui eo tempore prlncipatum in civi- tate obtinebat ac maxime plebl acceptus erat, ut idem cona- retur persuadet, elque filiam suam in matrimonium dat. Perfacile factii esse illls probat conata perficere, propterea quod ipse suae clvitatis imperium obtentiirus esset; non esse dubium quin totlus Galliae plurimum Helvetii possent; se suis copiis suoque exercitu illls regna conciliatiirum con- firmat. Hac oratione adductl inter se fidem et ius iurandum dant et regno occupato per tres potentissimos ac firmis- simos populos totlus Galliae sese potiri posse sperant. 4. Ea res est Helvetiis per indicium enuntiata. Moribus suis Orgetorlgem ex vinculis causam dlcere coegerunt; damnatum poenam sequi oportebat, ut Ignl cremaretur. Die constituta causae dictionis Orgetorix ad iudicium omnem suam familiam, ad hominum milia decern, undique coegit, et omnes clientes obaeratosque suos, quorum mag- num numerum habebat, eodem conduxit; per eos, ne causam dlceret, se eripuit. Cum civitas ob earn rem incitata armls ius suum exsequi conaretur, multitiidinemque homi- num ex agris magistrates cogerent, Orgetorix mortuus est; neque abest suspiclo, ut Helvetii arbitrantur, quin ipse sibi mortem consciverit. 5. Post eius mortem nihilo minus Helvetii id quod constituerant facere conantur, ut e finibus suis exeant. 312 SELECTION FOR TRANSLATION Ubi iam se ad earn rem paratos esse arbitrati sunt, oppida sua omnia, numero ad duodecim, vlcos ad quadringentos, reliqua prlvata aedificia incendunt; frumentum omne, praeter quod secum porta turl erant, comburunt, ut, domum reditionis spe sublata, paratiores ad omnia perlcula sub- eunda essent; trium mensium molita cibaria sibi quemque domo efferre iubent. Persuadent Rauracls et Tulingls et Lato- brlgls, flnitimls, utl eodem usl consilio, oppidls suls viclsque exustls, una cum els proficlscantur; Boiosque, qui trans Rhenum incoluerant et in agrum Noricum transierant Nore- iamque oppiignaverant, receptos ad se socios sibi adsclscunt. 6. Erant omnino itinera duo quibus itineribus domo exlre possent: unum per Sequanos, angustum et difficile, inter montem Iuram et fliimen Rhodanum, vix qua singull cam diicerentur; mons autem altissimus impendebat, ut facile perpauci prohibere possent: alterum per provinciam nostram, multo facilius atque expedltius, propterea quod inter fines Helvetiorum et Allobrogum, qui nuper pacatl erant, Rhodanus fluit, isque non nullls locls vado transltur. Extremum oppidum Allobrogum est proximumque Helve- tiorum flnibus Genava. Ex eo oppido pons ad Helvetios pertinet. Allobrogibus sese vel persuasiiros (quod nondum bono animo in populum Romanum viderentur) exlstimabant, vel vl coacturos ut per suos fines eos Ire paterentur. Omnibus rebus ad pro- fectionem comparatis diem dlcunt qua die ad rlpam Rho- danl omnes conveniant. Is dies erat a. d. v. Kal. Apr., L. Plsone, A. Gablnio consulibus. 3i3 APPLIED LATIN 7. Caesarl cum id nuntiatum esset eos per provinciam nostram iter facere conarl, maturat ab urbe proficlscl, et quam maximls potest itineribus in Galliam ulteriorem con- tendit et ad Genavam pervenit. Provinciae totl quam maximum potest mllitum numerum imperat (erat omnlno in Gallia ulteriore legio una), pontem qui erat ad Genavam iubet rescind!. Ubi de eius adventu Helve til certiores fact! sunt, legatos ad eum mittunt nobilissimos clvitatis, cuius legationis Nammeius et Verucloetius prlncipem locum obtinebant, qui dicerent, ^sibi esse in animo sine ullo maleficio iter per pro- vinciam facere, propterea quod aliud iter haberent nullum; rogare ut eius voluntate id sibi facere liceat." Caesar, quod memoria tenebat L. Cassium consulem occlsum exercitumque eius ab Helvetiis pulsum et sub iugum missum, concedendum non putabat; neque homines inimleo animo, data facultate per provinciam itineris faciendi, tem- peraturos ab initiria et maleficio existimabat. Tamen, ut spatium intercedere posset dum milites quos imperaverat convenlrent, legatis respondit se ad diem deliberandum sumpturum; si quid vellent, ad Id. Apr. reverterentur. 8. Interea ea legione quam secum habebat militibusque qui ex provincia convenerant, a lacti Lemanno, qui in fliimen Rhodanum Influit, ad montem Iuram, qui fines Sequanorum ab Helvetiis dlvidit, mllia passuum decern novem mQrum in altitudinem pedum sedecim fossamque perdiicit. Eo opere perfecto praesidia disponit, castella communit, quo facilius, si se invito translre conarentur, prohibere posset. 3i4 LATIN DERIVATIVES Ubi ea dies quam constituent cum legatls venit, et legati ad eum reverterunt, negat se more et exemplo populi Roman! posse iter tilli per provinciam dare ; et, si vim facere conentur, prohibiturum ostendit. Helvetil, ea spe deiectl, navibus iunctls ratibusque compluribus factls, alii vadls RhodanI, qua minima altitudo fluminis erat, nonnumquam interdiu, saepius noctii, si perrumpere possent conatl, operis munltione et mllitum concursti et tells repulsl, hoc conatu destiterunt. Lm. LATIN DERIVATIVE S USED IN MC )DERN STUDD AND BUSINESS 803. A. CIVICS government committee patriotism privilege family treaty pension exemption tribe appointment petition eminent state president prohibition domain people cabinet debt veto popular secretary registration power majority supreme obedience amendment minority court license pro tempore representative criminal army candidate delegate equity navy republican legislature appeal militia nomination judiciary initiative camp progressive executive referendum international nation constitution function ambassador census charter probate minister jurisdiction federal local consul preamble convention option arbitration vice president centralized recorder union Magna Charta party assessor colonies population civil auditor confederacy judge liberty coroner revenue ordinance declaration municipality continental estate independence mayor revolution responsibility citizen council currency society franchise primary compromise campaign vote public senate commerce suffrage opinion finance labor office naturalization election corporation congress patents electoral department 315 APPLIED LATIN trade intrastate indirect tax protection immigration martial law money education industry- resolutions banks unionism interstate village notes penal 804. B. GENERAL SCIENCE vacuum diffusion of compounds current column of water liquids precipitates motor density saturated solu- element arc light variation tion metal gravitation apparatus temperature combustion mass volume ebullition spontaneous momentum valve condensation sound accelerated mo- quantity solidification vibration tion tension liquefaction intensity pendulum attraction latent heat velocity suspension adhesion expansion radiation curvilinear mo- capillary tube collision refraction tion vaporization compression spectrum centripetal mo- concave mirror friction opaque tion convex mirror inertia transparent centrifugal mo- press conductor pigment tion specific gravity sensation compass lever substance properties induction fulcrum solids composition electricity circumference molecules mixture alternating intermittent 805. C. NATURAL SCIENCE germination Leaves: biflorum papaver, poppy plant linear rotundiflora prunus Per- cell lanceolate versicolor sica, peach propagation spatulate color cerasus, cherry terminal bud ovate Trees: castanea, annuals orbicular pinus, pine chestnut biennials inflorescence picea, spruce malus, apple perennials solitary flowers abies, fir vitis, grape tendrils fertilization larix, larch viola, violet bulbs follicule arbor vitae, lilium, lily structure genus cedar rosa, rose coniferous species populus, poplar linum, flax Buds: spore quercus, oak cordate lateral fronds ulmus, elm fascicle axillary vegetation ' pyrus, pear herbaceous accessory folium prunus, plum sessile supernumerary grandiflora acer, maple sterile dormant perfoliata iuniperus, red truncate adventitious longiflorum cedar fruit 316 LATEST DERIVATIVES insect migration nutrition digestion hibernate receptacle crop rotation grain luxuriant corolla fibre cereal adaptation filament elongated nut 806. D. MEDICINE abrasion cartilage fluid noxious abscess cerebrum flux occipital absorbent cervical formula oculist acclimate claret fumigate operation accretion clavicle gelatin ossify acetic cologne germicide palate acetylene coma hospital parietal acid constipation influenza patella adipose consumption injurious precipitate adulterate contagious inoculate pulmonary aerate corpuscle insanity pulse aggravate corrosive intestinal pulverize alimentary costal eruption rabies alveolar cranium jugular respiration amputate crude laceration saleratus angina pectoris curvature lacteal sanatory aqua cutaneous ligament sanitary artery cuticle liniment solution arsenic decoction lumbar soporific asafetida delirium ' malaria spinal assimilate dementia malignant sponge belladonna demulcent materia medica sterilize bicarbonate disinfect medical sulphur bilious dislocation mercury tepid cancer dissolve morbid terra capsicum dorsal mortal tumor capsule effusion muscle vaccinate carbolic emollient nasal varicose carbonate essence nerve vein cardiac fever nostrum vertigo 807. E. MUSIC alto fortissimo pedal soprano cantata interlude piano tempo concert juvenile quadrille tremulo crescendo nocturne quartette tuba diminuendo octave serenade virtuoso 808. F. RELIGION abomination advocate beneficent clerical admonition austerity celestial communion adoration benediction ceremonial conference 317 APPllFP LATIN consecrate humiliation officiate revelation consolation immortality omnipotent reverent creed incarnate pagan revival crucifix incense pastoral ritual curate infernal penance sacrament deity infidel penitence sacred devotion infinite piety sacrifice dignitary inheritance postulant sacrilege disciple inspiration prelate secular dissenter lucifer propaganda serpent divinity matin purgatory superstition doctrine mediator rationalist supreme epistle miracle rector tabernacle eternal novice redemption unity gentile offertory resurrection vesper 809. G. LAW abolition bailiff defamatory indemnity abrogate belligerent default indeterminate accession brief demise inherit accessory capias demur innocent accomplice caveat deponent inquest accusation certiorari derogative intervene actionable chancellor devise irrelevant adjudicate chancery digest jurisdiction adjutant circumstantial dismissal justifiable administer client dissolve lapse admissible codicil divorce larceny affidavit commitment domicile legacy affirmation competent duress legitimate agency complicity equity libel alias compromise evidence litigant alibi concurrent exception magistrate alienate conditional execution martial alimony confession executor minority allegation consideration exemplary mitigate antemortem consummate exemption negligence antenuptial continuance extenuating nullify appeal contributory extortion obligate appellant conveyance gratuitous original arbitration corpus habeas corpus priority arson covenant illicit parole assault criminal immaterial penal assignor criminate implicate peremptory attest deceased inalienable perjury attorney decedent incendiary pone bail decision incident possession 3«3 LATIN DERIVATIVES prejudice quasi solicitor tenement presumptive relative subpoena testify probate remedy summary testimony procedure remitter supersede title- promissory rescind surrogate tort proviso sentence tenable trespass 810. H. BUSINESS agent restraint of trade acceptor profit annuity salvage salable property assess sample- circular solicit assets satisfaction prudential subsidy auction security advertiser antedate bonus signature discretion collect capital solvent competition consignment collateral specie transferable consul commerce staple remit corporation commission subcontract marginal creditor consignee vendor margin customer contract administrator certificate daily debit article percentage debenture credit bona fide compensate debtor deficit commute manifest defalcation surplus convertible infringement deposit firm counterfeit injunction document fraud decimal consolidate dormant fund delinquent mercenary equitable importer denomination proprietary expedite indemnity deterioration credentials extension index director assignee finance legal tender acceptance valid fluctuate letter of credit accommodation usury foreclosure maturity account interest liquidate minimum accountant fiduciary lucrative maximum actuary attachment manager negotiate assignment quotation merchandise proceeds audit successor money par bankruptcy dividend negotiable partner calendar duplicate patent premium cancel extortionate pecuniary prime certify facsimile preferential pro rata salary mercantile proposition ad valorem tangible millionaire salary protest legible monetary signature reciprocity discount notary public transfer receiver freight obligation value redemption promissory preferred stock commode 319 APPLIED LATIN elaborately crescent novelty subtraction excelsior facet pencil superficial genuine focal portfolio valley lustre focus portrait addendum oriental lunette receipt articulation partition monocle recipe ascent perambulator solitaire affinity castellated refrigerator spectacles aggregate double renovate circumference alluvium error rustic crown calx flexure sectional decoration diluvium foundry ammunition design erosion furnace anchor permanent ferruginous isolating candelabrum quality fissure involve cereal rosette flume limit chandeliers forfeit semi-professional machine differential album galena oblique dividers certificate igneous orifice 811. LIV. SYNOPSIS OF FORMS NOUNS First Declension Singular Nom. porta, a gate. Gen. portae, of a gate. Dat. portae, to or for a gate. Ace. portam, a gate. Voc. porta (O) gate. Abl. porta, with, etc., a gate. porta, f., a gate Plural portae, gates. portarum, of gates. portis, to or for gates. portas, gates. portae, (0) gates. portis, with, etc., gates. 812. annus, m. a year Nom. annus Gen. anni Dat. anno Ace. annum Voc. anne Abl. anno Nom. anni Gen. annorum Dat. annis A cc. annos Voc. anni A bl. annis Second Declension donum, n. puer, m. vir, m. a gift a boy a man Singular donum puer vir doni pueri viri dono puero viro donum puerum virum donum puer vir dono puero viro Plural dona pueri viri donorum puerorum virorum donis pueris viris dona pueros viros dona pueri viri donis pueris viris 320 ager, m. afield ager agri agro agrum ager agro agri agrorum agris agros agri agris SYNOPSIS OF FORMS 813. Third Declension L consul, m hiems, f. homo, m. legio, f . nomen, n. a consul winter a man Singular a legion a name *N.,V. consul hiems homo legio nomen Gen. consulis hiemis hominis legionis nominis Dat. consul! hiemi homini legion! nomini Ace. consul em hiemem hominem legion em nomen Abl. consule hieme homine Plural legione nomine Norn consules hiemes homines legiones nomina Gen. consulum hiemum hominum legionum nominum Dat. consulibus hiemibus hominibus legionibus nominibus Ace. consules hiemes homines legiones nomina Abl. consulibus hiemibus hominibus legionibus nominibus amor, m. frater, m. Caesar, m. corpus, n. aetas, f. love a brother Caesar Singular a body age N.,V . amor frater Caesar corpus aetas Gen. amoris fratris Caesaris corporis aetatis Dat. amori fratri Caesari corpori aetati Ace. amorem fratrem Caesarem corpus aetatem Abl. amore fratre Caesare Plural corpore aetate N.,V . amores fratres Caesares corpora aetates Gen. amorum f rat rum Caesarum corporum aetatum Dat. amoribus fratribus Caesaribus corporibus aetatibus Ace. amores fratres Caesares corpora aetates Abl. amoribus fratribus Caesaribus corporibus aetatibus vox, f. urbs, f. civis, m. nubes, f. sedile, n. animal, n. a voice a city a citizen a cloud a seat an animal Singular N.,V .vox urbs civis nubes sedile animal Gen. vocis urbis civis nubis sedilis animalis Dat. voci urbi clvi nubi sedili animali Ace. vocem urbem clvem nubem sedile animal Abl. voce urbe civc (i) nube Plural sedili animali N.,V . voces urbes elves nubes sedllia animalia Gen. vocum urbium civium nubium sedilium animalium Dat. vocibus urbibus civibus nubibus sedilibus animalibus Ace. voces urbes elves (is)nubes(is) sedTlia animalia Abl. vocibus urbibus civibus nubibus sedilibus animalibus * From this point, when the Nominative and Vocative are the same, they will be placed in the same line. 21 321 APPLIED LATIN 814. Fourth Declension Casus, m . domus, f. cornu, n. dies, m. res, f. a chance a house a horn Singular a day a thin\. N.,V . casus domus cornu dies res Gen. casus domus (domi) cornus diei rei DaL casui domui (domo) cornu diei rei Ace. casum domum cornu diem rem Abl. casu domu (domo) cornu Plural die re N.,V . casus domus cornua dies res Gen. casuum domuum cornuum (domorum) dierum rerum DaL casibus domibus cornibus diebus rebus Ace. casus domus (domos) cornua dies res Abl. casibus domibus cornibus diebus rebus 816. M. Nom. latus Gen. lati Dat. lato Ace. latum Voc. late Abl. lato ADJECTIVES First and Second Declensions Singular F. lata latae latae latam lata lata 817. Singular latus, wide Plural N. M. F. latum lati latae lati latorum latarum lato latis latis latum latos latas latum lati latae lato latis latis Third Declension felix, happy Plural M. and F. N.,V.ie\ix felicis felici felicem fellce (i) Gen. DaL Ace. Abl. N. felix felicis felici felix felice (i) M. and F. felices felicium felicibus felices felicibus N. lata latorum latis lata lata latis N.,V. Gen. DaL Ace. Abl. Singular M. and F. recens recentis recenti recent em recent e (i) recens, recent N. recens recentis recenti recens recent e (i) 322 Plural M . and F. recentes recentium recentibus recentes (is) recentibus N. felicia felicium felicibus felicia felicibus N. recentia recentium recentibus recentia recentibus SYNOPSIS OF FORMS Singular M. and F. N.,V.iortis Gen. fortis Dat. forti Ace. fort em Abl. forti Singular M. F. N.,V. acer acris Gen. acris acris Dat. acri acri Ace. acrem acrem AH. acri acri fortis, brave N. forte fortis forti forte forti Plural M. and F. fortes fortium fortibus fortes (is) fortibus N. fortia fortium fortibus fortia fortibus acer, swift, keen N. acre acris acri acre acri M. acres acrium acribus acres (is) acribus Plural F. acres acrium acribus acres (is) acribus IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES Singular totus, whole, all M. Norn, totus Gen. totius Dat. toti Ace. totum Voc. tote Abl. toto F. tota totius toti totam tota tota N. totum totius toti totum totum toto M. toti tot drum totis totos toti totis Plural F. totae totarum totis totas totae totis N. acria acrium acribus acria acribus N. tota totorum totis tota tota totis 818. Comparative Adjectives Singular fortior, braver Plural M. and F. N.,V. fortior fortioris fortiori fortior em fortiore (i) Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. N. fortius fortioris fortiori fortius fortiore (i) M. and F. fortiores fortiorum fortioribus fortiores (is) fortioribus N. fortiora fortiorum fortioribus fortiora fortioribus 819. Special Adjectives plus, more Singular Plural N.,V. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. M. and F. N. plus pluris plus plure mille, thousand Singular Plural M. and F. plures plurium pluribus plures(is) pluribus 323 N. plura plurium pluribus plura pluribus mille mille milia milium milibus milia milibus APPLIED LATIN duo, two tres, three M. F. N. M. and F. N. iV.,F.duo duae duo tres tria Gen. duorum duarum duorum trium trium Dat. duobus duabus • duobus tribus tribus Ace. duos duas duo tres (tris) tria A bl. duobus duabus duobus tribus tribus 820. Regular Comparison of Adjectives Positive Comparative Superlative latus, wide latior, latius latissimus felix, happy felicior, felicius felicissimus recens, recent recentior, recentius recentissimus fortis, brave fortior, fortius fortissimus acer, sharp acrior, acrius acerrimus Irregular Comparison of Adjectives facilis, easy facilior, facilius facillimus similis, similar similior, similius simillimus bonus, good melior, melius optimus malus, bad peior, peius pessimus magnus, great maior, maius maximus parvus, small minor, minus minimus multus, much i - plurimus , pius exterus, outward exterior, exterius extremus (extimus) inferus, below Inferior, inferius infimus (imus) posterus, following posterior, posterius postremus (postumus) superus, above superior, superius supremus (summus) in, in, within interior, interius, inner intimus pro, before prior, prius, former primus prope, near propior, propius, nearer proximus ultra, beyond ulterior, ulterius, farther ultimus 821. ADVERBS Regular Comparison clare, clearly clarius clarissime fortiter, easily fortius fortissime recenter, recently recentius recentissime feliciter, happily felicius felicissime acriter, sharply acrius acerrime Irregular Comparison bene, well melius optime male, ill peius pessime magnopere, greatly magis maxime multum, much plus plurimum parum, little minus minime saepe, often saepius saepissime diu, long diutius diutissime 324 SYNOPSIS OF FORMS 822. Numerals Symbol Cardinal Ordinal Distributive I unus, -a, -um, one primus, -a, -um, first singuli, -ae, -a, II duo, -ae, -o, two secundus, -a, -um, one each (at a second time) III tres, tria, three tertius, third bini, -ae, -a, two IV quattuor,/0wr quartus, fourth each V qalnque, five quintus, fifth terni, -ae, -a, VI sex sextus three each VII septum Septimus quaterni, -ae, -a, VIII octo octavus four each IX novem nonus quini, -ae, -a., five X decern decimus each XI undecim undecimus XII duodecim duodecimus XIII tredecim tertius decimus Other Numerals XIV quattuordecim quartus decimus semel, once XV quindecim quintus decimus bis, twice XVI sedecim sextus decimus ter, thrice XVII septendecim Septimus decimus quater, four times XVIII duodeviginti duodevicesimus XIX undeviginti undevicesimus simplex, single, XX viginti vicesimus one fold XXI viginti unus vicesimus primus duplex, double, unus et viginti unus et vicesimus two fold XXX triginta tricesimus triplex, triple, XL quadraginta quadragesimus three fold L quinquaginta quinquage simus quadruplex, LX sexaginta sexagesimus four fold LXX septuaginta septuagesimus quincuplex, LXXX octoginta octogesimus five fold XC nonaginta nonagesimus C centum centesimus CC ducenti, -ae, -a due ente simus ccc trecenti, -ae, -a trecentesimus cccc quadringenti, -ae, -a quadringentesimus D quingenti, -ae, -a quingentesimus DC sescenti, -ae, -a sescentesimus DCC septingenti, -ae, -a septingentesimus DCCC octingenti, -ae, -a octingentesimus CM nongenti, -ae, -a nongentesimus M mille mille simus 325 APPLIED LATIN 823. PRONOUNS Personal ego,/ tu, thou sui, of himself Sing. Plur Sing. Plur. Sing Plur. N.,V. ego nds tu v6s Gen. mei nostrum tui vestrum sui sui (nostri) (vestri) Dat. mini nobis tibi vobis sibi sibi Ace. me nos te vos se se Abl. me nobis te vobis se se Demonstrative Pronouns hie, this Singular Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. hie haec hoc hi hae haec huius huius huius horum harum horum huic huic huic his his his hunc hanc hoc hos has haec hoc hac hoc his ille, that his his Singular Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. ille ilia illud illi illae ilia illius illius illius illorum illarum illorum illi illi illi illis illis illis ilium illam illud illos illas ilia illo ilia illo illis is, this, that illis illis Singular Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. is ea id ei (ii) eae ea eius eius eius eorum earum eorum ei ei ei eis (iis) eis (iis) eis (iis) eum earn id eos eas ea eo ea Singular eo eis (iis) idem, same eis (iis) Plural eis (iis) M. F. N. M. F. N. idem eadem idem eidem (iidem) eaedem eadem eiusdem eiusdem eiusdem eorundem earundem eorundem eidem eidem eidem eisdem eisdem eisdem (iisdem) (iisdem) (iisdem) eundem eandem idem eosdem easdem eadem eodein eadem eodem eisdem eisdem eisdem (iisdem) (iisdem) (iisdem) 326 SYNOPSIS OF FORMS ipse, self S: [NGULAR Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. ipse ipsa ipsum ipsi ipsae ipsa ipsius ipsius ipsius ipsorum ipsarum ipsorum ipsi ipsi ipsi ipsis ipsis ipsis ipsum ipsam ipsum ipsos ipsas ipsa ipso ipsa ipso ipsis Interrogative quis, who, which, what ipsis I ipsis Singular M. and F. N. quis quid In plural declined like cuius cuius the Relative cui cui quern quid quo quo Relative Singular Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. qui quae quod qui quae quae cuius cuius cuius quorum quarum quorum cui cui cui quibus quibus quibus quern quam quod quos quis quae quo qua quo quibus Indefinite quis, any, any one quibus quibus Singular Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. quis (qui) quae (qua) quid(quod) qui quae quae (qua) cuius cuius cuius quorum quarum quorum cui cui cui quibus quibus quibus quern quam quid(quod) quos quas quae (qua) quo qua quo quibus quibus quibus aliquis, some, some one Singular Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. aliquis aliqua aliquid aliqui aliquae aliqua (aliqui) (aliquo d) alicuius alicuius alicuius aliquorum aliquarum aliquorum alicui alicui alicui aliquibus aliquibus aliquibus ' aliquem aliquam aliquid aliquos ( aliquo d) aliquas aliqua aliquo aliqua aliquo aliquibus 327 aliquibus aliquibus APPLIED LATIN 824. CONJUGATION OF THE ENGLISH VERB FIND Active Voice — Indicative Mood Present Simple Progressive Emphatic I find I am finding I do find You find You are finding You do find He finds He is finding He does find We find We are finding We do find You find You are finding You do find They find They are finding Past They do find Simple Progressive Emphatic I found I was finding I did find You found You were finding You did find He found He was finding He did find We found We were finding We did find You found You were finding You did find They found They were finding Future They did find Simple Volitional I shall find I will find You will find You shall find He will find He shall find We shall find We will find You will find You shall find They will find They shall find Progressive Progressive I shall be finding, etc. Perfect I will be finding, etc. Simple Pluperfect Future Perfect I have found I had found I shall have found You have found You had found You will have found He has found He had found He will have found We have found We had found We shall have found You have found You had found . You will have found They have found They had found They will have found Progressive Progressive Progressive I have been finding, etc. I had been finding, I shall have been find- etc. ing, etc. 328 SYNOPSIS OF FORMS Simple if) I, you, he, find if) we, you, they, find Subjunctive Mood Present Progressive if) I, you, he, be finding if) we, you, they, if) we, you, they, do be finding find Emphatic if) I, you, he, do find Past Progressive Emphatic if) I, you, he, were if) I, you, he, did find finding if) we, you, they, found if) we, you, they, if) we, you, they, did were finding find Simple if) I, you, he, found Present Simple I, you, he, may find We, you, they, may find Potential Mood Past Simple I, you, he, might find We, you, they, might find Progressive I, you, he, may be finding We, you, they, may be finding Progressive I, you, he, might be finding We, you, they, might be finding Perfect Pluperfect Simple Simple I, you, he, may have found I, you, he, might have found We, you, they, may have found We, you, they, might have found Progressive Progressive I, you, he, may have been finding I, you, he, might have been finding We, you, they, may have been We, you, they, might have been finding finding Imperative Mood Infinitives Participles Present Tense Present Present find (thou, you) find (ye, you) to find to be finding finding Perfect Perfect to have found having found to have been finding having been finding 3 2 9 APPLIED LATIN Present finding Gerunds Perfect having found having been finding Passive Voice — Indicative Mood Present (Simple) I am found You are found He is found We are found You are found They are found Past (Simple) Future (Simple) I was found I shall be found, etc. You were found He was found We were found Volitional You were found I will be found, etc. They were found Progressive I am being found, etc. Progressive I was being found, etc. Perfect I have been found, etc. Pluperfect Future Perfect I had been found, I shall have been found, etc. etc. Subjunctive Mood Present if) I be found, etc. Past if) I were found, etc. Progressive if) I were being found Potential Mood Present I may be found, etc. Past Perfect I might be found, I may have been found, etc. etc. Pluperfect I might have been found, etc. Imperative Mood Infinitives Participles Present be found Present Present Past to be found being found found Perfect Perfect to have been found having been found 33° SYNOPSIS OF FORMS 825. FIRST CONJUGATION. LAUDO. VERBS IN A Principal Parts, laudo, laudare, laudavi, laudatus Indicative Active Pres. laudo, laudas, laudat, etc. / praise, am praising, do praise. Imp. laudabam, laurlabas, lauda- bat, etc. / was praising, praised, did praise. Fut. laudabo, laudabis, laudabit, etc. / shall praise. Passive laudor, laudaris, laudatur, etc. / am praised, am being praised. laudabar, laudabaris, laudaba- tur, etc. / was praised, was being praised. laudabor, laudaberis, laudabit- ur, etc. / shall be praised. Perf. laudavi, laudavisti, laudavit, laudatus, -a, -um, sum, es, est, CIV.. / have praised. CIL. / have been praised, was praised. Plup. laudaveram, laudaveras, laudatus, -a, -um, eram, eras, laudaverat, etc. erat, etc. / had praised. / had been praised. Futp. laudavero, laudaveris, laudatus, -a, -um, ero, eris, erit, laudaverit, etc. etc. / shall have praised. / shall have been praised. Active — Subjunctive Present Imperfect Perfect Pluperfect laudem laudarem laudaverim laudavissem laudes laudares laudaveris laudavisses laudet laudaret laudaverit laudavisset laudemus laudaremus laudaverimus laudavissemus laudetis laudaretis laudaveritis laudavissetis laudent laudarent laudaverint laudavissent Passive — Subjunctive Present Imperfect Perfect Pluperfect lauder laudarer laudatus, -a, -um, laudatus, -a, -um, lauderis laudareris sim, sit, sis essem, esses, es- laudetur laudaretur set laudemur laudaremur laudati, -ae, -a, laudati, ae, -a, es- laudemini laudaremini simus, sitis, semus, essetis, laudentur laudarentur sint essent 33* APPLIED LATIN Imperative Active Passive Present Future Present Future 2. lauda 2. laudato, 2. laudare, 2. laudator, praise thou thou shall praise be thou praised thou shall be praised 3. laudato, 3. laudator, he shall praise he shall be prais- ed 2. laudate, 2. laudatote, 2. laudamini, praise ye you shall praise be ye praised 3. laudanto, 3. laudantor, they shall praise they shall be praised Infinitive Active Passive Pres. laudare, to praise laudari, to be praised Perf. laudavisse, to have praised laudatus, -a> -um, esse, to have been praised Fut. laudaturus, -a, -um, esse, laudatum iri, to be about to be to be about to praise praised Participle Active Passive Pres. laudans, -antis, praising Perf. laudatus, -a, -um, having Fut. laudaturus, -a, -um, about to been praised praise Gerund Gerundive Norn. laudandus, -a, -um, to be loved Gen. laudandi, of praising Dat. laudando, to or for praising Supine Ace. laudandum, praising Ace. laudatum, to praise A bl. laudando, by praising A bl. laudatu, in praising 826. SECOND CONJUGATION. HABEO. VERBS IN E Principal Parts, habeo, habere, habui, habitus Indicative Active Passive Pres. habeo, habes, habet, etc. habeor, haberis, habetur, etc. Imp. habebam, habebas, habebat, habebar, habebaris, habebatur, etc. etc. Fut. habebo,habebis,habebit,etc. habebor, habeberis, habebitur,etc. Perf. habui, habuisti, habuit, etc. habitus, -a, -um, sum, es, est, etc. Plup. habueram, habueras, habu- habitus, -a, -um, eram, eras, erat, erat, etc. etc. Futp. habuero, habueris, habuerit, habitus, -a, -um, ero, eris, erit, etc. etc. 332 SYNOPSIS OF FORMS Active — Subjunctive Present Imperfect Perfect Pluperfect habeam haberem habuerim habuissem habeas haberes habueris habuisses habeat haberet habuerit habuisset habeamus haberemus habuerimus habuissemus habeatis haberetis habueritis habuissetis habeant haberent habuerint habuissent Passive — Subjunctive Present Imperfect Perfect Pluperfect habear haberer habitus, -a, -um, habitus, -a, -um, habearis habereris sim, sis, sit essem, esses, habeatur haberetur esset habeamur haberemur habiti, -ae, -a, habiti, -ae, -a, es- habeamini haberemini simus, sitis, semus, essetis, habeantur haberentur sint Imperative essent Active Passive Future Present Future 2. habe 2. habeto 2. habere 2. habetor 3. habeto 3. habetor 2. habete 2. habetote 2. habemini 3. habento Infinitive 3. habentor Pres. habere Pres. haberi Per/, habuisse Perf. habitus, -a, -um, esse Fut. habiturus, -a, -um, esse Fut. habitum iri Participle Pres. habens , entis Perf. habitus i, -a, -um Fut. habiturus, -a, -um Gerund Gerundive Nom. habendus, -a , -um Gen. habendi Dat. habendo Ace. habendum A bl. habendo Supine Ace. habitum Abl. habitu Note: Supply the meanings of the tenses, etc., from the conjugation of laudo. 333 APPLIED LATIN 827. THIRD CONJUGATION. DUCO. VERBS IN E Principal Parts, duco, due ere, duxi, ductus Indicative Active Pres. duco, ducis, ducit, etc. Imp. ducebam, ducebas, ducebat, etc. Fut. ducam, duces, ducet, etc. Perf. duxi, duxisti, duxit, etc. Plup. duxeram, duxeras, duxerat, etc. Passive ducor, diiceris, ducitur, etc. ducebar, ducebaris, ducebatur, etc. ducar, diiceris, ducetur, etc. ductus, -a, -um, sum, es, est, etc. ductus, -a, -um, eram, eras, erat, etc. Fulp. duxero, duxeris, duxerit, etc. ductus, -a, -um, ero, eris, erit, etc. Active — Subjunctive Present Imperfect Perfect Pluperfect ducam ducerem duxerim duxissem ducas duceres duxeris duxisses ducat duceret duxerit duxisset ducamus diiceremus duxerimus duxissemus ducatis duceretis duxeritis duxissetis ducant ducerent duxerint duxissent Passive — Subjunctive Present Imperfect Perfect Pluperfect ducar ducerer ductus, -a, -um, ductus, -a, -um, ducaris ducereris sim, sis, sit essem, esses, ducatur duceretur esset ducamur duceremur ducti, -ae, -a, ducti, -ae, -a, ducamini duceremini simus, sitis, essemus, essetis, ducantur ducerentur sint Imperative essent Present Future Present Future 2. due* 2. ducito 2. ducere 2. ducitor 3. ducito 3. ducitor 2. ducite 2. ducitote 2. ducimini 3. ducunto Infinitive 3. ducuntor Pres. ducer« Pres. duci Perf. duxisse Perf. ductus, -a, -um, esse Fut. ducturus, -a, -um, esse Fut. ductum iri * Regular verbs end in this form in -e, duco makes an irregular impera- tive form dik. 334 SYNOPSIS OF FORMS Active Pres. ducens, -entis Fut. ducturus, -a, -um Gerund Norn. Gen. ducendi Dat. ducendo Supine Ace. dticendum Ace. ductum Abl. ducendo AM. ductu Participle Passive Perf. ductus, -a, -um Gerundive ducendus, -a, -um 828. THIRD CONJUGATION. CAPIO. VERBS IN 10 Principal Parts, capio, capere, cepl, captus Active Indicative Passive Pres. capio, capis, capit, etc. capior, caperis, capitur, etc. Imp. capiebam, capiebas, capiebat, capiebar, capiebaris, capieba- tur, etc. capiar, capieris, capietur, etc. captus, -a, -um, sum, es, est, etc. captus, -a, -um, eram, eras, erat, etc. captus, -a, -um, erd, eris, erit, etc. etc. Fut. capiam, capies, capiet, etc. Perf. cepi, cepisti, cepit, etc. Plup. ceperam, ceperas, ceperat, etc. Futp. ceperd, ceperis, ceperit, etc. Active — Subjunctive Present Imperfect Perfect Pluperfect capiam caperem ceperim cepissem capias caperes ceperis cepisses capiat caperet ceperit cepisset capiamus caperemus ceperimus cepissemus capiatis caperetis ceperitis cepissetis capiant caperent ceperint cepissent Passive — Subjunctive Present Imperfect Perfect Pluperfect capiar caperer captus, -a, -um, captus, -a, -um, capiaris capereris sim, sis, sit essem, esses, capiatur caperetur esset capiamur caperemur capti, -ae, -a, capti, -ae, -a, es- capiamini caperemini simus, sitis, semus, essetis, capiantur caperentur sint Imperative essent Active Passive Present Future Present Future 2. cape 2. capito 2. capere 2. capitor 3. capito 3. capitor 2. capite 2. capitote 2. capimini 3. capiunto 3. capiuntor 335 APPLIED LATIN Active Pres. capere Per], cepisse Fut. capturus, -a, -um, Pres. capiens, -entis Fut. capturus, -a, -um Gerund Norn. Gen. capiendi Dat. capiendo Supine Ace. capiendum Ace. captum AM. capiendo AM. captu Infinitive Passive Pres. cap! Per/, captus, -a, -um, esse Fut. captum Iri Participle Perf. captus, -a, -um Gerundive capiendus, -a, -um 829. FOURTH CONJUGATION. AUDIO. VERBS IN I Principal Parts, audio, audire, audivi, audltus Indicative Active Pres. audio, audls, audit, etc. Imp. audiebam, audiebas, audie- bat, etc. Fut. audiam, audies, audiet, etc. Perf. audivi, audlvisti, audivit, etc Plup. audlveram, audlveras, audiv erat, etc. Futp. audivero, audiveris, audiverit, audltus, -a, -um, ero, eris, erit, etc. etc. Passive audior, audlris, audltur, etc. audiebar, audiebaris, audieba- tur, etc. audiar, audieris, audietur, etc. audltus, -a, -um, sum, es, est, etc. audltus, -a, -um, eram, eras, erat, etc. Present audiam Active- Imperfect audirem —Subjunctive Perfect audiverim Pluperfect audivissem audias audlres audiveris audivisses audiat audlret audiverit audivisset audiamus audlremus audiverimus audivissemus audiatis audlretis audiv eritis audivissetis audiant audirent audiverint audivissent Present audiar Passive Imperfect audlrer — Subjunctive Perfect auditus, -a, Pluperfect auditus, -a, -um, audiaris audireris -um, sim, essem, esses, audiatur audiretur sis, sit esset audiamur audlremur auditi, -ae, auditi, -ae, -a, es- audiamini audiremini -a, simus, esmus, essetis audiantur audirentur sitis, sint 336 essent SYNOPSIS OF FORMS Active Present Future 2. audi 2. audito 3. audito 2. audite 2. audltote 3. audiunto Pres. audire Perf. audlvisse Fut. auditurus, -a, -um, esse Imperative Present 2. audire 2. audimini Passive Future 2. auditor 3. auditor 3. audiuntor Infinitive Pres. audiri Perf. auditus, -a, -um, esse Fut. auditum iri Pres. audiens, -entis Fut. auditurus, -a, -um Gerund Nom. Gen. audiendi Dat. audiendo Ace. audiendum Abl. audiendo Participle Perf. auditus, -a, -um Gerundive audiendus, -a, -um Supine Ace. auditum A bl. auditu 830. THE PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS Indicative Active Periphrastic Pres. laudaturus sum, / am about to praise Imp. laudaturus eram, / was about to praise Fut. laudaturus ero, / shall be about to praise Perf. laudaturus fui, / have been about to praise Plup. laudaturus fueram, / had been about to praise Futp. laudaturus fuero, / shall have been about to praise Passive Periphrastic laudandus sum, / must be praised laudandus eram, / had to be praised laudandus ero, / shall have to be praised laudandus fui, / have had to be praised laudandus fueram, / had had to be praised laudandus fuero, / shall have had to be praised Active Pres. laudaturus sim Imp. laudaturus essem Perf. laudaturus fuerim Plup. laudaturus fuissem Pres. laudaturus esse Fut. laudaturus fuisse Subjunctive Passive laudandus sim laudandus essem laudandus fuerim laudandus fuissem Infinitive laudandus esse laudandus fuisse 337 APPLIED LATIN In the periphrastic conjugations there are no forms of the imperative, participles, gerund, gerundive, or supine. The periphrastic conjugations of the other regular verbs are: Active Passive habiturus sum, etc., habendus sum, etc., / am about to have I must be had {held) ducturus sum, etc., ducendus sum, etc., / am about to lead I must be led capturus sum, etc., capiendus sum, etc., / am about to take I must be taken audlturus sum, etc., audiendus sum, etc., / am about to hear I must be heard 831. THE VERB SUM Principal Parts, sum, esse, fui, , to be Indicative Pres. sum, es, est, etc., Perf. fui, fuisti, fuit, etc., / am, etc. / have been, etc. Imp. eram, eras, erat, etc., Plup. fueram, fueras, fuerat, / was, etc. etc., / had been, etc. Fui. erd, eris, erit, etc., Futp. fuero, fueris, fuerit, etc., / shall be, etc. / shall have been, etc. Subjunctive Pres. Imp. Perf. Plup. sim essem fuerim fuissem sis esses fueris fuisses sit esset fuerit fuisset simus essemus fuerimus fuissemus sitis essetis fueritis fuissetis sint essent fuerint fuissent Imperative Infinitive Pres. es, be (thou) Fut. esto, thou shalt be Pres. esse, to be esto, he shall be Perf. fuisse, to have been este, be (ye) estote, ye shall be Fut. futurus, -a, -um, esse, sunto, they shall be to be about to be Participle Fut. futurus, -a, -um, about to be 338 SYNOPSIS OF FORMS 832. THE VERB POSSUM Principal Parts, possum, posse, potui, , to be able Indicative Pres. possum, / am able, I can potes, you are able, you can potest, he {she, it) is able, can possumus, we are able, we can potestis, you arc able, you can possunt, they are able, they can Imp. poteram, poteras, poterat, etc. / was able {could), etc. Fut. potero, poteris, poterit, etc. / shall be able, etc. Perf. potui, / have been able, could potuisti, you have been able, could potuit, he {she, it) has been able, could potuimus, we have been able, could potuistis, you have been able, could potuSrunt, tliey have been able, could Plup. potueram, potueras, pot- uerat, etc., / had been able, etc. Futp. potuero, potueris, potuerit, / shall have been able, etc. Pres. possim possis possit possimus possitis possint Perf. potuerim potueris potuerit potuerimus potueritis potuerint Subjunctive Imp. possem posses posset possemus possetis possent Plup. potuissem potuisses potuisset potuissemus potuissetis potuissent Infinitive Pres. posse, to be able Perf. potuisse, to have been able Participle Pres. potens, -entis, {adjective), powerful 833. THE IRREGULAR VERBS, VOLO, NOLO, MALO Principal Parts : volo, velle, volui, , to wish nolo, nolle, nolui, , to be unwilling maid, malle, malui, — Indicative — , to prefer Pres. volo nolo maid vis non vis mavis vult non vult mavult volumus nolumus malumus vultis non vultis mavultis volunt nolunt malunt 339 APPLIED LATIN Imp. volebam, -bas, etc. nolebam, -bas, etc. Fut. volam, -es, etc. Perf. volui, -isti, etc. Plwb. volueram, -eras, etc. Futp. voluero, -eris, etc. Pres. velim velis velit velimus velitis velint Imp. vellem velles vellet vellemus velletis vellent Perf. voluerim, -eris, etc, Plup. voluissem, -es, etc. Pres. Fut. Pres. velle Perf. voluisse Pres. volens, -entis nolam, -es, etc. nolui, -isti, etc. nolueram, -eras, etc. noluero, -eris, etc. Subjunctive nolim noils nolit nolimus nolitis nolint nollem nolles nollet nollemus nolletis nollent noluerim, -eris, etc. noluissem, -es, etc. Imperative noli nolite nolito nolito nolitote nolunto Infinitive nolle noluisse Participle nolens, -entis malebam, -bas, etc. malam, -es, etc. malui, -isti, etc. malueram, -eras, etc. maluero, -eris, etc. malim mails malit malimus malitis malint mallem malles mallet mallemus malletis mallent maluerim, -eris, etc. maluissem, -es, etc. malle maluisse 834. IMPERSONAL VERB Principal Parts, licet, licere, licuit (licitum est), it is allowed Indicative Pres. licet Imp. licebat Fut. licebit Perf. licuit (licitum est) Plup. licuerat Futp. licuerit Subjunctive Pres. liceat Imp. liceret Perf. licuerit Plup. licuisset 340 Infinitive Pres. licere Perf. licuisse Fut. liciturum SYNOPSIS OF FORMS § § o 3 in u 1 1 1 'l i 1 1 i 1 1 1 2 9 3 3 O O O O a a a a .3 CD W W +->*-> en en rt ct) rt cj a a a a S n H 3 .9 3 <3 o 4-1 -t-> cr'g cu cd en en * '3 111 9 3 g CO CO w CO CO 09 3 3 3 +j +j +j si 3 CD >o > o w & '2 d cu •o > 3 ^ a ° O cu o > w, w =3 2 CU 1 CD 'JO 1 CD ICD CD ICD 1 CD "- 1 u !r! cu CD JJ > > > 5 S o « «g g a x> x* S B 3 " 'S -c -c -c CD CD CD CD CD CD CD >>>>>>> H W CO . CU W W Hh S. '3 i3 CT CT cd cd £ £ £ £ 0> B ■- fi W tt .2 w ri w *> 3 2 & 3 3 .O CD ICD .f5 •- -i CD CD CD CD CO > > > > CO CO g o S s 3 .2 o 4 "5 -5 cu CQ o Cn Oh Oh 5 .a a a tl15 H .•» • O icd ico icd icd OOOOO iO o o o o cj cj O u U .O CO icd 333 +■> ■*-> -£ .1 -(_■ CU ICO ICO ICO O O C O O O O O CJ CD CD CD S3 ^ ft* 5 fti fti 341 APPLIED LATIN o> o Jj g aa 4> w sfig aaa a J3 S '•S3 && II g eg cd n ci a a a .•jj ? s r; cd ri a a h a s g CO CO co tn a a ■a a u y o u CO r/l I ICU '£ «> 5 S3 do 3 cu > O d 2 3 CO fl * I S •e *c cu cu > > w J* « 1 0) o l- •«-» td >d a S iO o cu U 3 * td \d td 8 5 6*0 'I CM 9 ,§ S -c: t' 3 i ■»* „ 3 co" d 1 •3 d 1 CO d 1 i s u c/T CO 1 '3 id 5 a a a q 10 u u u &9 **c, 3 "3 6 Os S, »s is Is 9 £ * 346, 378- 379- indefinite, quis, aliquis, etc., 634, 635. interrogative, 363. personal, 288, 303. reflexive, 322. relative, 499. Pronunciation, Introduction. Purpose, expressed by gerundive with ad, 603. relative clauses of, 496. by subjunctive, 404-6, 764. by supine, 620. Quantity, Introduction. -que, enclitic, 281. Questions, direct, 258-260. indirect, 777. Qui, declension, 363. Quis, declension, 364. Relative clauses, 496-512. pronoun, 499. Result, 423-427. Riis, 141. Sentences, Introduction, 258, 274, 387, 393- Sequences of tenses, 412-417. Subjunctive mood, 398. hortatory subjunctive, 526. indirect discourse, 793. indirect questions, 777. of purpose, 404-6, 764. of result, 423-427. with verbs of fearing, 770. Suffixes, 714. Sui, declined, 322. Sum, 262, 461, 831. Supine, 620-622. xlii INDEX Suus, distinguished from eius, 323. Syllables, Introduction. Temporal clauses, 433~430, 443~445> 448-450. Totus, declension, 352. Tres, declension, 819. Unus, declension, 819. Utinam, with subjunctive, 534. Verb, rule for agreement, 86. definitions, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 88, 94- Vocative case, 44. Void, 687. Vowels, Introduction. Wishes, 525-534- Word lists, 803. order, 101. xliii 4* YB 41180 U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY